bar admin guide

BAR Administration Guide

i

DeclarationsDocument Notice

Copyright Copyright © 2005 by Pannaway Technologies, Inc.

All rights reserved.

Rights Pannaway Technologies, Inc. makes no representation that software programs and practices described herein will not infringe on existing or future patent rights, copyrights, trademarks, trade secrets or other proprietary rights of third parties and Pannaway Technologies, Inc. makes no warranties of any kind, either express or implied, and expressly disclaims any such warranties, including but not limited to any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose and any warranties of non-infringement. The descriptions contained herein do not imply the granting of licenses to make, use, sell, license or otherwise transfer Pannaway Technologies, Inc. products described herein. Pannaway Technologies, Inc. disclaims responsibility for errors which may appear in this document, and it reserves the right, in its sole discretion and without notice, to make substitutions and modifications in the products and practices described in this document.

Trademarks The Pannaway logo, Redefining Broadband Convergence, Service Convergence Network, PBG, RGN, BAR, BAS and NMX are trademarks of Pannaway Technologies, Inc.

Revision History Pannaway Broadband Aggregation Router Administration Guide

Part Number: 850-0000011-03 (A)

Revision A drafted: 11/10/2005


ii

Standard Limited Warranty

As the original purchaser you will receive the following warranties from Pannaway Technologies, Inc.

Under normal operating conditions for which the product was designed, Pannaway Technologies warrants that all of its Service Convergence Network hardware components shall be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of twelve (12) months from the shipment date from Pannaway Technologies, Inc.

Hardware In the event that Pannaway Technologies receives notice during the warranty period that any of its hardware does not conform to its warranty, Pannaway Technologies will provide return-to-factory repair, with a 10-business day turnaround from the date of receipt of the product at Pannaway Technologies. Pannaway Technologies, at its sole option, will either repair or replace the nonconforming hardware. Hardware replaced under the terms of any such warranty may be refurbished or new equipment substituted at the option of Pannaway Technologies. All repaired or replaced hardware shall carry a warranty that is equal to either the balance of the warranty on the original purchase or 90 days, whichever is greater.

Items may only be returned with the prior approval of Pannaway Technologies. All approvals shall reference a return material authorization (RMA) number issued by authorized Pannaway Technologies Service personnel. Transportation costs, if any, incurred in connection with the return of a defective component to Pannaway Technologies shall be paid by Pannaway Technologies. If, however, Pannaway Technologies reasonably determines that the item is functional and not defective, the customer shall pay all transportation costs.

Any shipment cost incurred for any component returned after the warranty period has expired shall be the responsibility of the customer.

DOA Component For up to thirty (30) days from the delivery date of the product, Pannaway Technologies will provide expedited replacement of inoperative hardware. Upon validation of a DOA request a new replacement unit will be shipped within 2 business days.

Pannaway Technologies shall not be liable for any data contained within any returned warranty components.

THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS THE ONLY WARRANTY MADE FOR THE HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE OF THIS PRODUCT. TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, NO OTHER WARRANTY APPLIES, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR OF NON-INFRINGEMENT.

This warranty gives you specific legal rights which may vary from state to state. Some states do not allow the exclusion of liability for consequential damages, so the above limitation may not apply to you.

IN NO EVENT SHALL PANNAWAY TECHNOLOGIES INC. BE LIABLE OR RESPONSIBLE FOR INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, INDIRECT, SPECIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR FOR DAMAGE TO ANY EQUIPMENT, LOSS OF REVENUE, LOSS OF BUSINESS, OR ANY OTHER FINANCIAL LOSS RESULTING FROM THE SALE, INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE, USE, PERFORMANCE, FAILURE, OR INTERRUPTION OF THIS PRODUCT.


iii

Return and Repair PolicyFor any Pannaway Technologies product that needs to be returned or repaired please contact the Pannaway Technologies Technical Assistance Center to obtain a Return Material Authorization (RMA) number. RMA numbers are vital to ensure the proper handling and repair/replacement of your returned product. Please do not return any product to Pannaway Technologies without a valid RMA number. Product returned to Pannaway Technologies without a valid RMA number may be refused and returned to the shipper’s address.

Please refer to Pannaway Technologies Standard Limited Warranty Policy for further information.

To obtain an RMA number, please contact the Pannaway Technologies Technical Assistance Center in one of the following ways:

• Call 877-726-6299 (US toll-free) or 603-766-5175 (US long distance)• Send an e-mail to [email protected]

Please have the following information available when requesting an RMA number:

• Product type• Product serial number• Return shipping address• Contact name (must be located at the shipping address)• Contact phone number • Contact e-mail address


iv

CONTENTS

DECLARATIONS

Document Notice .................................................................................................................................................................... iCopyright .................................................................................................................................................................. iRights......................................................................................................................................................................... iTrademarks ............................................................................................................................................................... iRevision History ...................................................................................................................................................... i

Standard Limited Warranty.................................................................................................................................................... iiHardware.................................................................................................................................................................. iiDOA Component................................................................................................................................................... ii

Return and Repair Policy ...................................................................................................................................................... iii

CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION

Welcome................................................................................................................................................................................1-1Contents of this Chapter: ...................................................................................................................................1-1

About This Manual ..............................................................................................................................................................1-2Manual Contents..................................................................................................................................................1-2Audience ...............................................................................................................................................................1-3Related Documents .............................................................................................................................................1-3

Using This Manual ...............................................................................................................................................................1-4Document Conventions .....................................................................................................................................1-4

Management and Administration Overview....................................................................................................................1-5Getting Technical Support .................................................................................................................................................1-5

CHAPTER 2: USING THE BAR CLIContents of this Chapter.....................................................................................................................................................2-1Accessing CLI management ...............................................................................................................................................2-2

Local Console Interface......................................................................................................................................2-2Remote Terminal Session...................................................................................................................................2-2

Entering Commands............................................................................................................................................................2-3Using “no” Form Commands............................................................................................................................................2-3Navigating Command Modes ............................................................................................................................................2-4

The Mode Structure ............................................................................................................................................2-4Changing Modes ..................................................................................................................................................2-6


vi

Understanding Errors..........................................................................................................................................................2-7Unexpected Input Errors ...................................................................................................................................2-7Incomplete Information Errors ........................................................................................................................2-8

Getting System Help............................................................................................................................................................2-8Listing Available Commands .............................................................................................................................2-8Auto-Completing Fields .....................................................................................................................................2-8Showing Key Bindings........................................................................................................................................2-8

Identifying Interfaces...........................................................................................................................................................2-9Physical Interfaces ...............................................................................................................................................2-9Port-Channels.......................................................................................................................................................2-9Routing Interfaces ...............................................................................................................................................2-9

CLI Documentation Conventions...................................................................................................................................2-10

CHAPTER 3: SWITCH CONFIGURATION COMMANDS

Contents of this Chapter.....................................................................................................................................................3-1Port Configuration Commands .........................................................................................................................................3-1Switching Configuration Commands................................................................................................................................3-5Switching Display Commands .........................................................................................................................................3-10Spanning Tree Configuration Commands .....................................................................................................................3-12Spanning Tree Display Commands.................................................................................................................................3-21System Information and Statistics Commands..............................................................................................................3-30

CHAPTER 4: VLAN CONFIGURATION COMMANDS

Contents of this Chapter.....................................................................................................................................................4-1Port-Channel Commands ...................................................................................................................................................4-1VLAN Management Commands.......................................................................................................................................4-7MAC Filtering Commands ...............................................................................................................................................4-16LACP Protocol Commands .............................................................................................................................................4-19Protocol-Based VLAN Commands ................................................................................................................................4-20IGMP Commands..............................................................................................................................................................4-24Dot1P Commands .............................................................................................................................................................4-28VLAN Display Commands ..............................................................................................................................................4-30

CHAPTER 5: PROTOCOL INDEPENDENT ROUTING COMMANDS

Contents of this Chapter.....................................................................................................................................................5-1General Routing Configuration Commands....................................................................................................................5-1General Routing Display Commands ...............................................................................................................................5-6ARP Configuration Commands.........................................................................................................................................5-9ARP Display Commands ..................................................................................................................................................5-13BootP/DHCP Relay Configuration Commands ..........................................................................................................5-16BootP/DHCP Relay Display Commands......................................................................................................................5-18


vii

CHAPTER 6: RIP ROUTING COMMANDS

Contents of this Chapter.....................................................................................................................................................6-1RIP Configuration Commands ..........................................................................................................................................6-1

System-Level RIP Commands...........................................................................................................................6-1Interface-level RIP Commands .........................................................................................................................6-6

RIP Display Commands......................................................................................................................................................6-9

CHAPTER 7: OSPF ROUTING COMMANDS

Contents of this Chapter.....................................................................................................................................................7-1OSPF Configuration Commands ......................................................................................................................................7-1

System-Level OSPF Commands .......................................................................................................................7-1Interface-Level OSPF Commands..................................................................................................................7-17

OSPF Display Commands................................................................................................................................................7-22Interface-Level Monitoring Commands ........................................................................................................7-31

CHAPTER 8: VRRP ROUTING COMMANDS

Contents of this Chapter.....................................................................................................................................................8-1VRRP Configuration Commands......................................................................................................................................8-1VRRP Display Commands .................................................................................................................................................8-5

CHAPTER 9: MULTICAST COMMANDS

Contents of this Chapter.....................................................................................................................................................9-1Multicast Configuration Commands.................................................................................................................................9-1

System-Level Commands ...................................................................................................................................9-1Interface-Level Commands................................................................................................................................9-7Multicast Query and Trace Commands .........................................................................................................9-16

Multicast Display Commands ..........................................................................................................................................9-18

CHAPTER 10: DHCP SERVER COMMANDS

Contents of this Chapter...................................................................................................................................................10-1DHCP Server Configuration Commands ......................................................................................................................10-1DHCP Pool Configuration...............................................................................................................................................10-3DHCP Server Display Commands..................................................................................................................................10-8DHCP Server Clear Commands................................................................................................................................... 10-12

CHAPTER 11: SESSION CONTROL

Contents of this Chapter...................................................................................................................................................11-1Session Control Commands .............................................................................................................................................11-1Session Monitoring and Display Commands.................................................................................................................11-9


viii

CHAPTER 12: HTTP AND SSH CONFIGURATION

Contents of this Chapter...................................................................................................................................................12-1Secure HTTP Commands.................................................................................................................................................12-1Secure Shell (SSH) Commands ........................................................................................................................................12-4

CHAPTER 13: SNMP COMMANDS

Contents of this Chapter...................................................................................................................................................13-1SNMP Configuration Commands ...................................................................................................................................13-1SNMP Display Commands ........................................................................................................................................... 13-12

CHAPTER 14: ACCESS CONTROL LISTS

ACL Control Commands..................................................................................................................................................14-1

CHAPTER 15: DEVICE UTILITIES

Utility Commands ..............................................................................................................................................................15-1System Identification Commands ...................................................................................................................15-1General System Commands.............................................................................................................................15-2

System Clock Commands .............................................................................................................................................. 15-14Manual System Clock Setting........................................................................................................................ 15-14Automatic System Clock Setting .................................................................................................................. 15-15Timezone and Daylight Savings ................................................................................................................... 15-19Clock and SNTP Display Commands ......................................................................................................... 15-20

APPENDIX A: LIST OF CLI COMMANDS

Chapter 1Introduction

This guide provides administration and control information for the Pannaway Technologies Broadband Aggregation Router (BAR). The features and commands described in this Administration Guide are available on all Broadband Aggregation Router platforms supplied by Pannaway Technologies.

Figure 1-1. The Pannaway BAR-GE12

The BAR Administration Guide covers the configuration and management of a BAR that has been installed and powered up. Instructions for BAR physical installation and initialization are provided in the Pannaway Broadband Aggregation Router Installation Guide.

1.1 WelcomeThank you for taking the time to read the BAR Administration Guide. This manual contains descriptions of BAR capabilities and instructions for configuring, monitoring, and managing the BAR as a part of an active telecommunications network.

Contents of this Chapter:

This chapter provides information about the manual itself, a list of the chapters and appendices, and instructions for using the manual and the Pannaway documentation set to your best advantage.


1-2

1.2About This Manual

This chapter contains the following sections:

1.2 About This ManualThe following information describes the BAR Administration Guide, the contents of its chapters, and the conventions it uses to present information.

Manual Contents This manual contains the following chapters:

Chapter 2, “Using the BAR CLI”, describes the BAR Command Line Interface (CLI) and provides instructions and guidelines for using it to configure and manage the BAR. This chapter includes an explanation of the presentation format used for all CLI commands in the BAR Administration Guide.

Chapter 3, “Switch Configuration Commands”, lists commands that control and configure the operation of the BAR’s network interface ports, switching fabric, and other network switching operations.

Chapter 4, “VLAN Configuration Commands”, describes the commands that are used to create Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) and to set up filtering and forwarding associations for those VLANs. The chapter also provides descriptions of commands that monitor the operation of VLANs in the BAR.

Chapter 5, “Protocol Independent Routing Commands”, deals with the administration of Internet Protocol routing settings in the BAR. This chapter provides information on static route configuration, general IP routing settings, and the monitoring of IP routes.

Chapter 6, “RIP Routing Commands” presents the commands that configure the operation of the Routing Information Protocol (RIP) on the BAR.

Chapter 7, “OSPF Routing Commands”, lists and describes the commands that control Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing on the BAR. The commands in this section set up and maintain associations between OSPF routers in the BAR’s connected networks, and enable the BAR to participate as an OSPF router.

Chapter 8, “VRRP Routing Commands”, provides descriptions of the commands that configure the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) settings of the BAR.

Chapter 9, “Multicast Commands”, presents the commands that configure Multicast routing on the BAR, including the creation of multicast groups, the administration of group memberships and notifications, and the operation of protocols such as the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) on the BAR.

Chapter 10, “DHCP Server Commands”, lists the commands that enable the BAR to act as a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server. The commands in this chapter are important if the BAR will be controlling the assignment of network addresses to connected devices and hosts.

Topic on page

About This Manual 1-2

Using This Manual 1-4

Management and Administration Overview 1-5

Getting Technical Support 1-5


1-3

1.2About This

Manual

Chapter 11, “Session Control”, details the commands that provide information about active management sessions and the commands that give control over those sessions. The commands in this chapter detail changing automated session timeouts, local console port operation settings, and the administrative disconnection of active CLI sessions.

Chapter 12, “HTTP and SSH Configuration”, presents the commands that control Secure HyperText Transfer Protocol (HTTPs) and Secure Shell (SSH) operation in the BAR. These protocols are used to manage the BAR through web clients (Secure HTTP) or remote shells (SSH).

Chapter 13, “SNMP Commands”, presents and describes the commands that configure and manage the operation of the BAR’s Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) management client. This chapter provides information on configuring the BAR to send SNMP messages to a remote station, the modification of SNMP communities, and the activation of SNMP traps.

Chapter 14, “Access Control Lists” describes the creation and modification of Access Control Lists (ACLs) and rules for the BAR.

Chapter 15, “Device Utilities” provides descriptions of CLI commands that perform utility functions on the BAR, including custom naming, configuration clearing, system log operations, and file and configuration transfer.

Appendix A, “List of CLI Commands”, is an alphabetical list of all the CLI commands presented in this document with page number references for their descriptions in the main text. This list of commands may be useful for researching a particular command or for finding a known command in the manual.

The manual also provides a topical Index, Table of Contents, and applicable notices and statements of rights.

Audience This manual is intended for use by the following audience groups:

• Network Administrators and Engineers responsible for the configuration and set-up of the Pannaway BAR.

• Network Administration and Management personnel responsible for performing add/change operations, revising configurations, and rolling out new services or capabilities.

• Network Management personnel tasked with tracking configurations, monitoring operational statistics, and performing periodic examinations of system operation.

• Troubleshooters attempting to isolate and correct network issues that may involve the BAR.

The instructions and information in this manual assume that the network administrator or engineer working with the BAR is knowledgeable about the signaling, routing, and networking technologies being implemented. Further, the guide assumes familiarity with the capabilities of the BAR itself.

Related Documents The BAR Administration Guide focuses on the configuration and management of the BAR in a functioning network, and does not provide information about other Pannaway products or about physical installation and physical plant troubleshooting. Information on these topics may be found in other documents produced by Pannaway Technologies.


1-4

1.3Using This Manual

Other Documents Other information about the configuration of the BAR, and the administration of the Pannaway Service Convergence Network, may be found in the following documents:

• Pannaway BAR Installation Guide• Pannaway BAR-GE12 Quick Installation Card• Pannaway BAS Installation and Administration Guide• Pannaway PBG User Guide• Pannaway RGN-ADSL User Guide

Obtaining Documents Pannaway Technologies, Incorporated maintains its own document sets and provides copies of documents to resellers and to supported customers directly. Pannaway maintains current versions of the documentation set, and can supply versions applicable to particular product releases if required.

If you require Pannaway documentation, you may call Pannaway Technologies to request a documentation set. The documentation set can be provided in CD-ROM format, or may be downloaded from the Pannaway Technologies support and service web site.

1.3 Using This ManualThis Administration Guide provides the information and instructions needed to prepare, install, and activate a Pannaway Technologies Broadband Aggregation Router, or BAR. To make the best use of this document, an installation or service engineer must understand the presentation and formatting of the document.

Document Conventions

Throughout this document, certain presentations of text and other items are used consistently.

Cautions This document provides text callouts that announce potential hazards. The callouts are used to draw attention to important safety or performance issues. The type of hazard or danger is dependent upon the type of callout that is provided.

In all cases, pay particular attention to the Caution callouts. Other types of warning and caution callouts may be found in the text, and should always be read before proceeding with a step or action.

Notes and Tips The Note and Tip callouts in the text supply additional information to make installation, management, and configuration of the BAR easier. These notes and tips may not apply to all conditions or implementations.

CAUTION: Cautions provide notification that an action, if taken, may damage the BAR or other equipment, cause degradation of network performance, or result in unintentional misconfiguration of the BAR.

NOTE: This format is used for Notes. Notes are used to provide additional information concerning associated steps or actions.

TIP: This format is used for Tips. Tips are used to provide advanced information which will enhance the understanding of the task in the future.


1-5

1.4Management

andAdministration

Overview

CLI Presentation All CLI commands presented in this document follow a consistent organization and use a particular formatting. A description of this formatting is provided in Chapter 2, “Using the BAR CLI”, which gives a general introduction to the Command Line Interface’s capabilities and to the command descriptions in this Guide.

1.4 Management and Administration OverviewThe Pannaway Technologies BAR is a Gigabit Ethernet (GbE) router that manages the converged traffic of up to ten Pannaway Broadband Aggregation Switch (BAS) systems or other Gigabit Ethernet network devices. The BAR is a key component of the Pannaway Service Convergence Network (SCN), and a robust, multifunctional router for many multicast networking situations.

Configuring the BAR for operation in the network involves setting up the behavior of the device interfaces and ports, configuring switch settings (including Spanning Tree operation), developing Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) designations and filtering rules, and specifying routing behavior for unicast and broadcast communications, as well as creating multicast groups.

Further configuration includes the specification of SNMP, Secure HTTP, and Secure Shell management associations and behaviors, setting authentication parameters, user accounts and passwords, and Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) services and message handling.

The specific configuration and management of a multi-protocol router is highly dependent upon the installation site and the protocols, users, and implementations to be supported by the router. In this BAR Administration Guide, the configuration information is grouped by technology or protocol, and the commands presented may or may not apply to each specific implementation.

Once the BAR is operating properly, management tasks focus more closely on changing and reconfiguring existing settings in order to roll out or roll back services and capabilities. Monitoring the operation of the BAR and collecting statistics for interfaces, groups, or protocols is also important for ongoing management, and these tasks are described in this Administration Guide.

1.5 Getting Technical SupportIf you experience any difficulties installing or maintaining your Pannaway Technologies products you can contact the Pannaway Technologies Technical Assistance Center (TAC) for support.

All Pannaway Technologies contracted customers have direct access to Pannaway Technologies’ TAC, staffed with our experienced engineers. The TAC provides the following services:

• Technical Assistance Center Support: For questions regarding product functionality and services, please call 877-726-6299 (toll-free) or 603-766-5175 (long distance).

• Emergency After Hours Support: Available to our service contract customers 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, 365 days a year.

• E-mail Support: E-Mail support is provided with a guaranteed 24 hour acknowledgement. E-mail to [email protected].

For registered customers, Pannaway Technologies also provides a full self-service support portal at http://www.pannaway.com/support/index.cfm. Log-in using your provided registration information.

http://www.pannaway.com/support/index.cfm

http://www.pannaway.com/support/index.cfm


1-6

1.5Getting Technical Support

We stand ready at all times to assist you in maintaining your network.

Whenever possible, having the following information available when you report an issue will help expedite resolution time:

• Severity level of the issue• A brief problem description• Current firmware version• Pertinent log files• Serial numbers of affected hardware• Pertinent network traces• History of any network changes

Each issue reported to Pannaway Technologies will have an associated Service Request (SR) number assigned. Be sure to obtain your SR number to properly track your issue. For first-time service requests via web or e-mail, your SR number will be supplied to you upon our initial response.

Chapter 2Using the BAR CLI

This chapter explains the use of the Command Line Interface and the conventions used in this document to present and describe CLI commands.

The Pannaway BAR provides a mode-based Command Line Interface that can be used for the administration and monitoring of all BAR operations. Every configurable setting in the BAR may be accessed and modified through the system CLI.

2.1 Contents of this ChapterThe information in this chapter describes the use of the system CLI to perform BAR management. The following information is presented in this chapter:

Topic on page

Accessing CLI management 2-2

Entering Commands 2-3

Using “no” Form Commands 2-3

Navigating Command Modes 2-4

Understanding Errors 2-7

Getting System Help 2-8

Identifying Interfaces 2-9

CLI Documentation Conventions 2-10


2-2

2.2Accessing CLI management

2.2 Accessing CLI managementThe Pannaway BAR CLI can be accessed with a terminal or terminal emulator either locally or remotely. The interface, presentation and options available are the same no matter which access method is used.

Local Console Interface

The BAR CLI can be accessed by a terminal or emulator connected to the front panel Console port of the BAR. This DB9 serial interface provides a direct, local connection to the system CLI.

The initial configuration of the BAR, as described in the Pannaway BAR Installation Guide, must be performed through the front panel console connection. Only after the completion of the minimum field configuration can the BAR be accessed by a remote terminal session.

Instructions for connecting a terminal to the BAR console port and initiating a CLI management session are provided in the Pannaway BAR Installation Guide. Once connected, all management operations can be performed through the local connection as presented in this Administration Guide. The default settings for a local console management session are as follows:

• 9600 bps• 8 data bits, 1 stop bit• no parity

Remote Terminal Session

The BAR CLI responds to remote, in-band terminal sessions. These sessions connect to the BAR through existing and operating network interfaces, and can be initiated remotely by any station that knows the BAR’s IP address and has a valid network connection to any of its operating interfaces.

To establish a remote terminal session, a network management station must open a Telnet or SSH connection to the BAR’s IP address - either via a terminal emulation session or directly from the management station’s command line (if supported by the OS).

Once the session is established, the BAR will prompt for a username and password combination. The field configuration of the Pannaway BAR includes modifying the default system password for improved security. Contact the responsible field installation personnel to determine the password configured for the BAR.

A successful login places the terminal session in the “user exec” mode. From this mode, some BAR statistics and settings may be examined or changed. To perform more sensitive or detailed configuration, it is necessary to move through the various command modes of the BAR CLI. These modes, and the means of changing between them, are described in Section 2.5 , “Navigating Command Modes”.


2-3

2.3Entering

Commands

2.3 Entering CommandsAll CLI commands consist of standard characters and numbers typed in a single line and submitted with the ENTER or RETURN key. Some commands are single words or short groups of words, while other commands provide for user-entered parameters that describe operation or settings.

A command in the BAR CLI will always contain a base “command” field.

Commands The “command” portion of a CLI command is the identification of the command itself. This foundation of the command identifies what operation the BAR is to perform. When a command is supplied to a management session, this command portion is parsed by the CLI and compared to a table of known commands (the command tree).

Parameters A command may also require that certain values or settings be supplied. If the parameters are needed for the command to be processed by the CLI, they are considered mandatory parameters. If the additional parameters perform actions that are not essential to the command, or that provide additional control information, they are considered optional parameters.

A command parsed by the BAR CLI is examined for any mandatory parameters and optional parameters that may specify a particular use of the command, or to determine what settings to apply to the command. The CLI documentation provides indications of both mandatory and optional parameters for every command.

Values Many parameters require the submission of values. Values may be alphanumeric strings describing a configured field, numerical values representing configuration data, or a combination of the two. Some values require input that falls within a certain acceptable range. If a value is outside of the range, or provided in the wrong form, the CLI will produce an error message and ignore the command. In all cases, the CLI documentation will explain the expected type and acceptable ranges of command values.

2.4 Using “no” Form Commands“No” is a specific form of an existing command and does not represent a new or distinct command. Only the configuration commands are available in the “no” form.

Almost every configuration command has a “no” form. In general, use the “no” form to reverse the action of a command or reset a value back to the default. For example, the “no shutdown interface’ configuration command reverses the shutdown of an interface. Use the command without the keyword no to re-enable a disabled feature or to enable a feature that is disabled by default.

If a “no” form of a command is available, the CLI documentation will specify the accepted form of the “no” command and describe the operation of that command.


2-4

2.5Navigating Command Modes

2.5 Navigating Command ModesConfiguring and administering the Pannaway BAR requires the use of the command modes of the CLI. Each mode provides control over a set of functions, interfaces, or configuration settings in the BAR.

The Mode Structure The BAR CLI separates groups of control and monitoring commands into modes. These various modes each support specific aspects of BAR software operation. The commands available to an operator at any given point in a management session depend on the current model of the CLI session. A mode’s commands are not available until the management session has entered that mode. Once a session enters a mode, the commands outside of that mode are not available to the management session.

All CLI sessions begin in the “User Exec” mode. This mode provides a limited number of commands and control options. Other modes can be reached by moving through the mode hierarchy, as described in “Changing Modes” on page 2-6.

Figure 2-1. BAR CLI Modes

The BAR CLI provides the following command modes:

User Exec When the operator logs into the CLI, the User Exec mode is the initial mode. The User Exec mode contains a limited set of commands.

NOTE: The “Privileged Exec” mode is an exception to this rule - in the Privileged Exec mode, all commands of the “User Exec” mode are available to the management session.


2-5

2.5NavigatingCommand

Modes

Privileged Exec To have access to the full suite of commands, the operator must enter the Privileged Exec mode. The Privileged Exec mode requires password authentication. From Privileged Exec mode, the operator can issue any Exec command or enter the Global Configuration mode.

Global Config This mode permits the operator to make modifications to the running configuration. General setup commands are grouped in this mode. From the Global Configuration mode, the operator can enter the System Configuration mode, the Physical Port config, the Interface Configuration mode, or the Protocol Specific modes specified below.

From the Global Config mode, the operator may enter the following config modes:

VLAN This mode groups all the commands pertaining to VLANs.

Interface Config Many features are enabled for a particular interface. The Interface commands enable or modify the operation of an interface.

In this mode, a physical port is set up for a specific logical connection operation. The Interface Config mode provides access to the router interface configuration commands.

Line Config This mode allows the operator to configure the console interface. The operator may configure the interface from the directly connected console or the virtual terminal used with a terminal emulation program.

Policy Map Use the policy-map command to access the QoS policy map configuration mode to configure the QoS policy map.

Policy Class Use the class command to access the QoS policy-classmap mode to configure the QoS policy map.

Class Map This mode consists of class creation/deletion and matching commands. The class match commands specify layer 2, layer 3 and general match criteria. Use the class-map commands to access the QoS class map configuration mode to configure QoS class maps.

Router Config OSPF In this mode, the operator is allowed to access the router OSPF configuration commands.

Router Config RIP In this mode, the operator is allowed to access the router RIP configuration commands.

Router Config BGP In this mode, the operator is allowed to access the router BGP4 configuration commands.

Bwprovisioning Config Use the bwprovisioning command to access the Bandwidth provisioning Config Mode to configure bandwidth provisioning.

Bwprovisioning -Trafficclass

Use the traffic-class command to access the Bandwidth provisioning Config Mode to configure bandwidth traffic class.

Bwprovisioning-bwallocation

Use the bwallocation command to access the Bandwidth provisioning Config Mode to configure bandwidth allocation.

DHCP Pool Configuration Use the ip dhcp pool <pool-name> command to access the DHCP Pool Config Mode.


2-6

2.5Navigating Command Modes

Changing Modes Movement between the various modes is accomplished by submitting commands. To enter the Privileged Exec mode, for example, the “enable” command is entered at a User Exec prompt. The system then asks for a password (as the Privileged Exec mode is password-secured) and changes the mode. To indicate the new mode, a series of characters is added to the BAR’s name prompt. This “command suffix” identifies the mode of the CLI.

Entering Modes Other mode changes require the submission of specific commands. The table that follows presents each mode by name, describes the command needed to enter that mode, and shows the prompt suffix that identifies the mode..

Table 2-1. Command Line Interface Modes

Command Mode Access Method Prompt suffix

User Exec This is the first level of access. Perform basic tasks and list system information.

>

Privileged Exec From the User Exec Mode, enter the enable command.

#

VLAN From the Privileged Exec mode, enter the vlan database command.

(Vlan)#

Global Config From the Privileged Exec mode, enter the configure command.

(Config)#

Interface Config From the Global Configuration mode, enter the interface <slot/port> command.

(Interface-"s/p")#

Line Config From the Global Configuration mode, enter the lineconfig command.

(line)#

Policy Map From the Global Configuration mode, enter the policy map command.

(Config-policy-map)#

Policy Class From the Policy Map mode enter the class command.

(Config-policy-classmap)#

Class Map From the Global Config mode, enter the class-map command.

(Config-class-map)#

Router Config OSPF From the Global Configuration mode, enter the router ospf command

(Config-router)#

Router Config RIP From the Global Config mode, enter the router rip command

(Config-router)#

Router Config BGP From the Global Config mode, enter the router bgp command

(Config-router bgp)#

Bwprovisioning From the Global Config mode, enter the bwprovisioning command

(Config-bwp)#


2-7

2.6Understanding

Errors

Exiting Modes A management session may exit any CLI mode by either “backing out” to the next highest mode, or by jumping directly to the User Exec mode. The following methods are used to close and exit CLI modes:

• Type the “exit” command to leave a CLI mode and back out to the previous mode. For example, entering the “exit” command when in the VLAN mode will back the session out to the Privileged Exec mode.

• Press the CONTROL and Z keys on the terminal keyboard to send a session reset signal to the BAR. If the CLI is in a configuration mode, it will “back out” to the Privileged Exec mode. If the CLI is in Privileged Exec mode or another non-configuration mode, the CLI will immediately exit the current CLI mode and return the session to the User Exec mode.

• Type “logout” at the User Exec or Privileged Exec mode prompt to close the terminal session and exit CLI management.

2.6 Understanding ErrorsWhen a command is parsed by the CLI, it is compared to a tree of expected commands, parameters, and values. If the CLI encounters a portion of any command that cannot be parsed, or that violates the acceptable ranges of a field, it produces an error message.

Unexpected Input Errors

The error messages produced by the BAR indicate the point at which the parsing of the command was interrupted. This point may show a misspelling of a command, or may show that a parameter that is not part of the command was supplied mistakenly.

For instance, supposing the operator intends to enter the show arp brief routing command, but accidentally types “show arpp brief”. The command parser would display the following error message:

The user could then re-enter the command with the correct spelling, submit the command, and get the summary arp information for the BAR (the expected output of the command).

Bwprovisioning - Trafficclass

From the Bwprovisioning mode enter the traffic-class command

(Config-bwp - trafficclass)#

Bwprovisioning - BWallocation

From the Bwprovisioning mode enter the bwallocation command

(Config-bwp - bwallocation)#

DHCP Pool Configuration

From the Global Configuration mode, enter the ip dhcp pool <pool-name> command.

(Config-dhcp-pool)

Table 2-1. Command Line Interface Modes (Continued)

Command Mode Access Method Prompt suffix

(Pannaway BAR>show arpp brief ^$% Invalid input detected at ‘^’ marker.


2-8

2.7Getting System Help

Incomplete Information Errors

If the CLI receives a command from the management session that lacks a required field or needs additional specificity, the CLI will produce an incomplete information error message. This type of error message indicates only that the command requires some additional input from the user. Following the error message, the command as it was submitted is automatically entered at the current system prompt.

If, for example, an operator submitted the port-channel <name> CLI command, which creates a VLAN port channel, but did not provide the <name> parameter, the CLI would respond as shown below:

The operator could then refer to the documentation for the command, enter an appropriate name for the new port channel, and re-submit the command.

2.7 Getting System HelpThe BAR CLI system provides means for getting additional information or direction from the CLI itself. These system help options provide a limited set of information to give direction and reminders. They are not intended to replace the information in this Administration Guide.

Listing Available Commands

All modes of the BAR CLI provide access to a list of available commands for the current mode. To display the list of commands that may be entered, type the question mark (“?”) character at the command prompt. A list of commands, in alphabetical order, will be displayed.

Auto-Completing Fields

The BAR CLI supports an auto-completion function that can supply the full text of a command component or parameter. Auto-completion examines the content of the current command line entry and compares any partially-completed command input to the table of expected input for the command. If a match is found, the CLI can fill in the remaining portion of the element or parameter, and the operator can continue typing or submitting the command.

To call on the auto-completion function, press the Space Bar of the management client after typing a portion of the command. If there is enough text available that the CLI interface can determine the item or argument being entered, the text of that item will be automatically filled in. If the information at the end of the command is insufficient for the BAR CLI to make a completion determination, the CLI will simply add a space to the current line of text.

The CLI cannot perform auto-completion for operator-supplied parameters such as addresses, names, or configuration values.

Showing Key Bindings

At any CLI prompt, the operator may type the “help” command to show a list of the special keys that the CLI session supports. These special keys offer shortcuts for common or useful operations, such as ending terminal sessions, moving the cursor through a line of command text, or other special operations.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#port-channel

Incorrect input! Use 'port-channel <name>'.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#


2-9

2.8IdentifyingInterfaces

2.8 Identifying InterfacesThe BAR CLI uses a two-part naming method to specify single physical and virtual ports and interfaces on the system. In the documentation of each CLI command, individual interfaces are identified by a combination of a “slot” number and a port number. An interface could be identified in a CLI command or a statistics screen as “1/5”, indicating slot one, port five.

As the BAR is not a modular chassis, the term “slot” is an abstraction of the separate subgroups of physical and virtual ports in the BAR. The BAR defines three groups of ports, or “slots”:

• Physical ports on the rear panel of the BAR, including the SFP and RJ45 ports.• Port-channels (Link Aggregations) created during the administration of

aggregated links.• Routing slots created during the administration of routing in the BAR.

The sections below describe the nature and numbering of the slots, and the ranges of ports that exist or can be defined in them.

Physical Interfaces The physical interfaces of the BAR are grouped into slot “0” (zero). This slot contains all the addressable physical interfaces in the BAR, including the Gigabit Ethernet Small Form-factor Pluggable (SFP) transceiver ports and the two fixed-media RJ45 ports.

Ports in slot 0 are numbered from 1 to 12, with ports 1 through 10 representing the SFP ports, and ports 11 and 12 representing the Cat5 10/100/1000BASE-T ports. The numbering scheme for the ports corresponds to the numbering of the connectors printed on the rear panel of the BAR chassis.

Port-Channels If link aggregation is enabled on the BAR, the slot/port designation is also used to identify the link aggregations, or “port-channels”. All port-channels in the BAR are part of slot “1” (one). This slot is a “logical”, or virtual slot, which is used by the BAR to associate, concentrate, and direct traffic to and from an attached LAG-capable device.

Ports in slot 1 are numbered from 1 (one) to 6 (six). Port-channel port numbers are automatically generated by the BAR through the use of the port-channel <name> command, as described on page 4-2. Any currently defined port-channel interfaces can be seen by using the command show port-channel {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-39.

Routing Interfaces If routing is enabled on a physical BAR interface, a routing interface is also created. All routing interfaces in the BAR are members of slot “3” (three). Routing interfaces are logical, or virtual interfaces that are used for the direction of routed traffic in the BAR.

Ports in slot 3 are numbered from 1 (one) to 16 (sixteen). The logical ports are automatically generated by the BAR when routing is enabled on a particular BAR interface.

NOTE: If the BAR being managed is operating with version 1.0.x firmware, the Port-channel interfaces are assigned to ports 1 through 8.

NOTE: If the BAR being managed is operating with version 1.0.x firmware, the routing interfaces are members of slot “2”.


2-10

2.9CLI Documentation Conventions

2.9 CLI Documentation ConventionsAll commands in this Administration Guide are presented in the same fashion and follow the same basic conventions for showing their content. Each command is described following a “command heading” that identifies the components and content of the command.

The following example shows the appearance and types of information that may be provided in a command heading:

The command heading begins with the command name (in this example, “command name”). This is the basic form of the command. Any text in the heading that is shown without any brackets, braces, or parenthesis around it is a mandatory part of the command, and must be typed exactly as shown, and in the same relative position to other elements in the command.

If the command uses additional parameters (called tokens or arguments by some resources), they are enclosed in special text characters that indicate the type of parameter and its use in the command.

Angle Brackets < > Angle brackets indicate a value, usually a numerical value or a string of alphanumeric characters, that the operator must supply. An item in angle brackets must be provided to a command unless it is specifically connected to, and enclosed in the square brackets of, an optional parameter.

Square Brackets [ ] Square brackets show that the items enclosed in the brackets are optional parameters that may be used. These optional parameters provide additional detail or greater customization of a command or setting.

Curved Braces { } The use of curved braces around a value, command text, or a group of selections indicates that the items inside the braces are mandatory.

Selections | If the brackets or braces contain multiple items separated by the “pipe” symbol ( | ), those items are selections. When entering the CLI command, a value or item from the selections provided is expected.

The following page shows an example of the CLI documentation format as it is presented in the rest of the BAR Administration Guide.

command name {mandatory | parameter} <value> [optional | parameter <optional value>]

TIP: Commands are presented on color-coded backgrounds to make locating them easier: Configuration commands are white-on-violet, while display and monitoring commands are white-on-gray.


2-11

2.9CLI

DocumentationConventions

Summary The Summary presents a short description of the command, and is provided as an aid to scanning the command documentation.

Required Mode The Required Mode information lists the operational mode that must be active in order to submit the command.

User-EnteredParameters

[mandatory parameter]Each mandatory and optional parameter, its meaning, and any description of how it is used is presented in this section.

<value>Any values that the command uses are also listed here, with descriptions of the units, format, and acceptable ranges of the value.

Description The Description field presents a more detailed explanation of the command. If any additional information is useful for understanding the command, the effects of the command, or calculating values that should be used, that information will be presented here.

“no” Form no command name

If a “no” form of the command is available, it will be presented here. The description following the “no” command will explain the effects of the “no” command.

Defaults The Defaults section identifies the default condition or settings of the command. If the mandatory parameters, optional parameters, or values have default states in the BAR, those items will be presented here. Similarly, if a command activates or deactivates a particular function in the BAR, the default state of that function will be identified.

Example This portion of the command documentation shows an example of the command as it would be entered in a CLI session. If the command returns formatted output or statistics, an example of that will be shown beneath the command.

Command Output Commands that provide statistics or system configuration information will provide this Command Output section. This section lists the items shown on screen and explains the importance or meaning of the information. If the information requires additional description, a table may be provided.

Related Commands If a command has any other commands directly associated with it, those commands will be listed here, with a reference to the chapter and page number where the command is described.

command name [mandatory parameter] <value> {optional | parameter <optional value>}

(Pannaway BAR) # command name parameter 255

Screen Item Meaning, representation, or description.

Screen Item Field explanation or description.

Display Text Information about the displayed text.


2-12

2.9CLI Documentation Conventions

Chapter 3Switch Configuration

Commands

This chapter provides a list and descriptions of the switch configuration and set up commands used to configure and control switching, port, and network behavior in the Pannaway BAR.

3.1 Contents of this ChapterThis chapter contains CLI commands that configure and manage the operation of the interface ports on the BAR, the operation of the Spanning Tree Protocol for switching, and switch recovery from broadcast storms and other flow problems.

3.2 Port Configuration CommandsThe commands in this section control the operational mode of the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces of the BAR.

Summary Set the interface to auto-negotiate.

Required Mode Interface Config


None

Description This command configures the current interface to auto-negotiation. This allows the interface to react to the network it is connected to and negotiate the highest allowable throughput.

“no” Form no auto-negotiateThe “no” form of this command disables auto-negotiation on a port.

Topic on page

Port Configuration Commands 3-1

Switching Configuration Commands 3-5

Switching Display Commands 3-10

Spanning Tree Configuration Commands 3-12

Spanning Tree Display Commands 3-21

System Information and Statistics Commands 3-30

auto-negotiate


3-2

3.2Port Configuration Commands

Defaults Mode enabled

Example

Related Commands auto-negotiate all on page 3-2speed <portspeed> {full-duplex | half-duplex} on page 3-2show port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-36show running-config on page 15-10

Summary Set all interfaces to auto-negotiation

Required Mode Global Config


None

Description This command sets all interfaces on the Pannaway BAR to auto-negotiation mode. This allows the interface to react to the network it is connected to and negotiate the highest allowable throughput.

“no” Form no auto-negotiate allThe “no” form of this command disables auto-negotiation on all ports.


Example

Related Commands auto-negotiate on page 3-1speed <portspeed> {full-duplex | half-duplex} on page 3-2show port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-36show running-config on page 15-10

Summary Manually set speed and duplex mode for current interface.



<portspeed>The interface operational mode to set the selected interface to. Valid choices are as follows:

• 1000: 1000BASE-T• 100: 100BASE-T• 10: 10BASE-T

full-duplexIf the full duplex parameter is specified, the interface is set to full-duplex mode.

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/3)#auto-negotiate

auto-negotiate all

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#auto-negotiate all

speed <portspeed> {full-duplex | half-duplex}


3-3

3.2Port

ConfigurationCommands

half-duplexIf the half-duplex parameter is supplied, the interface is configured for half-duplex operation.

Description This command sets the speed and duplex setting for the currently configured interface.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands auto-negotiate on page 3-1speed all <portspeed> on page 3-3show running-config on page 15-10

Summary Manually force speed and duplex mode for all interfaces.



<portspeed>:The interface operational mode to set the BAR interfaces to. Valid choices are as follows:

• 1000: 1000BASE-T• 100: 100BASE-T• 10: 10BASE-T

full-duplexIf the full duplex parameter is specified, all BAR interfaces are set to full-duplex mode.

half-duplexIf the half-duplex parameter is supplied, all interfaces are configured for half-duplex operation.

NOTE: Half-duplex mode is available for 10BASE-T and 100BASE-T port speeds only. The 1000BASE-T port speed operates in full-duplex mode only.

NOTE: If the port is currently set to auto-negotiate, you get a message informing you that auto-negotiation must be disabled to change the physical port configuration.You cannot change the physical attributes of ports currently in a port-channel (LAG).

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/10)#speed 10 full-duplex

speed all <portspeed>

NOTE: Half-duplex mode is available for 10BASE-T and 100BASE-T port speeds only. The 1000BASE-T port speed operates in full-duplex mode only.


3-4

3.2Port Configuration Commands

Description This command sets the speed and duplex setting for all Gigabit Ethernet capable interfaces in the BAR.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands auto-negotiate on page 3-1speed <portspeed> {full-duplex | half-duplex} on page 3-2show running-config on page 15-10

Summary Turn off the current port.



None

Description This command administratively disables the currently selected port of the BAR. The port will not participate in the connected network, but the Link and Activity LEDs will continue to show the status of the physical connection to any attached media.

“no” Form no shutdown

The “no” form of this command enables an interface that was previously shut down.

Defaults Port enabled (no shutdown)

Example

Related Commands shutdown all on page 3-4

Summary Turn off all BAR interface ports.

Required Mode Global Config.


None

NOTE: If the port is currently set to auto-negotiate, you get a message informing you that auto-negotiation must be disabled to change the physical port configuration.You cannot change the physical attributes of ports currently in a port-channel (LAG).

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#speed all 100 full-duplex

shutdown

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/9)#shutdown

shutdown all


3-5

3.3Switching


Description This command places all the network interface ports of the BAR into a disabled mode. When in this mode, the interfaces will not participate in their connected networks. Link and Activity LEDs on the BAR will show the physical status of the attached media but the ports will pass no traffic.

“no” Form no shutdown allThe “no” form of this command enables all ports that had been administratively disabled with the shutdown command.

Defaults Ports enabled (no shutdown)

Example

Related Commands shutdown on page 3-4

3.3 Switching Configuration CommandsThe following CLI commands configure the switching operation of the BAR.

Summary Set the bridge aging time.



<age-time>The bridge entry aging time to be configured, measured in seconds. This value may be from 10 to 1000000.

[<fdbid> | al]]The selection of either the forwarding database ID of a particular forwarding database, or “all”, specifying all forwarding databases on the BAR.

Description This command configures the forwarding database address aging timeout in seconds.

“no” Form no bridge aging-time [<fdbid> |all]The “no” form of this command restores the forwarding database aging timeout to its default 300 seconds.

Defaults Age-time: 300

Example

Related Commands show forwardingdb agetime [fdbid | all] on page 3-40

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#shutdown all

bridge aging-time <age-time> [<fdbid> | all]

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#bridge aging-time 350 all


3-6

3.3Switching Configuration Commands

Summary Configure MTU size.



<mtu-size>The MTU size, in octets, that physical and logical switch interfaces will use. Values from 1522 to 9216 are allowable.

Description This command sets the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size (in bytes) for physical and port-channel (LAG) interfaces.

“no” Form no mtuThe “no” form of this command resets the MTU size to its default 1522 bytes.

Defaults MTU-size: 1522

Example

Summary Set the type of MAC address the BAR will use.

Required Mode Privileged Exec


[local | burnedin]The selection of the MAC address the BAR will present to the network. If the “local” setting is specified, the administratively configured (soft) MAC address is used. If the “burnedin” setting is specified, the factory-set (hard) MAC address is used.

Description This command specifies whether the burned-in MAC address or the locally-administered MAC address is used.

“no” Form no network mac typeThe “no” form of the command resets the value of the MAC address to its default.

Defaults MAC-type: burnedin

Example

Related Commands network mac-address <macaddr> on page 3-7show network on page 3-10

mtu <mtu-size>

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#mtu 1545

network mac-type {local | burnedin}

(Pannaway BAR) #network mac-type local


3-7

3.3Switching


Summary Set a locally-administered MAC address.



<macaddr>Specifies the locally administered MAC address to be used by the BAR. The parameter is expressed in hexadecimal format, and is subject to the following rules:

Bit 6 of byte 0 (called the U/L or “Universal/Local” bit) indicates whether the address is universally administered (‘b0’) or locally administered (‘b1’). A locally administered address must have bit 6 On (‘b1’).

Bit 7 of byte 0 (called the I/G or “Individual/Group” bit) indicates whether the destination address is an individual address (‘b0’) or a group address (‘b1’). A locally administered address must have bit 7 Off (‘b0’).

The second character of the twelve character macaddr parameter must be 2, 6, A or E.

Description This command sets a locally administered MAC addresses for the switch.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands network mac-type {local | burnedin} on page 3-6show network on page 3-10

Summary Set a self-configuration protocol for the BAR.



{none | bootp | dhcp}The network protocol that the BAR will use to obtain network addressing and configuration information at initialization.

• “bootp” indicates that the switch will periodically send requests to a Bootstrap Protocol (BootP) server for boot-up configuration information.

• “dhcp” indicates that the switch will send requests to a DHCP server until a response is received.

• “none” indicates that the switch should be manually configured with IP information.

[yes]Entering the “Yes” flag at the causes the CLI to parse the command without prompting you to confirm your action.

network mac-address <macaddr>

(Pannaway BAR) #network mac-address 5a:12:34:a3:25:c3

network protocol {none | bootp | dhcp} [yes]


3-8

3.3Switching Configuration Commands

Description This command specifies the network configuration protocol to be used. If you modify this value, the change is effective immediately, and any current IP configuration is discarded. For example, switching from dhcp to none will release the DHCP-assigned IP address.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands network parms <ipaddr> <netmask> [<gateway>] on page 3-8show network on page 3-10

Summary Set IP addressing information.



<ipaddr>The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, to assign to the BAR’s IP interface.

<netmask>The network mask, in dotted decimal notation, that identifies the network and host portions of the IP address.

<gateway>The default gateway for the IP interface of the BAR. This value is the IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the gateway interface.

Description This command sets the IP address, subnet mask and gateway of the BAR. The IP address and the gateway must be on the same subnet. The network protocol must be set to “none” to manually configure IP network information.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands network protocol {none | bootp | dhcp} [yes] on page 3-7show network on page 3-10

(Pannaway BAR) #network protocol none

Changing protocol mode will reset ip configuration.Are you sure you want to continue? (y/n)y

network parms <ipaddr> <netmask> [<gateway>]

(Pannaway BAR) #network parms 172.16.1.149 255.255.0.0 172.16.1.1


3-9

3.3Switching


Summary Enable broadcast storm recovery mode.



None

Description This command enables broadcast storm recovery mode. If the mode is enabled, broadcast storm recovery with high and low thresholds is implemented.

The threshold implementation follows a percentage pattern. If the broadcast traffic on any Ethernet port exceeds the high threshold percentage (as represented in “Broadcast Storm Recovery Thresholds” table) of the link speed, the switch discards the broadcast traffic until the broadcast traffic returns to the low threshold percentage or less. The full implementation is depicted in the table below:

“no” Form no switchconfig storm-control broadcastThe “no” form of this command disables broadcast storm recovery mode.

Defaults Mode disabled

Example

Summary Set 802.3x flow control for the BAR.



None

Description This command enables 802.3x flow control for the switch.

“no” Form no storm-control flowcontrolThe “no” form of this command disables 802.3x flow control for the switch. This is the default state.

storm-control broadcast

Link Speed High Low

10 Mbps 20 10

100 Mbps 5 2

1000 Mbps 5 2

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#storm-control broadcast

storm-control flowcontrol

NOTE: This command only applies to full-duplex mode ports.


3-10

3.4Switching Display Commands


Example

3.4 Switching Display CommandsThe commands in this section provide statistics and configuration information about the BAR’s switching interfaces and settings.

Summary Show network interface configuration.

Required Mode Privileged Exec and User Exec


None

Description This command displays configuration settings associated with the switch’s network interface. The network interface is the logical interface used for in-band connectivity with the switch via any of the switch’s network (Gigabit Ethernet) ports. The configuration parameters associated with the switch’s network interface do not affect the configuration of the front panel ports through which traffic is switched or routed.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output: The following information is presented in response to the show network command:

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#storm-control flowcontrol

show network

(Pannaway BAR) #show network

IP Address..................................... 10.10.4.137Subnet Mask.................................... 255.255.255.0Default Gateway................................ 10.10.4.1Burned In MAC Address.......................... 00:0A:9F:50:00:18Locally Administered MAC Address............... 5A:12:34:A3:25:C3MAC Address Type............................... Burned InNetwork Configuration Protocol Current......... DHCPManagement VLAN ID............................. 1Web Mode....................................... EnableJava Mode...................................... Enable

IP Address The IP address of the interface. The factory default value is 0.0.0.0.

Subnet Mask The IP subnet mask for this interface. The factory default value is 0.0.0.0.

Default Gateway The default gateway for this IP interface. The factory default value is 0.0.0.0.

Burned In MAC Address The burned in MAC address used for in-band connectivity.


3-11

3.4Switching

DisplayCommands

Related Commands network parms <ipaddr> <netmask> [<gateway>] on page 3-8network mac-address <macaddr> on page 3-7network protocol {none | bootp | dhcp} [yes] on page 3-7network mgmt_vlan <vlanid> on page 4-7ip http server on page 12-3network javamode on page 11-8

Summary Show the broadcast storm and flow control settings of the BAR.



None

Description This command displays switch configuration information for the BAR, focusing on the broadcast storm recovery and flow control settings.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Locally Administered MAC Address The local MAC address that has been adminstratively configured for in-band connectivity (if set); 00:00:00:00:00:00 indicates a local MAC address is not set.

MAC Address Type The currrently used MAC address type for in-band connectivity (Burned In or Locally Administered). The default setting is Burned In).

Network Configuration Protocol Current

The network protocol being used.

Management VLAN ID Indicates the management VLAN ID.

Web Mode Indicates if the switch is configured to allow web browser connection to the embedded browser management application on the BAR.

Java Mode Indicates if the switch allows access to the Java applet in the header frame of the Web management application. Enabled indicates the applet can be viewed; the default is disabled.

show storm-control

(Pannaway BAR) #show storm-control

Broadcast Storm Recovery Mode.................. Enable802.3x Flow Control Mode....................... Disable


3-12

3.5Spanning Tree Configuration Commands

Command Output: The following information is shown in response to the show storm-control command:

Related Commands storm-control broadcast on page 3-9storm-control flowcontrol on page 3-9

3.5 Spanning Tree Configuration CommandsThe commands in the following section control the operation of the Spanning Tree protocol in the BAR.

Summary Enable spanning tree mode.



None

Description This command sets the spanning-tree operational mode to enabled.

“no” Form no spanning-treeThe “no” form of this command sets the spanning-tree operational mode to disabled (default). While disabled, the spanning-tree configuration is retained and can be changed, but is not activated.


Example

Summary Specify the spanning tree mode used on the BAR.



{<logical slot/port> | all}:The selection of either an identified unique interface on the BAR (identified by the combination of slot number and port number), or “all”, specifying all interfaces on the BAR.

{off | 802.1d | fast}The spanning tree mode operational setting for the BAR. The available options are:

• off: disable spanning tree operation on the BAR.• 802.1d: use IEEE 802.1d compliant spanning tree mode.• fast: Use fast STP mode for spanning tree operation.

Broadcast Storm Recovery Mode

Indicates whether Broadcast Storm Recovery mode is enabled or disabled; the default is disabled.

802.3x Flow Control Mode Indicates whether 802.3x Flow Control is enabled or disabled; the default is disabled.

spanning-tree

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree

spanning-tree {<logical slot/port> | all} {off | 802.1d | fast}


3-13

3.5Spanning TreeConfiguration

Commands

Description This command sets the STP mode for a specific port-channel (LAG). This is the value specified for STP Mode on the Port Configuration Menu. The interface is a logical slot and port for a configured port-channel. The all option sets all configured port-channels (LAGs) with the same option.

“no” Form None

Defaults Spanning Tree Mode: 802.1d

Example

Summary Enable Bridge Protocol Data Unit migration checking.



{<slot/port> | all}:The selection of either an identified unique interface on the BAR (identified by the combination of slot number and port number), or “all”, specifying all interfaces on the BAR.

Description This command enables BPDU migration check on a specified interface. The all option enables BPDU migration check on all interfaces.

“no” Form no spanning-tree bpdumigrationcheck {<slot/port> | all}

The “no” form of this command disables BPDU migration check on a given interface. The all option disables BPDU migration check on all interfaces.

Defaults None

Example

Summary Name the current Spanning Tree configuration.



<name>A descriptive name of up to 32 characters.

Description This command sets the Configuration Identifier Name for use in identifying the configuration that this switch is currently using.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree all fast

spanning-tree bpdumigrationcheck {<slot/port> | all}

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree bpdumigrationcheck 1/1

spanning-tree configuration name <name>

NOTE: You must surround the Spanning Tree configuration name in quotation marks (““) to use spaces in the name. If you enter a space in the text string without using surrounding quotes, you get an invalid input error.


3-14


“no” Form no spanning-tree configuration name <name>The “no” form of this command sets the Configuration Identifier Name back to its default (the base MAC address).

Defaults Name: the base MAC address displayed using hexadecimal notation as specified in the IEEE 802 standard.

Example

Related Commands show spanning-tree summary on page 3-29spanning-tree configuration revision <revision-level> on page 3-14

Summary Assign a configuration revision number to the current Spanning Tree settings.



<revision-level>A number from 0 to 65535 that indicates the revision or iteration of the Spanning Tree configuration of the BAR.

Description This command sets the Configuration Identifier Revision Level for use in identifying the configuration that this switch is currently using.

“no” Form no spanning-tree configuration revisionThe “no” form of this command restores the Revision Level to its default value.

Defaults Revision-level: 0

Example

Related Commands show spanning-tree summary on page 3-29spanning-tree configuration name <name> on page 3-13

Summary Identify the current interface as an edge port.



None

Description This command specifies that the currently configured port is an Edge Port within the common and internal spanning tree. This will allow this port to transition to Forwarding State without delay.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree configuration name “MCAST TREE”

spanning-tree configuration revision <revision-level>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree configuration revision 2

spanning-tree edgeport


3-15


Commands

“no” Form no spanning-tree edgeportThe “no” form of this command specifies that this port is not an Edge Port within the common and internal spanning tree.

Defaults None

Example

Summary Set the Force Protocol Version for the BAR.



<802.1d | 802.1w | 802.1s>This selection specifies the force protocol version that will be used on the BAR.

• 802.1d: ST BPDUs are transmitted rather than MST BPDUs (IEEE 802.1d functionality supported)

• 802.1w: RST BPDUs are transmitted rather than MST BPDUs (IEEE 802.1w functionality supported)

• 802.1s: MST BPDUs are transmitted (IEEE 802.1s functionality supported)

Description This command sets the Force Protocol Version parameter to a new value.

“no” Form no spanning-tree forceversion <802.1d | 802.1w | 802.1s>The “no” version of this command sets the Force Protocol Version parameter back to its default value of 802.1s.

Defaults Force version: 802.1s

Example

Related Commands show spanning-tree summary on page 3-29

Summary Set the Bridge Forward Delay.



<f-time>The forwarding time, in seconds, that will be used by the BAR. The range for this value is from 4 to 30, with the value being greater than or equal to:

Description This command sets the Bridge Forward Delay parameter to a new value for the common and internal spanning tree.

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/11)#spanning-tree edgeport

spanning-tree forceversion <802.1d | 802.1w | 802.1s>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree forceversion 802.1s

spanning-tree forward-time <f-time>

BridgeMaxAge2

---------------------------------------- 1+


3-16


“no” Form no spanning-tree forward-timeThe “no” form of this command sets the Bridge Forward Delay parameter back to its default value of 15.

Defaults F-time: 15

Example

Related Commands show spanning-tree [brief] on page 3-21spanning-tree hello-time <h-time> on page 3-16spanning-tree max-age <bridge-max-age> on page 3-16

Summary Set the bridge hello time for the BAR.



<h-time>The hello time interval, in seconds, to be used on the BAR. The range for this value is from 1 to 10, with the value being less than or equal to:

Description This command sets the Hello Time parameter to a new value for the common and internal spanning tree.

“no” Form no spanning-tree hello-timeThe “no” form of this command sets the Hello Time parameter for the common and internal spanning tree to its default value.

Defaults H-time: 2

Example

Related Commands show spanning-tree [brief] on page 3-21spanning-tree max-age <bridge-max-age> on page 3-16spanning-tree forward-time <f-time> on page 3-15

Summary Set the bridge maximum age parameter for spanning tree operation on the BAR.



<bridge-max-age>The maximum age time, in seconds, that the BAR will use for both common and internal spanning tree operation. The value may be from 6 to 40, with the value being less than or equal to:

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree forward-time 16

spanning-tree hello-time <h-time>

BridgeMaxAge2

---------------------------------------- 1–

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree hello-time 3

spanning-tree max-age <bridge-max-age>

BridgeForwardDelay 1–( ) 2×


3-17


Commands

Description This command sets the Bridge Max Age parameter to a new value for the common and internal spanning tree.

“no” Form no spanning-tree max-ageThe “no” form of this command sets the Bridge-Max-Age parameter back to its default value of 20.

Defaults Bridge-max-age: 20

Example

Related Commands show spanning-tree [brief] on page 3-21spanning-tree forward-time <f-time> on page 3-15spanning-tree hello-time <h-time> on page 3-16

Summary Set spanning tree path cost for the interface.



<mstid>If the <mstid> parameter corresponds to an existing multiple spanning tree instance, then the configurations are done for that multiple spanning tree instance. However, if 0 (defined as the default CIST ID) is passed as the <mstid>, then the configurations are performed for the common and internal spanning tree instance.

{<cost-value> | auto}The path cost for this port within a multiple spanning tree instance or the common and internal spanning tree instance, depending on the <mstid> parameter. The <cost-value> is a number in the range of 1 to 200000000. If the “auto” selection is specified, the pathcost value will be automatically determined based on Link Speed.

Description This command sets the Path Cost for the currently configured port within the multiple spanning tree instance or in the common and internal spanning tree.

“no” Form no spanning-tree mst <mstid> costThe “no” form of this command sets the Path Cost for this port within the multiple spanning tree instance or in the common and internal spanning tree to the default value of “auto”.

Defaults Cost: auto

Example

Related Commands show spanning-tree mst port detailed <mstid> <slot/port> on page 3-25

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree max-age 30

spanning-tree mst <mstid> {cost <cost-value> | auto}

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/11)#spanning-tree mst 2 cost 10000


3-18


Summary Set spanning tree priority value for the interface.



<mstid>If the <mstid> parameter corresponds to an existing multiple spanning tree instance, then the configurations are performed for that multiple spanning tree instance. If however 0 (defined as the default CIST ID) is passed as the <mstid>, then the configurations are performed for the common and internal spanning tree instance.

<priority-value>The port priority number assigned to the current interface. The priority is a number in the range of 0 to 240 in increments of 16.

Description This command sets the Port Priority for the currently configured port within the multiple spanning tree instance or in the common and internal spanning tree.

“no” Form no spanning-tree mst <mstid> {cost | port-priority}The “no” form of this command sets the Port Priority for this port within the multiple spanning tree instance or in the common and internal spanning tree to the default value.

Defaults Priority-value: 128

Example


Summary Add a multiple spanning tree instance.



<mstid>The ID of the new multiple spanning tree instance being created on the BAR. The <mstid> is a number within the range of 1 to 4094.

Description This command adds a multiple spanning tree instance to the switch. The maximum number of multiple instances supported by the Pannaway BAR is 4.

“no” Form no spanning-tree mst instance <mstid>The “no” form of this command removes a multiple spanning tree instance from the switch and reallocates all VLANs allocated to the deleted instance to the common and internal spanning tree. The instance <mstid> is a number that corresponds to the desired existing multiple spanning tree instance to be removed.

Defaults None

spanning-tree mst <mstid> port-priority <priority-value>

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/11)#spanning-tree mst 2 port-priority 16

spanning-tree mst instance <mstid>


3-19


Commands

Example


Summary Set priority for an MST instance.



<mstid>The identification of an existing multiple spanning tree instance on the BAR. The <mstid> is a number within the range of 1 to 4094.

<bridge-priority>The bridge priority value for the MSTID. The priority value is a number within a range of 0 to 61440 in increments of 4096.

Description This command sets the bridge priority for a specific multiple spanning tree instance.

If 0 (defined as the default CIST ID) is passed as the <mstid>, then this command sets the Bridge Priority parameter to a new value for the common and internal spanning tree.

“no” Form no spanning-tree mst priority <mstid>The “no” form of this command sets the bridge priority for a specific multiple spanning tree instance to its default value of 32768.

Defaults Bridge-priority: 32678

Example

Related Commands show spanning-tree mst detailed <mstid> on page 3-24

Summary Associate a VLAN with a multiple spanning tree instance.



<mstid>The identification of an existing multiple spanning tree instance on the BAR. The <mstid> is a number within the range of 1 to 4094.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree mst instance 2

spanning-tree mst priority <mstid> <bridge-priority>

NOTE: If the bridge priority value supplied is not a multiple of 4096, the system will round the value supplied to the nearest multiple and provide a message to the current CLI session.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree mst priority 3 8292

Priority specified was converted to 8192 (according to IEEE 802.1s) and stored successfully.

spanning-tree mst vlan <mstid> <vlanid>


3-20


<vlanid>The VLAN ID of an existing VLAN on the BAR.

Description This command adds an association between a multiple spanning tree instance and a VLAN. The VLAN will no longer be associated with the common and internal spanning tree.

“no” Form no spanning-tree mst vlan <mstid> <vlanid>The “no” form of this command removes an association between a multiple spanning tree instance and a VLAN.

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands vlan <vlanid> on page 4-8show spanning-tree mst detailed <mstid> on page 3-24

Summary Activate administrative switch port state.



None

Description This command sets the Administrative Switch Port State for the currently configured port to enabled.

“no” Form no spanning-tree port modeThe “no” form of this command sets the Administrative Switch Port State for the current port to disabled (the default state).


Example

Related Commands show spanning-tree interface <slot/port> on page 3-23

Summary Activate administrative switch port state.



None

Description This command sets the Administrative Switch Port State for all ports to enabled.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree mst vlan 3 2

spanning-tree port mode

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/9)#spanning-tree port mode

spanning-tree port mode all


3-21

3.6Spanning Tree

DisplayCommands

“no” Form no spanning-tree port mode allThe “no” form of this command sets the Administrative Switch Port State for all ports to disabled (the default state).


Example

Related Commands show spanning-tree interface <slot/port> on page 3-23

3.6 Spanning Tree Display CommandsThe commands listed in this section provide access to Spanning Tree statistics and lists of configuration settings.

Summary Display a summary of spanning tree settings.



[brief]This optional parameter provides less extensive output.

Description This command displays spanning tree settings for the common and internal spanning tree.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#spanning-tree port mode all

show spanning-tree [brief]

(Pannaway BAR) #show spanning-tree

Bridge Priority................................ 32768Bridge Identifier.............................. 80:00:00:0A:9F:50:00:18Time Since Topology Change..................... 0 day 0 hr 0 min 0 secTopology Change Count.......................... 0Topology Change in progress.................... FALSEDesignated Root................................ 80:00:00:0A:9F:50:00:18Root Path Cost................................. 0Root Port Identifier........................... 00:00Bridge Max Age................................. 20Bridge Forwarding Delay........................ 15Hello Time..................................... 2Bridge Hold Time............................... 3CST Regional Root.............................. 80:00:00:0A:9F:50:00:18Regional Root Path Cost........................ 0

Associated FIDs Associated VLANs --------------- ---------------- 1 1 2 2


3-22

3.6Spanning Tree Display Commands

Command Output: The following information is shown in response to the command:

Bridge Priority The current decimal value of the bridge priority value setting of the BAR.

Bridge Identifier The octal value of the bridge priority, combined with the bridge MAC address to form a unique identification.

Time Since Topology Change The number of seconds that have elapsed since the last Spanning Tree Topology Change notification was received.

Topology Change Count The number of topology change notifications received since the last reset.

Topology Change in Progress Boolean value of the Topology Change parameter for the switch indicating if a topology change is in progress on any port assigned to the common and internal spanning tree.

Designated Root The octal value of the Root Bridge’s priority value and the MAC address of that bridge port, combined to identify the current designated root bridge.

Root Path Cost Value of the Root Path Cost parameter for the common and internal spanning tree.

Root Port Identifier Identification of the root port.

Root Port Max Age Configured maximum age for the root port’s eligibility. Shown for root ports only.

Root Port Bridge Forward Delay Derived forwarding delay for the port. This value is displayed for root ports only.

Hello Time Configured value.

Bridge Hold Time Minimum time between transmission of Configuration Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs)

CST Regional Root Port priority and MAC address of the regional root bridge.

Regional Root Path Cost Path cost parameter for the regional root bridge.

Associated FIDs List of forwarding database identifiers currently associated with this instance.

Associated VLANs List of VLAN IDs currently associated with this instance.

When the “brief” optional parameter is included, this command displays spanning tree settings for the bridge. In this case, the following details are displayed.

Bridge Priority The octal value of the bridge priority, combined with the bridge MAC address to form a unique identification.

Bridge Identifier Value of the Root Path Cost parameter for the common and internal spanning tree.

Bridge Max Age Configured maximum age for the root port’s eligibility.

Bridge Hello Time Derived value.

Bridge Forward Delay Configured value.

Bridge Hold Time Minimum time between transmission of Configuration Bridge Protocol Data Units (BPDUs).


3-23

3.6Spanning Tree

DisplayCommands

Related Commands show spanning-tree interface <slot/port> on page 3-23show spanning-tree mst detailed <mstid> on page 3-24show spanning-tree mst port detailed <mstid> <slot/port> on page 3-25show spanning-tree mst port summary <mstid> {<slot/port> | all} on page 3-27show spanning-tree mst summary on page 3-28show spanning-tree summary on page 3-29show spanning-tree vlan <vlanid> on page 3-30

Summary Show spanning tree settings for a switch port.



<slot/port>A unique interface on the BAR identified by the combination of slot number and port number.

Description This command displays the settings and parameters for a specific switch port within the common and internal spanning tree.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output: The following details are displayed on execution of the command:

show spanning-tree interface <slot/port>

(Pannaway BAR) #show spanning-tree interface 0/11

Port Mode...................................... EnabledPort Up Time Since Counters Last Cleared....... 2 day 23 hr 5 min 10 secSTP BPDUs Transmitted.......................... 0STP BPDUs Received............................. 0RSTP BPDUs Transmitted......................... 0RSTP BPDUs Received............................ 0MSTP BPDUs Transmitted......................... 75MSTP BPDUs Received............................ 0

Port Mode The operational mode of the selected port.

Port Up Time Since Counters Last Cleared

Time since port was reset, displayed in days, hours, minutes, and seconds.

STP BPDUs Transmitted Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units sent.

STP BPDUs Received Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units received.

RSTP BPDUs Transmitted Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units sent.

RSTP BPDUs Received Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units received.

MSTP BPDUs Transmitted Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units sent.

MSTP BPDUs Received Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units received.


3-24


Related Commands show spanning-tree [brief] on page 3-21spanning-tree port mode on page 3-20clear counters {<slot/port> | all} [yes] on page 15-2

Summary Show spanning tree settings for a multiple spanning tree instance.



<mstid>The numerical ID of an existing Multiple Spanning Tree instance.

Description This command displays settings and parameters for the specified multiple spanning tree instance. The instance <mstid> is a number that corresponds to the desired existing multiple spanning tree instance ID.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output: The command returns the following information:

show spanning-tree mst detailed <mstid>

(Pannaway BAR) #show spanning-tree mst detailed 2

MST Instance ID................................ 2MST Bridge Priority............................ 32768MST Bridge Identifier.......................... 80:02:00:0A:9F:50:00:18Time Since Topology Change..................... 0 day 0 hr 26 min 39 secTopology Change Count.......................... 3Topology Change in progress.................... FALSEDesignated Root................................ 80:02:00:0A:9F:50:00:18Root Path Cost................................. 0Root Port Identifier........................... 00:00

Associated FIDs Associated VLANs --------------- ---------------- 2 2

MST Instance ID The identification number of the Multiple Spanning Tree instance.

MST Bridge Priority The decimal priority value of the MST interface.

MST Bridge Identifier The octal value of the bridge priority, combined with the bridge MAC address to form a unique identification.

Time Since Topology Change The number of seconds that have elapsed since the last Spanning Tree Topology Change notification was received.

Topology Change Count Number of times the topology has changed for this multiple spanning tree instance.

Topology Change in Progress Value of the Topology Change parameter for the multiple spanning tree instance.

Designated Root Identifier of the Regional Root for this multiple spanning tree instance.


3-25

3.6Spanning Tree

DisplayCommandsRelated Commands spanning-tree mst <mstid> {cost <cost-value> | auto} on page 3-17

spanning-tree mst instance <mstid> on page 3-18spanning-tree mst priority <mstid> <bridge-priority> on page 3-19spanning-tree mst vlan <mstid> <vlanid> on page 3-19

Summary Show detailed settings for a port within a multiple spanning tree instance.




<slot/port>A unique interface on the BAR identified by the combination of slot number and port number.

Description This command displays the detailed settings and parameters for a specific switch port within a particular multiple spanning tree instance.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Root Path Cost Path Cost to the Designated Root for this multiple spanning tree instance.

Root Port Identifier Port to access the Designated Root for this multiple spanning tree instance.

Associated FIDs List of forwarding database identifiers associated with this instance.

Associated VLANs List of VLAN IDs associated with this instance.

show spanning-tree mst port detailed <mstid> <slot/port>

Pannaway BAR) #show spanning-tree mst port detailed 2 0/11

MST Instance ID................................ 2Port Identifier................................ 80:0BPort Priority.................................. 128Port Forwarding State.......................... ForwardingPort Role...................................... DesignatedAuto-calculate Port Path Cost.................. EnabledPort Path Cost................................. 200000Designated Root................................ 80:02:00:0A:9F:50:00:18Designated Port Cost........................... 0Designated Bridge.............................. 80:02:00:0A:9F:50:00:18Designated Port Identifier..................... 80:0B


3-26



If 0 (defined as the default CIST ID) is passed as the <mstid>, then this command displays the settings and parameters for a specific switch port within the common and internal spanning tree. The <slot/port> is the desired switch port. In this case, the following are displayed.

MST Instance ID The identification number of the Multiple Spanning Tree instance.

Port Identifier Octal value identifying the MST port.

Port Priority The priority value of the specified port.

Port Forwarding State Current spanning tree state of this port

Port Role The operational role of the port.

Auto-calculate Port Path Cost

The setting (enabled or disabled) of Spanning Tree’s port path auto-calculation capability.

Port Path Cost Configured value of the Internal Port Path Cost parameter.

Designated Root The Identifier of the designated root for this port.

Designated Port Cost Path Cost offered to the LAN by the Designated Port.

Designated Bridge Bridge Identifier of the bridge with the Designated Port.

Designated Port Identifier Port on the Designated Bridge that offers the lowest cost to the LAN.

Port Identifier The port identifier for this port within the CST.

Port Priority The priority of the port within the CST.

Port Forwarding State The forwarding state of the port within the CST.

Port Role The role of the specified interface within the CST.

Port Path Cost The configured path cost for the specified interface.

Designated Root Identifier of the designated root for this port within the CST.

Designated Port Cost Path Cost offered to the LAN by the Designated Port.

Designated Bridge The bridge containing the Designated Port.

Designated Port Identifier Port on the Designated Bridge that offers the lowest cost to the LAN.

Topology Change Acknowledgement

Value of flag in next Configuration Bridge Protocol Data Unit (BPDU) transmission indicating if a topology change is in progress for this port.

Hello Time The hello time in use for this port.

Edge Port The configured value indicating if this port is an edge port.

Edge Port Status The derived value of the edge port status. True if operating as an edge port; false otherwise.

Point To Point MAC Status Derived value indicating if this port is part of a point to point link.

CST Regional Root The regional root identifier in use for this port.

CST Port Cost The configured path cost for this port.


3-27

3.6Spanning Tree

DisplayCommands

Related Commands spanning-tree mst <mstid> {cost <cost-value> | auto} on page 3-17spanning-tree mst instance <mstid> on page 3-18spanning-tree mst priority <mstid> <bridge-priority> on page 3-19spanning-tree mst vlan <mstid> <vlanid> on page 3-19

Summary Show settings of one or more ports in a multiple spanning tree instance.





Description This command displays the settings of one or all ports within the specified multiple spanning tree instance.

If 0 (defined as the default CIST ID) is passed as the <mstid>, then the status summary is displayed for one or all ports within the common and internal spanning tree.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output: The following information is displayed in response to the command:

show spanning-tree mst port summary <mstid> {<slot/port> | all}

(Pannaway BAR) #show spanning-tree mst port summary 2 all

STP STP PortSlot/Port Mode Type State Role--------- -------- ------- ----------------- ----------0/1 Disabled Disabled Disabled0/2 Disabled Disabled Disabled0/3 Disabled Probe Disabled Disabled0/4 Disabled PC Mbr Disabled Disabled0/5 Disabled PC Mbr Disabled Disabled0/6 Disabled PC Mbr Disabled Disabled0/7 Disabled Disabled Disabled0/8 Disabled Disabled Disabled0/9 Disabled Disabled Disabled0/10 Disabled Disabled Disabled0/11 Enabled Mirror Forwarding Designated0/12 Enabled Forwarding Designated1/1 Disabled Disabled Disabled

Slot/Port The interface being displayed.

STP Mode This field shows the condition (Enabled or Disabled) of Spanning Tree operation on the port. The enabled condition indicates that 802.1d or fast spanning tree mode is active on the port.


3-28


Related Commands addport <logical slot/port> on page 4-5monitor session source <slot/port> destination <slot/port> on page 4-30spanning-tree port mode on page 3-20

Summary Show information about all multiple spanning tree instances on the BAR.



None

Description This command displays summary information about all multiple spanning tree instances in the switch.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output: The following information is presented in response to the command:

For each MSTID, the following additional information is supplied:

Related Commands spanning-tree mst instance <mstid> on page 3-18spanning-tree mst vlan <mstid> <vlanid> on page 3-19

Type This field is not fully supported in the current implementation of the Spanning Tree display commands.

STP State The forwarding state of the port in the specified spanning tree instance.

Port Role The role of the specified port within the spanning tree.

show spanning-tree mst summary

(Pannaway BAR) #show spanning-tree mst sum

MST Instance ID................................ 2

Associated FIDs Associated VLANs --------------- ---------------- 2 2

MST Instance ID List List of multiple spanning trees IDs currently configured.

Associated FIDs List of forwarding database identifiers associated with this instance.

Associated VLANs List of VLAN IDs associated with this instance.


3-29

3.6Spanning Tree

DisplayCommands

Summary Show spanning tree settings and operational parameters.



None

Description This command displays spanning tree settings and parameters for the switch.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example


Related Commands spanning-tree on page 3-12spanning-tree configuration name <name> on page 3-13spanning-tree configuration revision <revision-level> on page 3-14spanning-tree forceversion <802.1d | 802.1w | 802.1s> on page 3-15spanning-tree mst instance <mstid> on page 3-18

show spanning-tree summary

(Pannaway BAR) #show spanning-tree summary

Spanning Tree Adminmode........... EnabledSpanning Tree Version............. IEEE 802.1sConfiguration Name................ 00-0A-9F-50-00-18Configuration Revision Level...... 0Configuration Digest Key.......... 0xac36177f50283cd4b83821d8ab26de62Configuration Format Selector..... 0MST Instances..................... 2

Spanning Tree Adminmode Administrative mode of Spanning Tree operation on the switch (enabled or disabled).

Spanning Tree Version Version of 802.1 currently supported (IEEE 802.1s, IEEE 802.1w, or IEEE 802.1d) based upon the Force Protocol Version parameter.

Configuration Name An assigned name identifying the spanning tree configuration.

Configuration Revision Level The revision level of the current spanning tree configuration.

Configuration Digest Key A generated key used to uniquely identify the configuration.

Configuration Format Selector The selector value used by the configuration.

MST Instances Number of multiple spanning tree instances configured on the switch.


3-30

3.7System Information and Statistics Commands

Summary Show associations between a VLAN and a multiple spanning tree instance.



<vlanid>The VLAN ID of an existing VLAN on the BAR.

Description This command displays the association between a VLAN and a multiple spanning tree instance.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example


Related Commands spanning-tree mst vlan <mstid> <vlanid> on page 3-19

3.7 System Information and Statistics CommandsThe display commands in this section provide information about overall switching configuration and interface characteristics.

Summary Show the ARP settings of the BAR.



None

Description This command displays connectivity between the switch and other devices. The Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache identifies the MAC addresses of the IP stations communicating with the switch.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

show spanning-tree vlan <vlanid>

(Pannaway BAR) #show spanning-tree vlan 2

VLAN Identifier................................ 2Associated MST Instance........................ 2

VLAN Identifier The identification number of the VLAN being examined.

Associated MST Instance

Identifier for the associated multiple spanning tree instance or "CST" if associated with the common and internal spanning tree.

show arp switch


3-31

3.7System

Information andStatistics

Commands

Example


Summary Show switch interface configuration.



{<slot/port> | switchport}:The selection of either an identified unique interface on the BAR (identified by the combination of slot number and port number), or “switchport”, specifying the sum of all switch interfaces on the BAR.

Description This command displays a summary of statistics for a specific port or a count of all CPU traffic based upon the argument.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output: The display output when the <slot/port> parameter is supplied are as follows:

(Pannaway BAR) #show arp switchMAC Address IP Address Slot/Port------------------- ---------------- ------------00:0A:9F:00:03:29 10.10.4.1 0/1200:0A:9F:40:00:0B 10.10.4.40 0/12

MAC Address A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and/or filtering information. The format is 6 two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are separated by colons, for example 01:23:45:67:89:AB

IP Address The IP address assigned to each interface.

Slot/Port Slot and port combination indicating the BAR interface that the ARP information (response) was received on.

show interface {<slot/port> | switchport}

(Pannaway BAR) #show interface 0/11

Packets Received Without Error................. 172Packets Received With Error.................... 0Broadcast Packets Received..................... 6Packets Transmitted Without Errors............. 519Transmit Packet Errors......................... 0Collision Frames............................... 0Time Since Counters Last Cleared............... 0 day 0 hr 18 min 34 sec

Packets Received Without Error The total number of packets (including broadcast packets and multicast packets) received by the processor.

Packets Received With Error The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.


3-32


The display output when the <switchport> parameter is supplied is as follows:

Summary Show the Ethernet traffic and operational statistics for one or more BAR ports.



{<slot/port> | switchport}:The selection of either an identified unique interface on the BAR (identified by the combination of slot number and port number), or “switchport”, specifying the sum of all switch interfaces on the BAR.

Description This command displays detailed statistics for a specific port or for all CPU traffic based upon the argument.

Broadcast Packets Received The total number of packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.

Packets Transmitted Without Errors

The total number of packets transmitted out of the interface.

Transmit Packets Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors.

Collision Frames The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment.

Time Since Counters Last Cleared The elapsed time, in days, hours, minutes, and seconds since the statistics for this port were last cleared.

Packets Received Without Error The total number of packets (including broadcast packets and multicast packets) received by the processor.


Packets Received With Error The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.

Packets Transmitted Without Errors

The total number of packets transmitted out of the interface.

Broadcast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested to be transmitted to the Broadcast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.

Transmit Packet Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of errors.

Address Entries Currently In Use The total number of Forwarding Database Address Table entries now active on the switch, including learned and static entries.

VLAN Entries Currently In Use The number of VLAN entries presently occupying the VLAN table.

Time Since Counters Last Cleared The elapsed time, in days, hours, minutes, and seconds since the statistics for this switch were last cleared.

show interface ethernet {<slot/port> | switchport}


3-33

3.7System


Commands

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output: The display parameters when the argument is ‘<slot/port>’ are as follows:

Packets Received:

(Pannaway BAR) > show interface ethernet switchportOctets Received................................ 376449509Unicast Packets Received....................... 55583Multicast Packets Received..................... 444855Broadcast Packets Received..................... 188103Receive Packets Discarded...................... 0

Octets Transmitted............................. 9721208Packets Transmitted Without Errors............. 56457Unicast Packets Transmitted.................... 50741Multicast Packets Transmitted.................. 1975Broadcast Packets Transmitted.................. 3741Transmit Packets Discarded..................... 0

Most Address Entries Ever Used................. 94Address Entries Currently in Use............... 19

Maximum VLAN Entries........................... 228Most VLAN Entries Ever Used.................... 1Static VLAN Entries............................ 1Dynamic VLAN Entries........................... 0VLAN Deletes................................... 0Time Since Counters Last Cleared............... 44 day 20 hr 5 min 29 sec

Octets Received The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) received on the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). This object can be used as a reasonable estimate of ethernet utilization.

Packets Received < 64 Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were < 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

Packets Received 64 Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

Packets Received 65-127 Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).




3-34


Packets Received Successfully:

Packets Received with MAC Errors:


Packets Received 1024-1518 Octets

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

Packets Received 1519-1522 Octets

The total number of packets (including bad packets) received that were between 1519 and 1522 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

Packets Received > 1522 Octets The total number of packets received that were longer than 1522 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well formed.

Total The total number of packets received that were without errors.

Unicast Packets Received The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.

Multicast Packets Received The total number of good packets received that were directed to a multicast address. Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.

Broadcast Packets Received The total number of good packets received that were directed to the broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.

Total The total number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.

Jabbers Received The total number of packets received that were longer than 1518 octets (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets (FCS Error) or a bad FCS with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error). Note that this definition of jabber is different than the definition in IEEE-802.3 section 8.2.1.5 (10BASE5) and section 10.3.1.4 (10BASE2). These documents define jabber as the condition where any packet exceeds 20 ms. The allowed range to detect jabber is between 20 ms and 150 ms.

Fragments/Undersize Received

The total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

Alignment Errors The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with a non-integral number of octets.

Rx FCS Errors The total number of packets received that had a length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets

Overruns The total number of frames discarded as this port was overloaded with incoming packets, and could not keep up with the inflow.


3-35

3.7System


Commands

Received Packets not forwarded:

Packets Transmitted Octets:

Total A count of valid frames received which were discarded (i.e. filtered) by the forwarding process.

Local Traffic Frames The total number of frames dropped in the forwarding process because the destination address was located off of this port.

802.3x Pause Frames Received A count of MAC Control frames received on this interface. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in half-duplex mode.

Unacceptable Frame Type The number of frames discarded from this port due to being an unacceptable frame type.

VLAN Membership Mismatch The number of frames discarded on this port due to ingress filtering.

VLAN Viable Discards The number of frames discarded on this port when a lookup on a particular VLAN occurs while that entry in the VLAN table is being modified, or if the VLAN has not been configured.

Multicast Tree Viable Discards The number of frames discarded when a lookup in the multicast tree for a VLAN occurs while that tree is being modified.

Reserved Address Discards The number of frames discarded that are destined to an IEEE 802.1 reserved address and are not supported by the system.

Broadcast Storm Recovery The number of frames discarded that are destined for FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF when Broadcast Storm Recovery is enabled.

CFI Discards The number of frames discarded that have CFI bit set and the addresses in RIF are in non-canonical format.

Upstream Threshold The number of frames discarded due to lack of cell descriptors available for that packet’s priority level.

Total Bytes The total number of octets of data (including those in bad packets) transmitted to the network (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets). This object can be used as a reasonable estimate of ethernet utilization.

Packets Transmitted 64 Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

Packets Transmitted 65-127 Octets The total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted that were between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).



3-36


Packets Transmitted Successfully:

Transmit Errors:



Packets Transmitted 1024-1518 Octets

The total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted that were between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

Packets Transmitted 1519-1522 Octets

The total number of packets (including bad packets) transmitted that were between 1519 and 1522 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

Max Info The maximum size of the Info (non-MAC) field that this port will receive or transmit.

Total The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its segment.

Unicast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.

Multicast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a Multicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.

Broadcast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to the Broadcast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.

Total Errors The sum of Single, Multiple, and Excessive Collisions.

Tx FCS Errors The total number of packets transmitted that had a length (excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) of between 64 and 1518 octets, inclusive, but had a bad Frame Check Sequence (FCS) with an integral number of octets.

Oversized The total number of frames that exceeded the max permitted frame size. This counter has a max increment rate of 815 counts per sec. at 10 Mb/s.

Underrun Errors The total number of frames discarded because the transmit FIFO buffer became empty during frame transmission.


3-37

3.7System


Commands

Transmit Discards:

Protocol Statistics:

Total Discards The sum of single collision frames discarded, multiple collision frames discarded, and excessive frames discarded.

Single Collision Frames A count of the number of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by exactly one collision.

Multiple Collision Frames A count of the number of successfully transmitted frames on a particular interface for which transmission is inhibited by more than one collision.

Excessive Collisions A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due to excessive collisions.

Port Membership The number of frames discarded on egress for this port due to egress filtering being enabled.

VLAN Viable Discards The number of frames discarded on this port when a lookup on a particular VLAN occurs while that entry in the VLAN table is being modified, or if the VLAN has not been configured.

BPDU’s received The count of BPDU’s (Bridge Protocol Data Units) received in the spanning tree layer.

BPDU’s Transmitted The count of BPDU’s transmitted from the spanning tree layer.

802.3x Pause Frames Received A count of MAC Control frames received on this interface. This counter does not increment when the interface is operating in half-duplex mode.

GVRP PDU’s Received The count of GVRP PDU’s received in the GARP layer.

GVRP PDU’s Transmitted The count of GVRP PDU’s transmitted from the GARP layer.

GVRP Failed Registrations The number of times attempted GVRP registrations could not be completed.

GMRP PDU’s received The count of GMRP PDU’s received in the GARP layer.

GMRP PDU’s Transmitted The count of GMRP PDU’s transmitted from the GARP layer.

GMRP Failed Registrations The number of times attempted GMRP registrations could not be completed.

STP BPDUs Transmitted Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units sent.

STP BPDUs Received Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units received.

RST BPDUs Transmitted Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units sent.

RSTP BPDUs Received Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units received.

MSTP BPDUs Transmitted Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units sent.

MSTP BPDUs Received Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol Bridge Protocol Data Units received.


3-38


Dot1x Statistics:

The display parameters when the argument is ‘switchport’ is as follows:

EAPOL Frames Received The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this authenticator.

EAPOL Frames Transmitted The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this authenticator.

Time Since Counters Last Cleared The elapsed time, in days, hours, minutes, and seconds since the statistics for this port were last cleared.

Octets Received The total number of octets of data received by the processor (excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).

Unicast Packets Received The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer protocol.

Multicast Packets Received The total number of packets received that were directed to a multicast address. Note that this number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address.


Receive Packets Discarded The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. A possible reason for discarding a packet could be to free up buffer space.

Octets Transmitted The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing characters.

Packets Transmitted without Errors The total number of packets transmitted out of the interface.

Unicast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.

Multicast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to a Multicast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.

Broadcast Packets Transmitted The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be transmitted to the Broadcast address, including those that were discarded or not sent.

Transmit Packets Discarded The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol. A possible reason for discarding a packet could be to free up buffer space.

Most Address Entries Ever Used The highest number of Forwarding Database Address Table entries that have been learned by this switch since the most recent reboot.

Address Entries Currently in Use The number of Learned and static entries in the Forwarding Database Address Table for this switch.


3-39

3.7System


Commands

Related Commands clear counters {<slot/port> | all} [yes] on page 15-2

Summary Show contents of the MAC address table.



[<macaddr> | all]The optional selection of either an identified unique MAC address, specified in standard hexadecimal format, or “all”, specifying all switch interfaces on the BAR.

Description This command displays the forwarding database entries. If the command is entered with no parameter, the entire table is displayed.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Maximum VLAN Entries The maximum number of Virtual LANs (VLANs) allowed on this switch.

Most VLAN Entries Ever Used The largest number of VLANs that have been active on this switch since the last reboot.

Static VLAN Entries The number of presently active VLAN entries on this switch that have been created statically.

Dynamic VLAN Entries The number of presently active VLAN entries on this switch that have been created by GVRP registration.

VLAN Deletes The number of VLANs on this switch that have been created and then deleted since the last reboot.

Time Since Counters Last Cleared The elapsed time, in days, hours, minutes, and seconds, since the statistics for this switch were last cleared.

show mac-addr-table [<macaddr> | all]

(Pannaway BAR) #show mac-addr-tableMAC Address Slot/Port ifIndex Status----------------------- --------- --------- ------------00:01:00:01:E7:1E:4B:81 0/12 12 Learned00:01:00:05:1B:00:44:42 0/12 12 Learned00:01:00:07:E9:75:83:FC 0/12 12 Learned00:01:00:08:A1:04:1A:AF 0/12 12 Learned00:01:00:09:5B:0A:64:4F 0/12 12 Learned00:01:00:0A:9F:00:00:00 0/12 12 Learned00:01:00:0A:9F:00:03:29 0/12 12 Learned00:01:00:0A:9F:00:03:5E 0/12 12 Learned00:01:00:0A:9F:00:03:64 0/12 12 Learned00:01:00:0A:9F:00:0A:61 0/12 12 Learned00:01:00:0A:9F:50:00:18 0/1 1 Management


3-40



Summary Show the configured age time of a forwarding database or the entire BAR.



[fdbid | all]The selection of either forwarding database ID, indicating a particular forwarding database, or “all”, specifying all forwarding databases on the BAR.

Description This command displays the timeout for address aging.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

MAC Address A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering information. The format is 6 or 8 two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are separated by colons, for example 01:23:45:67:89:AB. In an IVL system the MAC address will be displayed as 8 bytes. In an SVL system, the MAC address will be displayed as 6 bytes.

slot/port The combination of slot and port identifying the BAR interface that the MAC address was learned on.

if Index The ifIndex of the interface table entry associated with this port.

Status The status of this entry. The meanings of the values are:• Static: The value of the corresponding instance was added by the

system or a user when a static MAC filter was defined. It cannot be relearned.

• Learned: The value of the corresponding instance was learned by observing the source MAC addresses of incoming traffic, and is currently in use.

• Management: The value of the corresponding instance (system MAC address) is also the value of an existing instance of dot1dStaticAddress. It is identified with interface 0/1 and is currently used when enabling VLANs for routing.

• Self: The value of the corresponding instance is the address of one of the switch’s physical interfaces (the system’s own MAC address).

• GMRP: Learned The value of the corresponding was learned via GMRP and applies to Multicast.

• Other: The value of the corresponding instance does not fall into one of the other categories.

show forwardingdb agetime [fdbid | all]

(Pannaway BAR) #show forwardingdb agetimeForwardingDB ID Address Aging Timeout in Seconds----------------- ----------------------------------1 300


3-41

3.7System


Commands

Command Output: The following information is presented for each forwarding database:

Related Commands bridge aging-time <age-time> [<fdbid> | all] on page 3-5

Forwarding DB ID The ID number of the forwarding database that the information in the table row describes.

Address Aging Timeout in Seconds The aging timer setting (in seconds) for the associated database. The range is 10-1,000,000 seconds; the default is 300.


3-42


Chapter 4VLAN Configuration

Commands

This chapter describes the commands that configure and monitor Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) operation in the BAR.

4.1 Contents of this ChapterThis chapter describes the commands that configure and manage Virtual Local Area Networks (VLANs) of various types on the Pannaway BAR. The following sections are presented in this chapter:

4.2 Port-Channel CommandsThe commands in this section are used to create and administer port-channels, or link aggregations (LAGs), on the BAR.

Summary Enable port-channel support on the BAR.



None

Description This command enables the support of port-channels (static link aggregations – LAGs) on the device. By default, the static capability for all port-channels is disabled.

Topic on page

Port-Channel Commands 4-1

VLAN Management Commands 4-7

MAC Filtering Commands 4-16

LACP Protocol Commands 4-19

Protocol-Based VLAN Commands 4-20

IGMP Commands 4-24

Dot1P Commands 4-28

VLAN Display Commands 4-30

port-channel staticcapability


4-2

4.2Port-Channel Commands

“no” Form no port channel staticcapabilityThe “no” form of this command disables the support of port-channels (static link aggregations – LAGs) on the device.


Example

Related Commands show port-channel brief on page 4-40mtu <mtu-size> on page 3-6addport <logical slot/port> on page 4-5delete interface {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-6deleteport <logical slot/port> on page 4-5port-channel <name> on page 4-2port-channel adminmode {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-3port-channel linktrap {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-4port-channel name {<logical slot/port> | all} <name> on page 4-3show port-channel {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-39

Summary Create a port-channel.



<name>The name assigned to the port-channel being created. This name must be made up of alphanumeric characters and not include any spaces or special characters. The name may be up to 15 characters in length.

Description This command configures a new port-channel (LAG) and generates a logical slot and port number for it.

Once the port-channel is created, the BAR assigns a logical slot and port number combination to it. This combination of <logical slot-port> is needed for some configuration commands. To find the port-channel logical slot and port combination, use the command show port-channel {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-39.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#port-channel staticcapability

port-channel <name>

NOTE: Before adding a port to a port-channel, set the physical mode of the port. Refer to “Switching Configuration Commands” starting on page 3-5 for port physical mode and speed commands.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#port-channel Area2


4-3

4.2Port-Channel

Commands

Related Commands speed <portspeed> {full-duplex | half-duplex} on page 3-2speed all <portspeed> on page 3-3port-channel staticcapability on page 4-1show port-channel brief on page 4-40addport <logical slot/port> on page 4-5delete interface {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-6deleteport <logical slot/port> on page 4-5port-channel <name> on page 4-2port-channel adminmode {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-3port-channel linktrap {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-4port-channel name {<logical slot/port> | all} <name> on page 4-3show port-channel {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-39

Summary Assign a name to an existing port-channel or to all port channels.



<logical slot/port>A combination of logical slot and logical port that identifies a single port-channel.

allThis argument applies the command to all existing port-channels.

<name>The name being newly assigned to the port-channel. This name must be made up of alphanumeric characters and not include any spaces or special characters. The name may be up to 15 characters in length.

Description This command defines a name for the port-channel (LAG). This command is used to modify the name that was associated with the port-channel when it was created.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands port-channel <name> on page 4-2show port-channel brief on page 4-40show port-channel {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-39

Summary Place a port-channel in administrative mode, enabling it.




port-channel name {<logical slot/port> | all} <name>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#port-channel name 1/3 AreaX

port-channel adminmode {<logical slot/port> | all}


4-4



Description This command enables a port-channel (LAG).

“no” Form no port-channel adminmode {<logical slot/port> | all}The “no” form of this command disables a port-channel (LAG).

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands port-channel staticcapability on page 4-1show port-channel brief on page 4-40mtu <mtu-size> on page 3-6addport <logical slot/port> on page 4-5delete interface {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-6deleteport <logical slot/port> on page 4-5port-channel <name> on page 4-2port-channel adminmode {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-3port-channel linktrap {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-4show port-channel {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-39

Summary Enable link trap notifications for a port-channel.





Description This command enables link trap notifications for the port-channel (LAG).

“no” Form no port-channel linktrap {<logical slot/port> | all}The “no” form of this command disables link trap notifications for the port-channel <logical slot/port> interface or all interfaces. This is the default setting.

Defaults Mode Disabled

Example

Related Commands snmptrap <name> <ipaddr> on page 13-8snmptrap ipaddr <name> <ipaddrold> <ipaddrnew> on page 13-8snmptrap mode <name> <ipaddr> on page 13-9show port-channel {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-39

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#port-channel adminmode 1/1

port-channel linktrap {<logical slot/port> | all}

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#port-channel linktrap 1/1


4-5

4.2Port-Channel

Commands

Summary Add the current interface to a port-channel.




Description This command adds one port to the port-channel (LAG). The first interface is a logical slot and port number of a configured port-channel.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands speed <portspeed> {full-duplex | half-duplex} on page 3-2speed all <portspeed> on page 3-3port-channel staticcapability on page 4-1show port-channel brief on page 4-40delete interface {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-6deleteport <logical slot/port> on page 4-5show port-channel {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-39

Summary Delete the current interface from a port-channel.




Description This command deletes the currently configured port from an existing port-channel (LAG) configuration.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

addport <logical slot/port>

NOTE: Before adding a port to a port-channel, set the physical mode of the port. Refer to “Switching Configuration Commands” starting on page 3-5 for port physical mode and speed commands.

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/3)#addport 1/1

deleteport <logical slot/port>

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/4)#deleteport 1/1


4-6


Related Commands port-channel staticcapability on page 4-1show port-channel brief on page 4-40mtu <mtu-size> on page 3-6addport <logical slot/port> on page 4-5delete interface {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-6show port-channel {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-39

Summary Delete all ports from port-channels.



None

Description This command removes all configured ports from their port-channels.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands port-channel staticcapability on page 4-1show port-channel brief on page 4-40addport <logical slot/port> on page 4-5delete interface {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-6show port-channel {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-39

Summary Delete the currently selected interface from the named port-channel.





Description This command deletes a specific interface or all interfaces from an existing port-channel (LAG). The interface is a logical slot and port in a configured port-channel. The all option removes all configured port-channels (LAGs).

“no” Form None

Defaults None

deleteport all

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#deleteport all

delete interface {<logical slot/port> | all}


4-7

4.3VLAN

ManagementCommands

Example

Related Commands port-channel staticcapability on page 4-1show port-channel brief on page 4-40addport <logical slot/port> on page 4-5deleteport <logical slot/port> on page 4-5show port-channel {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-39

Summary Clear port channels from the BAR.



yes]Entering the “Yes” flag at the causes the CLI to parse the command without prompting you to confirm your action.

Description This command clears all port-channels (LAGs).

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands port-channel staticcapability on page 4-1addport <logical slot/port> on page 4-5

4.3 VLAN Management CommandsThese commands control the creation and administration of Virtual LAN IDs, VLAN modes, and the operation of VLAN filters.

Summary Set management VLAN ID.



<vlanid>A numerical valid VLAN identification number. The range for this field is 1-4036.

Description This command configures the Management VLAN ID. The Management VLAN ID may have the value 1 to 4036; the default value is 1.

“no” Form None

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/3)#delete interface all

clear port-channel [yes]

(Pannaway BAR) #clear port-channel

Are you sure you want to clear all port-channels? (y/n)y

network mgmt_vlan <vlanid>


4-8

4.3VLAN Management Commands

Defaults VlanID: 1

Example

Summary Create a new VLAN.

Required Mode VLAN database


<vlanid>A numerical valid VLAN identification number. The range for this field is 2-4036 (ID 1 is reserved for the default management VLAN).

Description This command creates a new VLAN in the BAR VLAN database and assigns it an ID.

“no” Form no vlan <vlanid>The “no” form of the command deletes an existing VLAN, as specified by its <vlanid>.

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands protocol group <groupid> <vlanid> on page 4-22vlan name <vlanid> <name> on page 4-9show vlan <vlanid> on page 4-41show vlan brief on page 4-42

Summary Set the frame acceptance mode for the current interface.



vlanonlyThis parameter sets the frame acceptance mode for the interface to accept only VLAN tagged frames. Other frames (untagged or priority frames are discarded).

all The “all” parameter configures the interface to accept all frames and assign the VLAN ID of the current port to them.

Description This command sets the frame acceptance mode (VLAN only or all) for the currently configured interface. With either option, VLAN tagged frames are forwarded in accordance with the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN specification.

“no” Form no vlan acceptframeThe “no” form of this command sets the frame acceptance mode per interface to “all” (the default setting).

(Pannaway BAR) #network mgmt_vlan 2

vlan <vlanid>

(Pannaway BAR) (Vlan) #vlan 3

vlan acceptframe {vlanonly | all}


4-9

4.3VLAN

ManagementCommands

Defaults Value: all

Example

Related Commands vlan priority <priority> on page 4-29show vlan port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-43vlan ingressfilter on page 4-9vlan participation <participation-mode> <vlanid> on page 4-10vlan port acceptframe all {vlanonly | all} on page 4-11vlan pvid <vlanid> on page 4-14

t

Summary Enable ingress filtering.



None

Description This command enables ingress filtering on the currently configured interface. When filtering is enabled, received frames whose VLAN ID does not match the VLAN membership of the interface are discarded.

“no” Form no vlan ingressfilterThe “no” version of this command disables ingress filtering (the default state) on the currently configured interface.


Example

Related Commands vlan priority <priority> on page 4-29show vlan port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-43vlan acceptframe {vlanonly | all} on page 4-8vlan participation <participation-mode> <vlanid> on page 4-10vlan port acceptframe all {vlanonly | all} on page 4-11vlan pvid <vlanid> on page 4-14

Summary Assign a name to an existing VLAN.

Required Mode VLAN database


<vlanid>The VLAN ID number (from 2-4036) of the existing VLAN.

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/8)#vlan acceptframe vlanonly

vlan ingressfilter

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/8)#vlan ingressfilter

vlan name <vlanid> <name>


4-10


<name>The name to be assigned to the VLAN. This name is an alphanumeric string of up to 16 characters. You must surround the VLAN name in quotation marks (“ ”) to use spaces in the name.

Description This command changes the name of a VLAN.

“no” Form no vlan name <vlanid>The “no” form of this command resets the name of a previously named VLAN back to the default (blank) string.

Defaults The <name> string of new VLANs is empty by default.

Example

Related Commands protocol group <groupid> <vlanid> on page 4-22vlan <vlanid> on page 4-8show vlan <vlanid> on page 4-41show vlan brief on page 4-42

Summary Set participation mode of a VLAN.



<participation-mode>The participation mode, or option, that the VLAN will operate under. Participation options are:

• “include” – The interface is always a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to registration “fixed”.

• “exclude” – The interface is never a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to registration “forbidden”.

• “auto” – (not supported).

<vlanid>The VLAN ID number (from 2-4036) of an existing, non-default VLAN.

Description This command specifies the degree of participation for the currently configured interface in a VLAN.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

NOTE: VLAN ID 1 is reserved, and always has the name “Default”.

(Pannaway BAR) (Vlan) #vlan name 3 "Sbscrber VLAN 3"

vlan participation <participation-mode> <vlanid>

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/8)#vlan participation include 3


4-11

4.3VLAN

ManagementCommands

Related Commands vlan priority <priority> on page 4-29show vlan port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-43vlan acceptframe {vlanonly | all} on page 4-8vlan ingressfilter on page 4-9vlan port acceptframe all {vlanonly | all} on page 4-11vlan pvid <vlanid> on page 4-14vlan tagging <vlanid> on page 4-14

Summary Configure participation for all interfaces in a VLAN.



<participation-mode>The participation mode, or operation, that the VLAN will operate under. Participation options are:

• “include” – The interface is always a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to registration “fixed”.

• “exclude” – The interface is never a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to registration “forbidden”.

• “auto” – (not supported)

<vlanid>The VLAN ID number (from 1-4036) of an existing VLAN. This command can include VLAN ID number 1, the default VLAN.

Description This command configures the degree of participation for all interfaces in a VLAN. The ID is a valid VLAN identification number, and the interface is a valid interface number.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands vlan priority <priority> on page 4-29show vlan port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-43vlan port ingressfilter all on page 4-12vlan port acceptframe all {vlanonly | all} on page 4-11vlan pvid <vlanid> on page 4-14vlan port tagging all <vlanid> on page 4-13

Summary Set frame acceptance for all VLAN interfaces.


vlan participation all <participation-mode> <vlanid>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#vlan participation all include 3

vlan port acceptframe all {vlanonly | all}


4-12



vlanonlyThis parameter sets the frame acceptance mode for the interface to accept only VLAN tagged frames. Other frames (untagged or priority frames) are discarded.

all The “all” parameter configures the interface to accept all frames and assign the VLAN ID of the current port to them.

Description This command sets the frame acceptance mode for all interfaces. Regardless of mode, VLAN tagged frames are forwarded in accordance with the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN Specification.

“no” Form no vlan port acceptframe allThe “no” form of this command sets the frame acceptance mode for all interfaces to “all” (the default setting).

Defaults Accept all frames

Example

Related Commands vlan priority <priority> on page 4-29show vlan port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-43vlan participation all <participation-mode> <vlanid> on page 4-11vlan port ingressfilter all on page 4-12vlan port pvid all <vlanid> on page 4-13vlan port tagging all <vlanid> on page 4-13

Summary Enable ingress filtering for all interfaces.



None

Description This command enables ingress filtering for all interfaces.

“no” Form no vlan port ingressfilter allThe “no” version of this command disables ingress filtering (the default state) on all interfaces. In this case, frames received with VLAN IDs that do not match the VLAN membership of the receiving interface are admitted and forwarded to ports that are members of that VLAN.


Example

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#vlan port acceptframe all vlanonly

vlan port ingressfilter all

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#vlan port ingressfilter all


4-13

4.3VLAN

ManagementCommands

Related Commands vlan priority <priority> on page 4-29show vlan port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-43vlan participation all <participation-mode> <vlanid> on page 4-11vlan port acceptframe all {vlanonly | all} on page 4-11vlan port pvid all <vlanid> on page 4-13vlan port tagging all <vlanid> on page 4-13

Summary Change the VLAN IDs of all VLANs to a single VLAN ID.




Description This command changes the VLAN ID for all interfaces to the specified VLAN ID.

“no” Form no vlan port pvid all <vlanid>The “no” form of this command sets the VLAN ID for all interfaces to the default VLAN (VLAN ID = 1).

Defaults VLAN ID: 1 (default VLAN)

Example

Related Commands vlan priority <priority> on page 4-29show vlan port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-43vlan participation all <participation-mode> <vlanid> on page 4-11vlan port acceptframe all {vlanonly | all} on page 4-11vlan port ingressfilter all on page 4-12vlan port tagging all <vlanid> on page 4-13

Summary Set tagging behavior for all interfaces in a VLAN.




Description This command enables the tagging behavior for all interfaces in a VLAN. If tagging is enabled, traffic is transmitted as tagged frames.

“no” Form no vlan port tagging all <vlanid>The “no” form of this command configures the tagging behavior of all interfaces in a VLAN to disabled. In this case, traffic is transmitted as untagged frames.

Defaults None

vlan port pvid all <vlanid>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#vlan port pvid all 3

vlan port tagging all <vlanid>


4-14


Example

Related Commands vlan priority <priority> on page 4-29show vlan port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-43vlan participation all <participation-mode> <vlanid> on page 4-11vlan port acceptframe all {vlanonly | all} on page 4-11vlan port ingressfilter all on page 4-12vlan port pvid all <vlanid> on page 4-13

Summary Change the ID of the current interface’s VLAN.




Description This command changes the VLAN ID for the current interface.

“no” Form no vlan pvid <vlanid>The “no” form of this command sets the VLAN ID for the current interface to the default VLAN ID of 1.

Defaults Vlanid: 1

Example

Related Commands vlan priority <priority> on page 4-29show vlan port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-43vlan participation <participation-mode> <vlanid> on page 4-10vlan acceptframe {vlanonly | all} on page 4-8vlan port ingressfilter all on page 4-12vlan port acceptframe all {vlanonly | all} on page 4-11vlan port tagging all <vlanid> on page 4-13

Summary Set traffic tagging for the current interface.




Description This command configures the tagging behavior for a specific interface in a VLAN to enabled. If tagging is enabled, traffic is transmitted as tagged frames.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#vlan port tagging all 3

vlan pvid <vlanid>

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/7)#vlan pvid 3

vlan tagging <vlanid>


4-15

4.3VLAN

ManagementCommands

“no” Form no vlan tagging <vlanid>The “no” form of this command configures tagging behavior for this interface to disabled. In this case, traffic is transmitted as untagged frames.

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands vlan priority <priority> on page 4-29show vlan port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-43vlan participation <participation-mode> <vlanid> on page 4-10vlan acceptframe {vlanonly | all} on page 4-8vlan port ingressfilter all on page 4-12vlan port acceptframe all {vlanonly | all} on page 4-11vlan pvid <vlanid> on page 4-14

Summary Reset all VLAN configuration settings.




Description This command resets VLAN configuration parameters to the factory defaults. All previously configured VLANs are deleted, so that only the default VLAN remains.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands show vlan brief on page 4-42

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/7)#vlan tagging 2

clear vlan [yes]

(Pannaway BAR) #clear vlan

Are you sure you want to restore all VLANs to default? (y/n)y

VLANs Restored!


4-16

4.4MAC Filtering Commands

4.4 MAC Filtering CommandsThe commands in this section control the creation and operation of MAC layer filters and filtering rules.

Summary Create a MAC address filter for a VLAN.



<macaddr>The Media Access Control (MAC) address that the VLAN will filter for. The parameter must be specified as a 6-byte hexadecimal number in the format of “nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn”.

The restricted MAC Addresses are: 00:00:00:00:00:00, 01:80:C2:00:00:00 to 01:80:C2:00:00:0F, 01:80:C2:00:00:20 to 01:80:C2:00:00:21, and FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF.


Description This command adds a static MAC filter entry for the MAC address <macaddr> on the VLAN <vlanid>.

Up to 100 static MAC filters may be created.

“no” Form no macfilter <macaddr> <vlanid>This “no” form of this command removes all filtering restrictions and the static MAC filter entry for the MAC address <macaddr> on the VLAN <vlanid>.

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands macfilter adddest <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-16macfilter adddest all <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-17macfilter addsrc <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-18macfilter addsrc all <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-18show mac-address-table static {<macaddr> <vlanid> | all} on page 4-34show mac-address-table staticfiltering on page 4-34

Summary Add the current interface to a MAC address destination filter.




macfilter <macaddr> <vlanid>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#no macfilter 00:01:31:02:2F:CC 2

macfilter adddest <macaddr> <vlanid>


4-17

4.4MAC Filtering

Commands

The restricted MAC Addresses are: 00:00:00:00:00:00, 01:80:C2:00:00:00 to 01:80:C2:00:00:0F, 01:80:C2:00:00:20 to 01:80:C2:00:00:21, and FF:FF:FF:FF:FF:FF.


Description This command adds the interface to the destination filter set for the MAC filter with the given <macaddr> and VLAN of <vlanid>.

“no” Form no macfilter adddest <macaddr> <vlanid>The “no” form of this command removes a port from the destination filter set for the MAC filter with the given <macaddr> and VLAN of <vlanid>.

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands macfilter <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-16macfilter adddest all <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-17macfilter addsrc <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-18macfilter addsrc all <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-18show mac-address-table static {<macaddr> <vlanid> | all} on page 4-34show mac-address-table staticfiltering on page 4-34

Summary Add all ports in a VLAN to a destination MAC address filter.





Description This command adds all interfaces to the destination filter set for the MAC filter with the given <macaddr> and VLAN of <vlanid>.

“no” Form no macfilter adddest all <macaddr> <vlanid>The “no” form of this command removes all ports from the destination filter set for the MAC filter with the given <macaddr> and VLAN of <vlanid>.

Defaults None

Example

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/7)#adddest 00:01:31:02:2F:CC 2

macfilter adddest all <macaddr> <vlanid>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#adddest all 00:01:31:02:2F:CC 2


4-18

4.4MAC Filtering Commands

Related Commands macfilter <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-16macfilter adddest <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-16macfilter addsrc <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-18macfilter addsrc all <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-18show mac-address-table static {<macaddr> <vlanid> | all} on page 4-34show mac-address-table staticfiltering on page 4-34

i

Summary Add the current interface to a MAC source filter.



<macaddr>The Media Access Control (MAC) address identifying the MAC filter. The parameter must be specified as a 6-byte hexadecimal number in the format of “nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn”.


Description This command adds the interface to the source filter set for the MAC filter with the MAC address of <macaddr> and VLAN of <vlanid>.

“no” Form no macfilter addsrc <macaddr> <vlanid>The “no” form of this command removes a port from the source filter set for the MAC filter with the MAC address of <macaddr> and VLAN of <vlanid>.

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands macfilter <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-16macfilter adddest <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-16macfilter adddest all <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-17macfilter addsrc all <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-18show mac-address-table static {<macaddr> <vlanid> | all} on page 4-34show mac-address-table staticfiltering on page 4-34

Summary Assign all interfaces to a source filter.



<macaddr>The Media Access Control (MAC) address identification of the source filter. The parameter must be specified as a 6-byte hexadecimal number in the format of “nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn”.

macfilter addsrc <macaddr> <vlanid>

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/7)#addsrc 0A:21:0E:32:1D:A3 4093

macfilter addsrc all <macaddr> <vlanid>


4-19

4.5LACP Protocol

Commands

<vlanid>The VLAN ID number (from 1-4036) identifying the source filter.

Description This command adds all interfaces to the source filter set for the MAC filter with the MAC address <macaddr> and <vlanid>.

“no” Form no macfilter addsrc all <macaddr> <vlanid> This “no” form of this command removes all interfaces to the source filter set for the MAC filter with the MAC address of <macaddr> and VLAN of <vlanid>.

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands macfilter <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-16macfilter adddest <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-16macfilter adddest all <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-17macfilter addsrc <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-18show mac-address-table static {<macaddr> <vlanid> | all} on page 4-34show mac-address-table staticfiltering on page 4-34

4.5 LACP Protocol CommandsThe commands in the following section detail Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) configuration and management.

Summary Enable LACP operation on the interface.



None

Description This command enables Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on a port.

“no” Form no port lacpmodeThe “no” form of the command disables Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on the port (default).


Example

Related Commands port lacpmode all on page 4-20show port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-36

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#addsrc all 0A:21:0E:32:1D:A3 4093

port lacpmode

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#port lacpmode


4-20

4.6Protocol-Based VLAN Commands

Summary Enable LACP operation on all interfaces.



None

Description This command enables Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on all ports.

“no” Form no port lacpmode allThe “no” form of this command disables Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) on all ports.


Example

Related Commands port lacpmode on page 4-19show port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-36

4.6 Protocol-Based VLAN CommandsThe following commands provide the configuration and administration of protocol-based VLANs on the Pannaway BAR.

Summary Create a protocol-based VLAN group.



<groupname>A character string of 1 to 16 characters representing the name of the protocol group.

Description This command adds a protocol-based VLAN group to the system. When it is created, the protocol group will be assigned a unique number that will be used to identify the group in subsequent commands.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

port lacpmode all

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#port lacpmode all

vlan protocol group <groupname>

TIP: The protocol group identification number (groupid) can be found by entering the “show port protocol {<groupid> | all} command.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#vlan protocol group IPTV


4-21

4.6Protocol-Based

VLANCommands

Related Commands protocol group <groupid> <vlanid> on page 4-22protocol vlan group <groupid> on page 4-23protocol vlan group all <groupid> on page 4-23show port protocol {<groupid> | all} on page 4-38vlan protocol group add protocol <groupid> <protocol> on page 4-21vlan protocol group remove <groupid> on page 4-21

Summary Add a network protocol to a protocol-based VLAN.



<groupid>The ID number assigned to the VLAN protocol group.

<protocol>The protocol to be added to the protocol-based VLAN. Values include:

• IP: to add Internet Protocol to the VLAN.• ARP: adds Address Resolution Protocol to the VLAN.• IPX: adds the Internet Protocol Exchange to the VLAN.• PPPOE: adds Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet to the VLAN.

Description This command adds the specified protocol to the protocol-based VLAN identified by the <groupid> parameter. A group may have more than one protocol associated with it. Each interface and protocol combination can only be associated with one group. If adding a protocol to a group causes any conflicts with interfaces currently associated with the group, this command will fail and the protocol will not be added to the group.

“no” Form no vlan protocol group add protocol <groupid> <protocol>The “no” form of this command deletes the specified <protocol> (ip, arp, ipx or pppoe) from the protocol-based VLAN.

Defaults None

Example


ii

Summary Remove a protocol-based VLAN.


vlan protocol group add protocol <groupid> <protocol>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#vlan protocol group add protocol 2 ip

vlan protocol group remove <groupid>


4-22

4.6Protocol-Based VLAN Commands


<groupid>The ID number assigned to the VLAN protocol group to be removed.

Description This command removes the protocol-based VLAN group that is identified by the specified <groupid> value.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example


Summary Assign a VLAN to a protocol-based VLAN group.

Required Mode VLAN Config


<groupid>The identification number of an existing protocol group.


Description This command attaches a VLAN to a protocol-based VLAN identified by the <groupid> value.

“no” Form no protocol group <groupid> <vlanid>The “no” form of this command removes the <vlanid> from this protocol-based VLAN group that is identified by this <groupid>.

Defaults None

Example

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#vlan protocol group remove 1

protocol group <groupid> <vlanid>

NOTE: A group may only be associated with one VLAN at a time.

(Pannaway BAR) (Vlan) #protocol group 1 1040


4-23

4.6Protocol-Based

VLANCommands

Related Commands protocol vlan group <groupid> on page 4-23protocol vlan group all <groupid> on page 4-23show vlan <vlanid> on page 4-41show vlan brief on page 4-42vlan <vlanid> on page 4-8vlan protocol group <groupname> on page 4-20vlan protocol group add protocol <groupid> <protocol> on page 4-21show port protocol {<groupid> | all} on page 4-38

Summary Assign the current interface to a protocol-based VLAN.




Description This command adds the currently configured physical interface to the protocol-based VLAN identified by <groupid>. A group may have more than one interface associated with it. Each interface and protocol combination can only be associated with one group. If adding an interface to a group causes any conflicts with protocols currently associated with the group, this command will fail and the interface(s) will not be added to the group.

“no” Form no protocol vlan group <groupid> The “no” form of this command removes the current interface from the protocol-based VLAN group identified by this <groupid>.

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands protocol group <groupid> <vlanid> on page 4-22protocol vlan group all <groupid> on page 4-23show vlan <vlanid> on page 4-41vlan <vlanid> on page 4-8vlan protocol group <groupname> on page 4-20vlan protocol group add protocol <groupid> <protocol> on page 4-21show port protocol {<groupid> | all} on page 4-38

Summary Assign all interfaces to the identified Protocol-based VLAN group.




protocol vlan group <groupid>

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#protocol vlan group 2

protocol vlan group all <groupid>


4-24

4.7IGMP Commands

Description This command adds all physical interfaces to the protocol-based VLAN identified by <groupid>. A group may have more than one interface associated with it. Each interface and protocol combination can only be associated with one group. If adding an interface to a group causes any conflicts with protocols currently associated with the group, this command will fail and the interface(s) will not be added to the group.

“no” Form no protocol vlan group all <groupid>The “no” form of this command removes all interfaces from this protocol-based VLAN group that is identified by this <groupid>.

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands protocol group <groupid> <vlanid> on page 4-22protocol vlan group <groupid> on page 4-23show vlan <vlanid> on page 4-41vlan <vlanid> on page 4-8vlan protocol group <groupname> on page 4-20vlan protocol group add protocol <groupid> <protocol> on page 4-21show port protocol {<groupid> | all} on page 4-38

4.7 IGMP CommandsThe commands in this section control the operation of the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) on the BAR.

Summary Enable IGMP snooping.

Required Mode Global Config or Interface Config


None

Description This command enables IGMP Snooping mode on the system. The IGMP application supports the following:

• Global configuration or per interface configuration. Per VLAN configuration is not supported in the IGMP snooping application.

• Validation of the IP header checksum (as well as the IGMP header checksum) and discarding of the frame upon checksum error.

• Maintenance of the forwarding table entries based on the MAC address versus the IP address.

• Flooding of unregistered multicast data packets to all ports in the VLAN. If the command is entered in Interface Config mode, IGMP Snooping is activated on the current interface. If the command is entered in Global Config mode, IGMP Snooping is activated for all interfaces.

“no” Form no set igmpThe “no” form of this command disables IGMP Snooping on the system.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#protocol vlan group all 2

set igmp


4-25

4.7IGMP

Commands


Example

Related Commands set igmp groupmembershipinterval <membership-interval> on page 4-26set igmp interfacemode all on page 4-25set igmp maxresponse <response-interval> on page 4-25set igmp mcrtexpiretime <expire-time> on page 4-26show igmpsnooping on page 4-31

Summary Enable IGMP snooping on all BAR interfaces.



None

Description This command enables IGMP Snooping on all interfaces. If an interface which has IGMP Snooping enabled is enabled for routing or is enlisted as a member of a port-channel (LAG), IGMP Snooping functionality will be disabled on that interface. IGMP Snooping functionality will subsequently be re-enabled if routing is disabled or port-channel (LAG) membership is removed from an interface that has IGMP Snooping enabled.

“no” Form no set igmp interfacemode allThe “no” form of the command disables IGMP Snooping on all interfaces (the default).


Example

Related Commands set igmp on page 4-24set igmp groupmembershipinterval <membership-interval> on page 4-26set igmp maxresponse <response-interval> on page 4-25set igmp mcrtexpiretime <expire-time> on page 4-26show igmpsnooping on page 4-31

Summary Set the maximum response interval time for IGMP operation on the BAR.



<response-interval>The amount of time, in seconds, that the BAR will wait to receive a response after sending a query. This value must be less than the IGMP Query Interval time value. The range is 1 to 3600.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#set igmp

set igmp interfacemode all

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#set igmp interfacemode all

set igmp maxresponse <response-interval>


4-26

4.7IGMP Commands

Description This command sets the IGMP Maximum Response time on the system.

“no” Form no set igmp maxresponseThe “no” form of this command sets the system IGMP Maximum Response time back to its default of 10 seconds.

Defaults Response-interval: 10

Example

Related Commands set igmp on page 4-24set igmp groupmembershipinterval <membership-interval> on page 4-26set igmp interfacemode all on page 4-25set igmp mcrtexpiretime <expire-time> on page 4-26show igmpsnooping on page 4-31

Summary Set the IGMP membership interval for the BAR.



<membership-interval>The amount of time, in seconds, that the BAR will wait for a report or response from the IGMP group before deleting the interface from the membership list of the group. The interval is measured in seconds, from 1 to 3600.

Description This command sets the IGMP Group Membership Interval time on the system. The Group Membership Interval value must be greater than the IGMP Maximum Response time value.

“no” Form no set igmp groupmembershipintervalThe “no” form of the command sets the IGMP Group Membership Interval time on the system to the default

Defaults Membership-interval: 260

Example

Related Commands set igmp on page 4-24set igmp interfacemode all on page 4-25set igmp maxresponse <response-interval> on page 4-25set igmp mcrtexpiretime <expire-time> on page 4-26show igmpsnooping on page 4-31

Summary Set maximum MCRT expire time on the BAR.

Required Mode Global Config.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#set igmp maxresponse 20

set igmp groupmembershipinterval <membership-interval>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#set igmp groupmembershipinterval 500

set igmp mcrtexpiretime <expire-time>


4-27

4.7IGMP

Commands


<expire-time>This is the amount of time in seconds that a switch will wait for a query to be received on an interface before the interface is removed from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached. The range is 0 to 3600 seconds.

Description This command sets the Multicast Router Present Expiration time on the system.

“no” Form no set igmp mcrtexpiretimeThe “no” form of this command sets the Multicast Router Present Expiration time on the system to 0.

Defaults Expire-time: 0 (no expiration)

Example

Related Commands set igmp on page 4-24set igmp groupmembershipinterval <membership-interval> on page 4-26set igmp interfacemode all on page 4-25set igmp maxresponse <response-interval> on page 4-25show igmpsnooping on page 4-31

Summary Clear the contents of the IGMP snooping tables.




Description This command clears the tables managed by the IGMP Snooping function and will attempt to delete these entries from the Multicast Forwarding Database.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands set igmp on page 4-24show igmpsnooping on page 4-31

NOTE: To set an infinite timeout (no expiration) set the <expire-time> value to 0.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#set igmp mcrtexpiretime 3600

clear igmpsnooping [yes]

(Pannaway BAR) #clear igmpsnooping

Are you sure you want to clear all IGMP snooping entries? (y/n)y

IGMP Snooping Entries Cleared.


4-28

4.8Dot1P Commands

4.8 Dot1P CommandsThe following commands describe the configuration and monitoring of IEEE 802.1p port and user priority associations in the BAR.

Summary Set an 802.1p priority for a traffic class.

Required Mode Global Config or Interface Config


<userpriority>The numerical value of the 802.1p user priority assigned to the traffic class. This value may be from 0 to 7.

<trafficclass>The number of the internal or external traffic class. This value may be from 0 to 7.

Description This command maps an 802.1p priority to an internal traffic class for a device when in ‘Global Config’ mode. The number of available traffic classes may vary with the platform. Userpriority and trafficclass can both be the range from 0-7. Under ‘Interface Config’ mode, this command maps an 802.1p priority to an internal traffic class for a specific interface.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands show classofservice dot1pmapping <slot/port> on page 4-29

Summary Set the 802.1p port priority for all interfaces on the BAR.



<priority>The 802.1p priority value that will be assigned to all interfaces. This value may be an integer from 0 to 7.

Description This command configures the port priority assigned for untagged packets for all ports presently plugged into the device. The range for the priority is 0-7. Any subsequent per port configuration will override this configuration setting.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

classofservice dot1pmapping <userpriority> <trafficclass>

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#classofservice dot1pmapping 2 2

vlan port priority all <priority>


4-29

4.8Dot1P

Commands

Example

Related Commands vlan priority <priority> on page 4-29show vlan port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-43

Summary Set a VLAN 802.1p priority.



<priority>The 802.1p priority value for the interface. This value may be an integer from 0 to 7.

Description This command configures the default 802.1p port priority assigned for untagged packets for a specific interface.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands vlan port priority all <priority> on page 4-28show vlan port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-43

Summary Display the current 802.1p class of service mappings.



<slot/port>The combination of a slot in the BAR chassis and a port on that slot that identifies a unique network interface.

Description This command displays the current 802.1p priority mapping to internal traffic classes for a specific interface, as specified by the slot/port parameter.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#vlan port priority all 3

vlan priority <priority>

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#vlan priority 2

show classofservice dot1pmapping <slot/port>


4-30

4.9VLAN Display Commands

Example

Command Output: The command displays a table of the User priorities configured on the BAR and the ID of the traffic class associated with each user priority.

Related Commands classofservice dot1pmapping <userpriority> <trafficclass> on page 4-28

4.9 VLAN Display CommandsThe commands in this section are used to show the settings, configuration, and operational characteristics of existing VLANs. These commands also provide operational statistics for current VLANs on the BAR.

These commands also control the operation of port and session monitoring, enabling the monitoring of interfaces and groups across a VLAN association.

Summary Create a port monitoring association between two interfaces.



<slot/port>:This parameter identifies a unique slot and port combination. This parameter is used twice in the command; once to identify the source (monitored) port and then again to identify the destination (probe) port.

Description This command configures a probe port and a monitored port for session monitoring (port monitoring).

“no” Form no monitor session source <slot/port> destination <slot/port>The “no” form of the command eliminates the monitoring relationship between the two specified ports and removes the probe port from all VLANs.

Defaults None

(Pannaway BAR) #show classofservice dot1pmapping 0/1

User Priority Traffic Class ------------- ------------- 0 2 1 0 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7

monitor session source <slot/port> destination <slot/port>

NOTE: If the probe port is a member of a VLAN, it must be manually re-assigned to that VLAN following the use of the “no monitor session source” command.


4-31

4.9VLAN Display

Commands

Example

Related Commands monitor session mode on page 4-31show monitor on page 4-36

Summary Enables the port monitoring mode.



None.

Description This command enables the BAR’s port monitoring mode. The probe and monitored ports must be configured before port monitoring can be enabled. If enabled, the probe port will monitor all traffic received and transmitted on the physical monitored port. It is not necessary to disable port monitoring before modifying the probe and monitored ports.

“no” Form no monitor session modeThe “no” form of this command sets the monitor session (port monitoring) mode to disable (the default).

Defaults Disabled

Example

Related Commands monitor session source <slot/port> destination <slot/port> on page 4-30show monitor on page 4-36

Summary Show IGMP snooping information.



None

Description This command displays IGMP Snooping information. Configured information is displayed whether or not IGMP Snooping is enabled. Status information is only displayed when IGMP Snooping is enabled.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#monitor session source 0/11 destination 0/12

monitor session mode

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)# monitor session mode

show igmpsnooping


4-32


Example

Command Output: The following information is displayed on the show igmpsnooping screen:

Related Commands set igmp on page 4-24set igmp interfacemode all on page 4-25set igmp maxresponse <response-interval> on page 4-25set igmp groupmembershipinterval <membership-interval> on page 4-26set igmp mcrtexpiretime <expire-time> on page 4-26

Summary Show IGMP snooping entries.



None

Description This command displays the IGMP Snooping entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database (MFDB) table.

“no” Form None

(Pannaway BAR) #show igmpsnooping

Admin Mode..................................... EnableGroup Membership Interval...................... 500Max Response Time.............................. 10Multicast Router Present Expiration Time....... 0Interfaces Enabled for IGMP Snooping........... 0/1Multicast Control Frame Count.................. 0Data Frames Forwarded by the CPU............... 0

Admin Mode Indicates the status of IGMP Snooping (enabled or disabled) on the switch.

Group Membership Interval

Shows the IGMP Group membership interval configured for the group. The membership interval is the amount of time, in seconds, that the BAR will wait for a report or response from the IGMP group before deleting the interface from the membership list of the group.

Max Response Time Indicates the amount of time the switch will wait after sending a query on an interface because it did not receive a report for a particular group on that interface.

Multicast RouterPresent Expiration Time

If a query is not received on an interface within this amount of time, the interface is removed from the list of interfaces with multicast routers attached.

Interfaces Enabledfor IGMP Snooping

The list of interfaces on which IGMP Snooping is enabled.

Multicast ControlFrame Count

The number of multicast control frames that are processed by the CPU. This status value is only displayed when IGMP Snooping is enabled.

Data Frames Forwarded by the CPU

Shows the number of data frames that have been forwarded under IGMP snooping operation.

show mac-address-table igmpsnooping


4-33

4.9VLAN Display

Commands

Defaults None

Command Output: The show mac-address-table igmpsnooping screen shows the following information:

Summary Show MFDB information.



<macaddr>This optional parameter is the MAC address of an interface that the command will present the MFDB table for.

allThe optional all parameter specifies that the MFDB table should be retrieved for all interfaces.

Description This command displays the Multicast Forwarding Database (MFDB) information. If the command is entered with no parameter, the entire table is displayed. The user can display the table entry for one MAC Address by specifying <macaddr> as an optional parameter.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Command Output: The following information is shown on the mac-address-table multicast screen:

Mac Address A unicast MAC address for which the switch has forwarding and or filtering information. The format is 6 or 8 two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are separated by colons, for example 01:23:45:67:89:AB. In an IVL system the MAC address will be displayed as 8 bytes. In an SVL system, the MAC address will be displayed as 6 bytes.

Type Displays the type of the entry. Static entries are those that are configured by the end user. Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or protocol.

Description The text description of this multicast table entry.

Interfaces The list of interfaces that are designated for forwarding (Fwd:) and filtering (Flt:).

show mac-address-table multicast [<macaddr> | all]


Type The type of the entry. Static entries are those that are configured by the end user. Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or protocol.

Component The component that is responsible for this entry in the Multicast Forwarding Database. Possible values are IGMP Snooping, GMRP, and Static Filtering.

Description A text description of this multicast table entry.


4-34


Summary Show static MAC filtering information.



<macaddr> <vlanid>Entering the combination of a MAC address value and existing VLAN ID instructs the CLI to show only the Static MAC Filter table for that combination of VLAN and MAC address.

allEntering this parameter instructs the CLI to show all Static MAC filters in the BAR.

Description This command displays the Static MAC Filtering information for all Static MAC Filters.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Command Output: The following information is presented on the show mac-address-table static screen:

Related Commands macfilter <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-16macfilter adddest <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-16macfilter adddest all <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-17macfilter addsrc <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-18macfilter addsrc all <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-18

Summary Show static MAC filtering entries.

Required Mode Privileged Exec.


None

Description This command displays the Static Filtering entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database (MFDB) table.

“no” Form None

Interfaces A list of interfaces that are designated for forwarding (Fwd:) and filtering (Flt:).

Forwarding Interfaces The resultant forwarding list is derived from combining all the component forwarding interfaces and removing the interfaces that are listed as the static filtering interfaces.

show mac-address-table static {<macaddr> <vlanid> | all}

Mac Address The MAC address of the static MAC filter entry.

VLAN ID The VLAN ID of the static MAC filter entry.

Source Port(s) Indicates the source port filter set’s slot and port(s).

Destination Port(s) Indicates the destination port filter set’s slot and port(s).

show mac-address-table staticfiltering


4-35

4.9VLAN Display

Commands

Defaults None

Command Output The following information is presented in response to the show mac-address-table staticfiltering command:

Related Commands macfilter <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-16macfilter adddest <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-16macfilter adddest all <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-17macfilter addsrc <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-18macfilter addsrc all <macaddr> <vlanid> on page 4-18

Summary Show the MFDB statistics for the BAR.



None

Description This command displays the Multicast Forwarding Database (MFDB) statistics.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output: The show mac-address-table stats command provides the following information:


Type The type of the entry. Static entries are those that are configured by the end user. Dynamic entries are added to the table as a result of a learning process or protocol.

Description A text description of this multicast table entry.

Interfaces The list of interfaces that are designated for forwarding (Fwd:) and filtering (Flt:).

show mac-address-table stats

(Pannaway BAR) #show mac-address-table stats

Max MFDB Table Entries......................... 256Most MFDB Entries Since Last Reset............. 65Current Entries................................ 31

Max MFDB Table Entries The total number of entries that can possibly be in the Multicast Forwarding Database table.

Most MFDB Entries Since Last Reset

The largest number of entries that have been present in the Multicast Forwarding Database table. This value is also known as the MFDB high-water mark.

Current Entries The current number of entries in the Multicast Forwarding Database table.


4-36


Summary Show port monitoring information.



None

Description This command displays the port monitoring information for the system.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output: The following information is presented in response to the show monitor command:

Related Commands monitor session mode on page 4-31monitor session source <slot/port> destination <slot/port> on page 4-30

Summary Show settings and information for a BAR port.



<slot/port>A combination of slot and port numbers that identifies a single interface on the BAR.

allThis argument applies the command to all BAR interfaces.

Description This command displays port information for a specified port, or all ports.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

show monitor

(Pannaway BAR) #show monitor

Port Monitor Mode.............................. EnableProbe Port Slot/Port........................... 0/3Mirrored Port Slot/Port........................ 0/11

Port Monitor Mode Indicates whether the Port Monitoring feature is enabled or disabled.

Probe Port Slot/Port The slot/port that is configured as the probe port. If this value has not been configured, ‘Not Configured’ will be displayed.

Monitored Port Slot/Port The slot/port that is configured as the monitored port. If this value has not been configured, ‘Not Configured’ will be displayed.

show port {<slot/port> | all}


4-37

4.9VLAN Display

Commands

Example

Command Output: The following information is presented on the show port screen:

Related Commands auto-negotiate on page 3-1addport <logical slot/port> on page 4-5monitor session source <slot/port> destination <slot/port> on page 4-30port lacpmode on page 4-19speed <portspeed> {full-duplex | half-duplex} on page 3-2port-channel linktrap {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-4shutdown on page 3-4snmp trap link-status on page 13-9

(Pannaway BAR) #show port all

Slot/ Admin Physical Physical Link Link LACPPort Type Mode Mode Status Status Trap Mode----- ------ ------- ---------- ---------- ------ ------- ------- 0/1 Enable Auto Down Enable Enable 0/2 Enable Auto Down Enable Enable 0/3 Probe Enable Auto Down Enable Enable 0/4 PC Mbr Enable Auto Down Enable Enable 0/5 PC Mbr Enable Auto Down Enable Enable 0/6 PC Mbr Enable Auto Down Enable Enable 0/7 Enable Auto Down Enable Enable 0/8 Enable Auto Down Enable Enable 0/9 Enable Auto Down Enable Enable 0/10 Enable Auto Down Enable Enable 0/11 Mirror Enable Auto 1000 Full Up Enable Enable 0/12 Enable Auto 100 Half Up Enable Enable 1/1 Enable Down Enable Enable

Slot/Port The combination of a slot and physical port identifying an interface on the BAR.

Type If not blank, this field indicates that this port is a special type of port. The possible values are:

• Mirror: This port is performing port monitoring of the probe port. • PC Mbr: This port is a member of a port-channel (LAG). • Probe: This port is a probe port.

Admin Mode Displays the Port control administration state (enabled or disabled). The port must be enabled (the default) in order for it to be allowed into the network.

Physical Mode Indicates the configured port speed and duplex mode. If auto-negotiation support is selected, then the duplex mode and speed were set from the auto-negotiation process. Otherwise, this object displays the port’s duplex mode and transmission rate.

Physical Status Indicates the port speed and duplex mode configured for the port.

Link Status Indicates whether the Link is up or down.

Link Trap Indicates whether or not the port sends a trap when link status changes. The default is to send traps (enabled).

LACP Mode Displays whether LACP is enabled or disabled on this port.


4-38


Summary Show protocol-based VLAN settings for the BAR.



<groupid>This parameter is the Group ID of a specific VLAN protocol group. When the command is submitted with this parameter, the BAR shows information related only to that group.

allThis parameter causes the CLI to show Protocol-Based VLAN information for all VLAN groups in the BAR.

Description This command displays the Protocol-Based VLAN information for either the entire system, or for the indicated group.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output: The show port protocol command presents the following information as output:

Related Commands protocol group <groupid> <vlanid> on page 4-22protocol vlan group <groupid> on page 4-23vlan protocol group <groupname> on page 4-20vlan protocol group add protocol <groupid> <protocol> on page 4-21

show port protocol {<groupid> | all}

(Pannaway BAR) #show port protocol all

Group Group Name ID Protocol(s) VLAN Interface(s)---------------- ------ ----------- ---- ------------------------MCAST 1 IP 2 0/6,0/7

Group Name Displays the group name of an entry in the Protocol-based VLAN table.

Group ID Displays the group identifier of the protocol group.

Protocol(s) Indicates the type of protocol(s) for this group.

VLAN Indicates the VLAN associated with this protocol group.

Interface(s) Lists the slot/port interface(s) that are associated with this protocol group.


4-39

4.9VLAN Display

Commands

Summary Show a summary of port-channels on the BAR.



<logical slot/port>A combination of slot and port numbers that identifies a single port-channel (LAG) on the BAR.


Description This command displays an overview of all port-channels (LAGs) on the switch.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output: The show port-channel command displays the following information:

show port-channel {<logical slot/port> | all}

(Pannaway BAR) #show port-channel all

Log. Port- LinkSlot/ Channel Admin Trap STP Mbr Port PortPort Name Link Mode Mode Mode Type Ports Speed Active----- --------------- ---- ----- ---- ------ ------- ------ --------- ------1/1 Area1Link Down En. En. Dis. Dynamic 0/1 Auto False 0/2 Auto False 0/3 Auto False 0/4 Auto False

Log. Slot/Port The logical slot and the logical port that identify the LAG.

Port-Channel Name

The name of this port-channel (LAG). This may be any string of up to 15 alphanumeric characters.

Link Indicates whether the Link is up or down.

Admin Mode The administrative status of this port-channel LAG: enabled (factory default) or disabled.

Link Trap Mode Indicates whether the port-channel (LAG) is configured to send a trap when link status changes. Enabled (En.) indicates traps are sent; disabled (Dis.) indicates no traps are sent. The default is enabled.

STP Mode The Spanning Tree Protocol Administrative Mode associated with the port or port-channel (LAG).

Type Displays the status designating whether a particular port-channel (LAG) is statically maintained (Static) or dynamically maintained (Dynamic).

Mbr Ports A listing of the ports that are members of this port-channel (LAG), in slot/port notation. There can be a maximum of eight ports assigned to a given port-channel (LAG).

Port Speed Speed of the port-channel port.

Port Active The activity condition of the indicated member port. True indicates the port is active, False indicates the port is inactive.


4-40


Related Commands auto-negotiate on page 3-1port-channel staticcapability on page 4-1port-channel <name> on page 4-2port-channel adminmode {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-3port-channel linktrap {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-4port-channel name {<logical slot/port> | all} <name> on page 4-3addport <logical slot/port> on page 4-5speed <portspeed> {full-duplex | half-duplex} on page 3-2spanning-tree {<logical slot/port> | all} {off | 802.1d | fast} on page 3-12

Summary Show static capability and state of port-channels.



None

Description This command displays the static capability of all port-channels (LAGs) on the device as well as a summary of individual port-channels.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output: The following information is presented in the port-channel brief information table:

show port-channel brief

Pannaway BAR) #show port-channel brief

Static Capability: Enabled

Logical Slot/Port Port-Channel Name Link State Mbr Ports Active Ports----------------- ----------------- ---------- --------- ------------1/1 test Down 0/1,0/2, 0/3

Static Capability This field displays whether or not the device has static capability enabled.

Logical Slot/Port The logical slot and the logical port identifying the LAG.

Port-Channel Name Displays the name of the port-channel.

Link State Indicates whether the link is up or down.

Mbr Ports Lists the ports that are members of this port-channel, in slot/port notation.

Active Ports Lists the ports that are actively participating in this port-channel.


4-41

4.9VLAN Display

Commands

Related Commands port-channel staticcapability on page 4-1mtu <mtu-size> on page 3-6addport <logical slot/port> on page 4-5delete interface {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-6deleteport <logical slot/port> on page 4-5port-channel <name> on page 4-2port-channel adminmode {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-3port-channel linktrap {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-4port-channel name {<logical slot/port> | all} <name> on page 4-3show port-channel {<logical slot/port> | all} on page 4-39

Summary Show statistics for a single VLAN on the BAR.



<vlanid>The unique identification number of a specific VLAN on the BAR.

Description This command displays detailed information, including interface information, for the VLAN specified by the valid VLAN identification number.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

show vlan <vlanid>

(Pannaway BAR) #show vlan 2

VLAN ID: 2VLAN Name: VLAN 2VLAN Type: Static

slot/port Current Configured Tagging---------- -------- ----------- -------- 0/1 Exclude Exclude Untagged 0/2 Exclude Exclude Untagged 0/4 Exclude Autodetect Untagged 0/5 Exclude Autodetect Untagged 0/6 Exclude Autodetect Untagged 0/7 Include Include Tagged 0/8 Exclude Autodetect Untagged 0/9 Exclude Autodetect Untagged 0/10 Exclude Autodetect Untagged 0/11 Exclude Autodetect Untagged 0/12 Exclude Autodetect Untagged 1/1 Exclude Autodetect Untagged


4-42


Command Output: The following information is shown on the show vlan screen:

Related Commands vlan <vlanid> on page 4-8vlan name <vlanid> <name> on page 4-9vlan participation <participation-mode> <vlanid> on page 4-10vlan participation all <participation-mode> <vlanid> on page 4-11vlan port tagging all <vlanid> on page 4-13vlan tagging <vlanid> on page 4-14

Summary Show a list of VLANs.



None

Description This command displays a list of all configured VLANs.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

VLAN ID The VLAN Identifier (VID) associated with the VLAN, ranging from 1 to 4036.

VLAN Name The optional text description associated with this VLAN (up to 16 alphanumeric characters long, including blanks). The default is blank. VLAN ID 1 always has a name of ‘Default.’

VLAN Type The type of VLAN: Default (VLAN ID = 1) or Static (one that is configured and permanently defined).

slot/port Indicates by slot ID and port number which port is controlled by the fields on this line.

Current Determines the degree of participation of this port in this VLAN. The permissible values are:

• Include: This port is always a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to registration “fixed” in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

• Exclude: This port is never a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to registration “forbidden” in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

Configured Determines the configured degree of participation of this port in this VLAN. The permissible values are:

• Include: This port is always a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to registration “fixed” in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

• Exclude: This port is never a member of this VLAN. This is equivalent to registration “forbidden” in the IEEE 802.1Q standard.

Tagging Displays the tagging behavior for this port in this VLAN. Possible values are:• Tagged: This port transmits traffic for this VLAN as tagged frames. • Untagged: This port transmits traffic for this VLAN as untagged frames.

show vlan brief


4-43

4.9VLAN Display

Commands

Example

Command Output: The show vlan brief command output provides the following information:

Related Commands vlan <vlanid> on page 4-8vlan name <vlanid> <name> on page 4-9

Summary Show settings for a VLAN port.



<slot/port>A combination of slot and port numbers that identifies a unique interface on the BAR.


Description This command displays VLAN port information.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

(Pannaway BAR) #show vlan brief

VLAN ID VLAN Name VLAN Type------- -------------------------------- ---------1 Default Default2 VLAN 2 Static

VLAN ID The VLAN Identifier (vlanid) associated with each VLAN. The range of the VLAN ID is 1 to 4036.

VLAN Name The optional descriptive text string associated with this VLAN (up to 16 characters). A blank entry indicates that no custom name has been assigned to the VLAN. VLAN ID 1 always has a name of ‘Default’.

VLAN Type The type of VLAN: Default (VLAN ID = 1) or Static (one that is configured and permanently defined).

show vlan port {<slot/port> | all}

(Pannaway BAR) #show vlan port 0/7

Port Acceptable Ingress Defaultslot/port VLAN ID Frame Types Filtering GVRP Priority--------- ------- ------------ ----------- ------- -------- 0/7 1 Admit All Disable Disable 0


4-44


Command Output: The show vlan port command displays the following information:

Related Commands vlan port priority all <priority> on page 4-28vlan priority <priority> on page 4-29vlan acceptframe {vlanonly | all} on page 4-8vlan ingressfilter on page 4-9vlan port acceptframe all {vlanonly | all} on page 4-11vlan port ingressfilter all on page 4-12

slot/port Indicates by slot ID and port number which port is controlled by the fields on this line.

Port VLAN ID The VLAN ID that this port will assign to untagged frames or priority tagged frames received on this port. The value must be for an existing VLAN. The factory default is 1 (the default VLAN).

Acceptable Frame Types The types of frames that may be received on this port. The options are ’VLAN only’ and ’Admit All’. When set to ’VLAN only’, untagged frames or priority tagged frames received on this port are discarded. When set to ’Admit All’, untagged frames or priority tagged frames received on this port are accepted and assigned the value of the Port VLAN ID for this port. With either option, VLAN tagged frames are forwarded in accordance to the 802.1Q VLAN specification.

Ingress Filtering Indicates whether ingress filtering is enabled or disabled. When enabled, the frame is discarded if this port is not a member of the VLAN with which this frame is associated. In a tagged frame, the VLAN is identified by the VLAN ID in the tag. In an untagged frame, the VLAN is the Port VLAN ID specified for the port that received this frame. When disabled, all frames are forwarded in accordance with the 802.1Q VLAN bridge specification. The factory default is disabled.

GVRP Indicates that the GVRP protocol is disabled (not supported).

Default Priority The 802.1p priority assigned to tagged packets arriving on the port.

Chapter 5Protocol Independent

Routing Commands

This chapter presents the CLI commands that are used to configure and monitor protocol-independent routing operations for the Pannaway BAR.

5.1 Contents of this ChapterThis chapter provides detailed explanations of routing commands related to routing operations that do not rely on specific routing protocols such as RIP, OSPF, or VRRP. The CLI commands in this section affect the operation of system-wide routing, such as routing table administration, ARP response parameters, and other basic routing controls. The following sections are provided in this chapter:

Commands for OSPF, VRRP, and RIP routing configuration and monitoring are found in chapters specifically focused on those technologies.

5.2 General Routing Configuration CommandsThe following commands configure the general routing characteristics of the BAR interfaces and the behavior of routing protocols on the BAR.

Summary Assigns an IP address to the current interface.

Required Mode Interface Config.

Topic on page

General Routing Configuration Commands 5-1

General Routing Display Commands 5-6

ARP Configuration Commands 5-9

ARP Display Commands 5-13

BootP/DHCP Relay Configuration Commands

5-16

BootP/DHCP Relay Display Commands 5-18

ip address <ipaddress> <subnetmask>


5-2

5.2General Routing Configuration Commands


<ipaddress>The IP address of the interface in Dotted Decimal Notation. This IP address must be on a different subnetwork than the subnetwork to which the BAR’s network IP port belongs.

<subnetmask> The subnet mask value for the interface in Dotted Decimal Notation.

Description Set an IP address and subnet mask combination for the current interface.

“no” Form no ip address <ipaddr> <subnetmask>The “no” form of this command deleted the specified IP address and subnet mask combination.

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands show ip interface <slot/port> on page 5-6

Summary Enable routing operation on the current interface.



None

Description This command enables routing for an interface.

“no” Form no routingThe “no” form of this command disables routing for the interface.

Defaults Mode disabled.

Example


Summary Set link layer encapsulation type on the current interface.



[ethernet | snap]Required parameter naming the type of encapsulation used on the interface. Selections are ethernet or snap (Service Network Access Protocol).

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip address 10.10.5.115 255.255.255.0

routing

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#routing

encapsulation [ethernet | snap]


5-3

5.2General Routing


Description This command sets the Link Layer Encapsulation type that the currently selected interface will use.

“no” Form None

Defaults Type: Ethernet

Example

Related Commands None

Summary Enable Internet Router Discovery Protocol (IRDP) on the interface.



None

Description This command enables the Internet Router Discovery Protocol on the current interface.

“no” Form no ip irdpThe “no” form of the command disables IRDP operation on the currently selected interface.

Defaults Mode Enabled

Example

Related Commands ip irdp address <ipaddress> on page 5-3ip irdp maxadvertinterval <maxadvertinterval> on page 5-4ip irdp minadvertinterval <minadvertinterval> on page 5-4ip irdp holdtime <time> on page 5-5ip irdp preference <irdp-preference> on page 5-5show ip irdp [<slot/port> | all] on page 5-8

Summary Configure the advertised router address for the current interface.



<ipaddress>:The IP address that the interface will advertise as its router address. The valid values are 224.0.0.1 and 255.255.255.255.

Description This command configures the address to be used to advertise the router for the interface.

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#encapsulation snap

ip irdp

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#no ip irdp

ip irdp address <ipaddress>


5-4

5.2General Routing Configuration Commands

“no” Form no ip ardp addressThe “no” form of this command configures the interface to use the default address for advertisement.

Defaults IP Address: 224.0.0.1

Example

Related Commands show ip irdp [<slot/port> | all] on page 5-8

Summary Configure maximum time allowed between IRDP advertisements.



<maxadvertinterval>The maximum number of seconds allowed between router advertisements. Acceptable values are from 4 to 1800.

Description This command configures the maximum time, in seconds, allowed between sending router advertisements from the interface.

“no” Form no ip irdp maxadvertinerval

The “no” form of this command sets the maximum advertisement interval to its default of 600 seconds.

Defaults Maxadvertinterval: 600

Example

Related Commands ip irdp holdtime <time> on page 5-5show ip irdp [<slot/port> | all] on page 5-8

Summary Set minimum IRDP advertising interval for the interface.



<minadvertinterval>This parameter is the duration, in seconds, of the interval between router advertisements from the interface. Values for this parameter are from 3 seconds up to the current maxadvertinterval value for the interface.

Description This command configures the minimum time, in seconds, allowed between sending router advertisements from the interface.

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip irdp address 255.255.255.255

ip irdp maxadvertinterval <maxadvertinterval>

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip irdp maxadvertinterval 1000

ip irdp minadvertinterval <minadvertinterval>


5-5

5.2General Routing


“no” Form no ip irdp minadvertintervalThe “no” form of this command sets the minimum advertisement interval to its default of (0.75 * maxadvertinterval).

Defaults Minadvertinterval: (0.75 * maxadvertinterval)

Example

Related Commands ip irdp maxadvertinterval <maxadvertinterval> on page 5-4show ip irdp [<slot/port> | all] on page 5-8

Summary Set hold time for IRDP advertisements from this interface.



<time>The amount of time, in seconds, that the router will hold IRDP advertisements from this interface. Values for this parameter may be from the configured maxadvertinterval value (maximum advertising interval, default of 600 seconds) up to 9000 seconds.

Description This command configures the value, in seconds, of the holdtime field of the router advertisement sent from this interface.

“no” Form no ip irdp holdtimeThe “no” form of this command configures the default value for IRDP holdtime (3 * maxadvertinterval).

Defaults Time: (maxadvertinterval ∗ 3)

Example

Related Commands ip irdp maxadvertinterval <maxadvertinterval> on page 5-4show ip irdp [<slot/port> | all] on page 5-8

Summary Set IRDP router preference value for the interface.



<irdp-preference>Preference value of the interface. This value may be from -2,147,483,648 to 2,147,483,648. Enter the value without commas.

Description This command configures the preferability of the address as a default router address, relative to other router addresses on the same subnet.

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip irdp minadvertinterval 800

ip irdp holdtime <time>

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip irdp holdtime 4000

ip irdp preference <irdp-preference>


5-6

5.3General Routing Display Commands

“no” Form no ip irdp preferenceThe “no” form of this command sets the default router preference to its default value of 0.

Defaults IRDP-preference: 0

Example

Related Commands show ip irdp [<slot/port> | all] on page 5-8

Summary Set IP Network Directed Broadcasting mode on the interface.



None

Description This command activates the Network Directed Broadcasting mode for the BAR interface.

“no” Form no ip netdirbcastThe “no” form of this command disables the forwarding of network directed broadcasts, so that they are dropped.


Example


5.3 General Routing Display CommandsThe following commands are used to display routing-specific information about an interface.

Summary Shows IP configuration and statistics for the specified interface.




Description This command displays the IP network settings for the BAR, including the IP address, subnet mask, and some router operational modes.

“no” Form None

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip irdp preference 3

ip netdirbcast

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip netdirbcast

show ip interface <slot/port>


5-7

5.3General Routing

DisplayCommands

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The show ip interface statistics screen displays the following information:

Related Commands encapsulation [ethernet | snap] on page 5-2ip address <ipaddress> <subnetmask> on page 5-1routing on page 5-2ip netdirbcast on page 5-6

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip interface 0/5

IP Address..................................... 66.15.30.2Subnet Mask.................................... 255.255.255.252Routing Mode................................... EnableAdministrative Mode............................ EnableForward Net Directed Broadcasts................ DisableActive State................................... ActiveLink Speed Data Rate........................... 1000 FullMAC Address.................................... 00:0A:9F:50:00:96Encapsulation Type............................. Ethernet

IP Address An IP address representing the subnet configuration of the router interface. This is a configured value.

Subnet Mask A mask of the network and host portion of the IP address for the router interface. This is a configured value.

Routing Mode The administrative mode of router interface participation: enabled or disabled. This is a configured value.

Administrative Mode The administrative mode of the specified interface: enabled or disabled. This is a configured value.

Forward Net Directed Broadcasts Indicates whether forwarding of network-directed broadcasts is enabled or disabled. This is a configured value.

Active State Indicates whether the interface is active or inactive. An interface is considered active if its link is up and it is in forwarding state.

Link Speed Data Rate An integer representing the physical link data rate of the specified interface. This is measured in Megabits per second (Mbps).

MAC Address The burned in physical address of the specified interface. The format is 6 two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are separated by colons.

Encapsulation Type The encapsulation type for the specified interface. The types are: Ethernet or SNAP. This is a configured value.


5-8

5.3General Routing Display Commands

Summary Show basic IP information for BAR interfaces.



None

Description This command provides a summary of the IP networking settings of the BAR’s network interfaces.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The show ip interface brief screen displays the following information:

Related Commands ip address <ipaddress> <subnetmask> on page 5-1ip netdirbcast on page 5-6

Summary Display IRDP settings for the specified interface or all interfaces on the BAR.



<slot/port>:A combination of slot and port numbers that identifies a single interface on the BAR.

all:This argument applies the command to all BAR interfaces.

Description This command supplies a table of IRDP settings reflecting the configuration of each IRDP-enabled interface in the BAR.

show ip interface brief

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip interface brief Netdir MultiSlot/Port IP Address IP Mask Bcast CastFwd--------- --------------- --------------- -------- --------0/5 66.15.30.2 255.255.255.252 Disable Enable3/1 111.222.100.1 255.255.255.128 Disable Disable

Slot/Port The interface being displayed on the row.

IP Address The IP address of the routing interface in 32-bit dotted decimal format.

IP Mask The IP mask of the routing interface in 32-bit dotted decimal format.

Netdir Bcast Indicates if net-directed broadcasts are forwarded on this interface. Possible values are Enable or Disable.

MultiCast Fwd Indicates the multicast forwarding administrative mode on the interface. Possible values are Enable or Disable.

show ip irdp [<slot/port> | all]


5-9

5.4ARP


“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The show ip irdp screen shows the following information:.

Related Commands ip irdp on page 5-3ip irdp maxadvertinterval <maxadvertinterval> on page 5-4ip irdp minadvertinterval <minadvertinterval> on page 5-4ip irdp preference <irdp-preference> on page 5-5

5.4 ARP Configuration CommandsThe commands in this section configure the operation of the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) on the BAR.

Summary Manually creates an ARP table entry.



<ipaddress>IP address of a device on a subnet attached to an existing routing interface.

<macaddress>The unicast MAC address for the device identified by the <ipaddress> parameter. The format is 6 two-digit hexadecimal numbers that are separated by colons.

Description This command creates an entry in the BAR’s system Address Resolution Protocol table.

“no” Form no arp <ipaddress> <macaddress>The “no” form of the command deletes the ARP entry defined by the <ipaddress> and <macaddress> pair.

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip irdp 0/2Intf Ad Mode Advertise Address Max Int Min Int Hold Time Preference---- ------- ----------------- ------- ------- -------- -----------0/2 Enable 224.0.0.1 1000 750 3000 0

Intf The slot and port combination identifying the IRDP interface.

Ad Mode The advertise mode which indicates whether router discovery is enabled or disabled on this interface.

Advertise Address The advertised address for the IRDP interface.

Max Int The maximum advertise interval which is the maximum time allowed between sending router advertisements from the interface in seconds.

Min Int The minimum advertise interval which is the minimum time allowed between sending router advertisements from the interface in seconds.

Hold Time The amount of time for IRDP advertisements on the interface.

Preferences The preference of the address as a default router address, relative to other router addresses on the same subnet.

arp <ipaddress> <macaddr>


5-10

5.4ARP Configuration Commands

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands show arp on page 5-13

Summary Configures the size of the ARP cache.



<entries>The size, in entries, of the ARP cache. The acceptable range of this value is 152 - 3304.

Description This command manually configures the maximum number of entries that can be stored in the BAR system ARP cache. When the ARP cache entry limit is reached, newer ARP table entries will automatically overwrite older ones.

“no” Form no arp cachesizeResets the ARP cache to the default size.

Defaults Entries: 3304

Example


Summary Enables automatic renewal of dynamic ARP entries.



None

Description This command enables the system ARP component to automatically renew ARP entries of the “dynamic” type when they age out.

“no” Form no arp dynamicrenewDisables the automatic renewal of ARP entries upon age out.


Example

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#arp 10.10.4.252 00:00:1d:5f:a3:15

arp cachesize <entries>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#arp cachesize 3300

arp dynamicrenew

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#arp dynamicrenew


5-11

5.4ARP


Related Commands arp purge <ipaddr> on page 5-11arp timeout <seconds> on page 5-12clear arp-cache [gateway] on page 5-13show arp on page 5-13

Summary Purge the specified IP address from the ARP cache.



<ipaddr>The IP address to be purged from the ARP cache.

Description This command causes the IP address specified by <ipaddr> to be removed from the ARP cache. Only entries of type dynamic or gateway are affected by this command.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example


Summary Set the response timeout for ARP requests.



<resp-timeout>Duration of the timeout in seconds. The range of this value is from 1-10 in whole number increments.

Description This command configures the ARP request response timeout. The value for <resp-timeout> is a valid positive integer, ranging from 1-10, which represents the IP ARP entry response timeout time in seconds.

“no” Form no arp resptimeThe “no” form of the command resets the ARP response timeout to the default value.

Defaults Resp-timeout: 1

Example

Related Commands arp retries <retries> on page 5-12show arp on page 5-13

arp purge <ipaddr>

(Pannaway BAR) #arp purge 10.10.4.253

arp resptime <resp-timeout>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#arp resptime 3


5-12

5.4ARP Configuration Commands

Summary Sets maximum retry count for ARP requests.



<retries>Number of retries allowed. Values range from 1-10.

Description This command configures the ARP count of maximum request for retries.

“no” Form no arp retriesThe “no” form of the command resets the arp retries count to the default of 4.

Defaults Retries: 4

Example

Related Commands arp resptime <resp-timeout> on page 5-11show arp on page 5-13

Summary Sets the ARP entry age time.



<seconds>The number of seconds that ARP entries will be held in the ARP cache. Values are from 15 - 21600, in whole number increments only.

Description This command configures the ARP entry ageout time, in seconds.

“no” Form no arp timeoutSets the ARP timeout value to the default.

Defaults <seconds>: 1200

Example


arp retries <retries>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#arp retries 6

arp timeout <seconds>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#arp timeout 2400


5-13

5.5ARP DisplayCommands

Summary Clear the ARP cache of dynamic entries.



[gateway]This optional parameter causes the command to clear both dynamic entries and ARP cache entries of the “gateway” category.

Description This command clears the contents of the BAR’s ARP cache.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example


5.5 ARP Display Commands

Summary Show the ARP cache and ARP settings for the BAR.



None

Description This command displays the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cache. The displayed results are not the total ARP entries. To view the total ARP entries, you should view the show arp results in conjunction with the results of show arp switch on page 3-30.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

clear arp-cache [gateway]

(Pannaway BAR) #clear arp-cache gateway

show arp


5-14

5.5ARP Display Commands

Example

Command Output The response to this command displays the following information:

The following is displayed for each ARP entry.

(Pannaway BAR) #show arpAge Time (seconds)............................. 1200Response Time (seconds)........................ 1Retries........................................ 4Cache Size..................................... 3304Dynamic Renew Mode ............................ DisableTotal Entry Count Current / Peak .............. 30 / 35Static Entry Count Current / Max .............. 0 / 64

IP Address MAC Address Interface Type Age--------------- ----------------- ----------- -------- -----------10.10.2.1 00:0A:9F:00:02:AE 0/11 Gateway 0h 0m 20s10.10.2.2 00:01:E7:1E:4B:80 0/11 Dynamic 0h 15m 55s10.10.2.17 00:09:5B:05:D1:3B 0/11 Dynamic 0h 11m 47s10.10.2.18 00:09:5B:0A:67:95 0/11 Dynamic 0h 2m 9s10.10.2.19 00:09:5B:0A:DF:7B 0/11 Dynamic 0h 4m 44s10.10.2.20 00:0A:9F:40:00:2B 0/11 Dynamic 0h 12m 58s10.10.2.24 00:0A:9F:00:02:A4 0/11 Dynamic 0h 16m 17s10.10.2.29 00:0A:9F:00:02:59 0/11 Dynamic 0h 16m 13s10.10.2.31 00:08:74:DE:6D:08 0/11 Dynamic 0h 0m 7s--More-- or (q)uit

Age Time (seconds) The time, in seconds, that an ARP table entry is retained before being deleted.

Response Time (seconds) The amount of time, in seconds, that the BAR waits for an ARP response before timing out the request.

Retries The maximum number of times an ARP request is retried.

Cache Size The maximum number of entries in the ARP table.

Dynamic Renew Mode Indicates whether the ARP component automatically attempts to renew dynamic ARP entries when they age out.

Total Entry Count Current / Peak Lists the total entries in the ARP table and the peak entry count in the ARP table.

Static Entry Count Current / Max Lists the static entry count in the ARP table and maximum static entry count in the ARP table.

IP Address The IP address of a device on a subnet attached to an existing routing interface.

MAC Address The hardware MAC address of that device.

Interface The routing slot/port associated with the device ARP entry.

Type The type of ARP entry. The possible values are Local, Gateway, Dynamic and Static.

Age The current age of the ARP entry since last refresh (in hh:mm:ss format).


5-15

5.5ARP DisplayCommands

Related Commands show arp switch on page 3-30arp cachesize <entries> on page 5-10arp dynamicrenew on page 5-10arp resptime <resp-timeout> on page 5-11arp retries <retries> on page 5-12arp timeout <seconds> on page 5-12

Summary Show abbreviated ARP cache information.



None

Description This command displays an abbreviated set of information pertaining to the ARP cache for the BAR.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output In response to this command, the system presents the following information:

show arp brief

(Pannaway BAR) #show arp brief

Age Time (seconds)............................. 1200Response Time (seconds)........................ 1Retries........................................ 4Cache Size..................................... 3304Dynamic Renew Mode ............................ DisableTotal Entry Count Current / Peak .............. 26 / 35Static Entry Count Current / Max .............. 0 / 64

Age Time (seconds) The time, in seconds, that an ARP table entry is retained before being deleted.

Response Time (seconds) The amount of time, in seconds, that the BAR waits for an ARP response before timing out the request.

Retries The maximum number of times an ARP request is retried.

Cache Size The maximum number of entries in the ARP table.

Dynamic Renew Mode Indicates whether the ARP component automatically attempts to renew dynamic ARP entries when they age out.

Total Entry Count Current / Peak Lists the total entries in the ARP table and the peak entry count in the ARP table.

Static Entry Count Current / Max Lists the static entry count in the ARP table and maximum static entry count in the ARP table.


5-16

5.6BootP/DHCP Relay Configuration Commands

Related Commands show arp switch on page 3-30arp cachesize <entries> on page 5-10arp dynamicrenew on page 5-10arp resptime <resp-timeout> on page 5-11arp retries <retries> on page 5-12arp timeout <seconds> on page 5-12show arp on page 5-13

5.6 BootP/DHCP Relay Configuration Commands

Summary Enable Circuit ID option for BootP/DHCP Relay.



None

Description This command enables the use of Circuit ID Option mode (cidoptmode) on the BAR. The circuit ID option mode provides for the limitation of addresses assigned by DHCP to a single client. Enabling this mode for DHCP relay allows servers supporting this functionality to pass circuit ID option information in DHCP packets.

“no” Form no bootpdhcprelay cidoptmodeThe “no” form of the command disables the circuit ID option mode for BootP and DHCP Relay.


Example

Related Commands show bootpdhcprelay on page 5-18

Summary Disable BootP/DHCP Relay forwarding.



None

Description This command disables BootP and DHCP Relay request forwarding on the BAR.

“no” Form no bootpdhcprelay disableThe “no” form of the command enables BootP and DHCP Relay request forwarding.


bootpdhcprelay cidoptmode

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#bootpdhcprelay cidoptmode

bootpdhcprelay disable


5-17

5.6BootP/DHCP

RelayConfiguration

Commands

Example


Summary Set maximum allowable relay hops for BootP/DHCP Relay requests.



<hops>The maximum number of relay agent hops. Values are from 1 to 16.

Description This command sets the maximum number of relay agent hops that BootP and DHCP Relay requests from the BAR’s locally connected networks may cross.

“no” Form no bootpdhcprelay maxhopcountResets the maximum number of relay agent hops to the default value (4).

Defaults Hops: 4

Example


Summary Set minimum wait time for BootP/DHCP Relay requests.



<min-wait>Number of seconds the BAR will wait for resolution of a BootP/DHCP Relay request. Values are from 0-100.

Description Entering this command sets the BAR’s BootP/DHCP Relay wait timer to the supplied value.

“no” Form no bootpdhcprelay minwaittimeThe “no” form of this command returns the BAR BootP/DHCP Relay wait time to the default.

Defaults min-wait: 0

Example


(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#bootpdhcprelay disable

bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount <hops>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount 8

bootpdhcprelay minwaittime <min-wait>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#bootpdhcprelay minwaittime 10


5-18

5.7BootP/DHCP Relay Display Commands

Summary Set server IP addresses for BootP/DHCP Relay.



<server number>A numerical value identifying the specific BootP/DHCP server entry being created. Acceptable values are from 1 to 8.

<ipaddress>IP address in 4 digit Dotted Decimal Notation format.

Description This command configures up to eight server IP addresses for BootP/DHCP Relay on the system.

“no” Form no bootpdhcprelay serverip <server number>The “no” form of the command sets the default server IP address for the specified BootP/DHCP Relay server to the default value (0.0.0.0).

Defaults Server Number: 1

IP address: 0.0.0.0

Example


5.7 BootP/DHCP Relay Display Commands

Summary Show BootP and DHCP Relay settings for the BAR.



None

Description When this command is entered, the BAR displays BootP and DHCP Relay configuration information.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

bootpdhcprelay serverip <server number> <ipaddress>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#bootpdhcprelay serverip 5 10.10.4.17

show bootpdhcprelay


5-19

5.7BootP/DHCPRelay Display

Commands

Example

Command Output The following information is displayed:

Related Commands bootpdhcprelay cidoptmode on page 5-16bootpdhcprelay disable on page 5-16bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount <hops> on page 5-17bootpdhcprelay minwaittime <min-wait> on page 5-17bootpdhcprelay serverip <server number> <ipaddress> on page 5-18

(Pannaway BAR) #show bootpdhcprelay

Maximum Hop Count.............................. 4Minimum Wait Time(Seconds)..................... 0Admin Mode..................................... DisableServer IP Address 1.............................. 10.10.2.33Server IP Address 2.............................. 10.10,3.15Server IP Address 3.............................. 192.168.12.33Server IP Address 4.............................. 192.168.5.33Server IP Address 5.............................. 10.10.4.17Server IP Address 6.............................. 0.0.0.0Server IP Address 7.............................. 0.0.0.0Server IP Address 8.............................. 0.0.0.0Circuit Id Option Mode......................... DisableRequests Received.............................. 0Requests Relayed............................... 0Packets Discarded.............................. 0

Maximum Hop Count The maximum allowable relay agent hops.

Minimum Wait Time (Seconds)

The minimum wait time.

Admin Mode Indicates whether relaying of requests is enabled or disabled.

Server IP Address (1 - 8) The IP Addresses of the BootP/DHCP Relay servers configured for the BAR.

Circuit Id Option Mode Indicates the DHCP Circuit ID setting (enabled or disabled).

Requests Received The number of requests received.

Requests Relayed The number of requests relayed.

Packets Discarded The number of packets discarded.


5-20

5.7BootP/DHCP Relay Display Commands

Chapter 6RIP Routing Commands

This chapter provides detailed information about Routing Information Protocol (RIP) routing configuration and monitoring for the Pannaway BAR.

The Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is an interior gateway protocol (IGP) that uses a distance-vector algorithm to determine the best route to a destination, using a hop count as the route metric or “cost” value.

6.1 Contents of this ChapterThis chapter provides detailed explanation of the RIP Routing commands that configure and monitor the operation of the BAR. The commands are divided into these different groups:

6.2 RIP Configuration CommandsThe RIP configuration commands presented in this section are divided into two groups: System-Level commands and Interface-Level commands.

System-Level RIP Commands

Use the following commands to configure RIP (Routing Information Protocol) on the BAR.

Summary Enable RIP auto-summarization.

Required Mode Router RIP Config


None

Description This command enables the RIP auto-summarization mode.

“no” Form no auto-summaryThe “no” form of this command disables the RIP auto-summarization mode.

Topic on page

RIP Configuration Commands 6-1

RIP Display Commands 6-9

auto-summary


6-2

6.2RIP Configuration Commands

Defaults Mode Enabled.

Example

Related Commands show ip rip on page 6-9

Summary Enable advertisement of default routes.



None

Description This command enables the BAR to advertise its own default routes to other RIP routers.

“no” Form no default-information originateThe “no” form of this command disables the advertisement of default routes.


Example


Summary Set default metric for RIP routes.



<metric>:A numerical value of the weight the RIP protocol assigns to RIP router interfaces on the BAR by default. Values from 1 to 15 are allowable.

Description This command is used to set a default metric value for distributed RIP routes.

“no” Form no default-metricThe “no” form of the command clears existing default RIP metrics for the BAR.

Defaults No value configured.

Example


(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#auto-summary

default-information originate

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#default-information originate

default-metric <metric>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#default-metric 12


6-3

6.2RIP


Summary Set route preference value in the BAR.



<distance>A numerical value of the route preference value of RIP in the BAR. Values may be from 1 to 255, with lower numbers indicating increased preferability.

Description This command sets the route preference value of RIP in the router. The RIP protocol will use the “distance” value as a means of determining preferences for certain routes. Lower route preference values are preferred when determining the best route.

“no” Form no distance ripThe “no” version of this command sets the default RIP route preference of 15.

Defaults Distance: 15

Example


Summary Create access list index for the specified source protocol.



<listnumber>A numerical value identifying the access list. Acceptable values are from 1 to 199.

{ospf | bgp | static | connected}This parameter indicates the protocol that the distribution IP access list index will filter for.

Description This command is used to specify a standard IP access list index number, ranging from 1-199, for which routes received from the specified source protocol will be filtered.

“no” Form no distribute-list <listnumber> out {ospf | bgp | static | connected}The “no” form of this command removes filtering of routes received from the selected protocol for the specified IP access list entry.

Defaults None

Example


distance rip <distance>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#distance rip 30

distribute-list <listnumber> out {ospf | bgp | static | connected}

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#distribute-list 2 out ospf


6-4


Summary Enable RIP operation mode.



None

Description Reset and enable the RIP administrative mode on the Pannaway BAR.

“no” Form no enableThe “no” form of this command sets the administrative mode of RIP in the router to disabled (inactive).


Example


Summary Enable host routes accept mode.



None

Description This command enables the RIP host routes accept mode.

“no” Form no hostroutesaccept

The “no” form of this command disables the RIP host routes accept mode.


Example


enable

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#enable

hostroutesaccept

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#hostroutesaccept


6-5

6.2RIP


Summary Configure RIP redistribution settings.



{bgp | static | connected}The selected value represents the source protocol that the BAR will redistribute.

metric <metricvalue>This optional parameter specifies a routing metric to use in place of the default metric for the BAR. The <metricvalue> value is a whole number from 0 to 15.

Description This command configures RIP routing to redistribute routes from the specified source protocol/routers. The route value can be OSPF, BGP, Static, or Connected.

“no” Form no redistribute {bgp | static | connected}The “no” version of this command prevents RIP routing from redistributing routes from the specified source/protocol routers.

Defaults Metric: unspecified

Example


Summary Set OSPF router redistribution handling for the BAR.



metric <metricvalue>This optional parameter specifies a routing metric to use in place of the default metric for the BAR. The <metricvalue> value is a whole number from 0 to 15.

[match [internal] [external 1] [external 2] [nssa-external 1] [nssa-external-2]]These optional parameters specify the OSPF match type(s) that will be redistributed.

Description This command configures RIP routing to redistribute OSPF routes.

“no” Form no redistribute ospf [match [internal] [external 1] [external 2] [nssa-external 1] [nssa-external 2]]The “no” version of this command prevents RIP routing from redistributing OSPF routes of the specified match type.


Match: internal

redistribute {bgp | static | connected} [metric <metricvalue>]

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#redistribute bgp metric 10

redistribute ospf [metric <metricvalue>] [match [internal] [external 1] [external 2] [nssa-external 1] [nssa-external-2]]


6-6


Example


Summary Set RIP split horizon mode on the BAR.



{none | simple | poison}The single argument for this command is the type of split horizon mode to be used on the BAR:

• none: enable RIP operation without split horizon mode.• simple: use simple split horizon operation to stop advertisement of learned

routes through the interface the route was learned from.• poison: use split horizon with poison reverse to advertise routes as invalid.

Description The use of an appropriate mode limits the propagation of already known routes. When a route is learned, a BAR using split horizon will not re-advertise the route through the interface it came in on. A BAR using the poison reverse mode will send updates with invalid metrics to “prune” any re-advertised routes from connected RIP routers.

“no” Form no split-horizonThe “no” form of this command sets the RIP split horizon mode to its default value of simple.

Defaults Mode: simple

Example


Interface-level RIP Commands

The commands in this section configure RIP operation on an individual interface level.

Summary Enable RIP operation on the current interface.



None

Description This command enables the operation of the RIP protocol on the currently selected BAR interface.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#redistribute ospf metric 1 match internal nssa-external 1 nssa-external 2

split-horizon {none | simple | poison}

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#split-horizon poison

ip rip


6-7

6.2RIP


“no” Form no ip ripThe “no” version of this command disables the RIP protocol on a router interface (the default state).

Defaults Mode disabled.

Example

Related Commands show ip rip interface <slot/port> on page 6-11

Summary Configure RIPv2 authentication mode for the interface.



noneIf this parameter is selected, no authentication will be used for RIP.

simple <key>If the “simple” parameter is selected the BAR will use simple (password) authentication for RIP operations. A <key> value must be supplied. The <key> is up to 8 alphanumeric, non-control characters.

encrypt <key> <keyid>If “encrypt” is selected as the authentication parameter, the BAR will use encrypted RIP authentication. A <key> value of up to 256 alphanumeric characters must be supplied, and an additional <keyid> value, from 0 - 255, must also be specified.

Description This command sets the RIP Version 2 Authentication Type and Key (if used) for the specified interface.

“no” Form no ip rip authenticationThe “no” form of this command sets the default RIP Authentication Type for the interface (no authentication, no password key, no key id).

Defaults Mode: no authentication

Example


(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip rip

ip rip authentication {none | {simple <key>} | {encrypt <key> <keyid>}}

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip rip authentication encrypt abcd1234 4


6-8


Summary Set RIP control packet receive permissions for the interface.



rip1Only receive RIP version 1 formatted control packets; discard RIP 2.

rip2Only receive RIP version 2 formatted control packets; discard RIP 1.

bothReceive both RIP version 1 and version 2 formatted control packets.

noneDiscard any RIP control packets.

Description This command configures the interface to allow RIP control packets of the specified version(s) to be received or discarded.

“no” Form no ip rip receive versionThe “no” version of this command configures the interface to the default RIP receive version of both.

Defaults Version: both

Example


i

Summary Set the RIP control packet format sent by the interface.



rip1Only broadcast RIP version 1 formatted control packets.

rip1cOnly broadcast RIP version 1c formatted control packets.

rip2Only broadcast RIP version 2 formatted control packets.

noneDo not broadcast RIP control packets.

Description This command configures the interface to allow RIP control packets of the specified version(s) to be broadcast transmitted, or deny broadcasting of the specified control packets.

ip rip receive version {rip1 | rip2 | both | none}

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip rip receive version both

ip rip send version {rip1 | rip1c | rip2 | none}


6-9

6.3RIP DisplayCommands

“no” Form no ip rip send versionThe “no” version of this command configures the interface to the default RIP send version of rip1c.

Defaults Version: rip1c

Example


6.3 RIP Display CommandsThe commands in this section provide access to RIP operational and configuration statistics.

Summary Show RIP settings for the BAR.



None

Description This command displays information relevant to the RIP operation of the Broadband Aggregation Router, including current RIP settings and modes.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip rip send version rip1c

show ip rip

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip rip

RIP Admin Mode................................. EnableSplit Horizon Mode............................. Poison ReverseAuto Summary Mode.............................. EnableHost Routes Accept Mode........................ EnableGlobal route changes........................... 0Global queries................................. 0

Default Metric................................. Not configuredDefault Route Advertise........................ 1

Redistributing.................................Source......................................... ospfMetric......................................... 12Match Value.................................... ’nssa-external 2’Distribute List................................ 2

Redistributing.................................Source......................................... bgpMetric......................................... 10Distribute List................................ Not configured


6-10

6.3RIP Display Commands

Command Output The following information is displayed on the show ip rip screen:

The following information is show for each redistributed protocol:

Related Commands default-information originate on page 6-2default-metric <metric> on page 6-2enable on page 6-4distribute-list <listnumber> out {ospf | bgp | static | connected} on page 6-3redistribute {bgp | static | connected} [metric <metricvalue>] on page 6-5redistribute ospf [metric <metricvalue>] [match [internal] [external 1] [external 2] [nssa-external 1] [nssa-external-2]] on page 6-5router-id <router_id> on page 7-16

Summary Show a summary of RIP settings for BAR interfaces.



None

Description This command displays a short table of basic RIP settings, modes, and conditions for the interfaces of the BAR.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

RIP Admin Mode The administrative mode of router RIP operation: enabled or disabled.

Split Horizon Mode The split horizon setting.

Auto Summary Mode The RIP auto summarization mode setting: enabled or disabled.

Host Routes Accept Mode The RIP host routes accept mode setting: enabled or disabled.

Global Route Changes The number of route changes made by RIP to the IP Route Database.

Global Queries The number of responses sent to RIP queries from other systems.

Default-metric The default metric value set for RIP operation. This is a configured value.

Default Route Advertise Indicates whether the default routes received from other source protocols are advertised or not.

Source Source protocol/routes that are being redistributed.

Metric Metric of the routes being redistributed.

Match-Value The criteria by which OSPF routes are redistributed into other routing domains (OSPF only).

Distribute-List Access list used to filter redistributed routes.

show ip rip interface brief


6-11

6.3RIP DisplayCommands

Example

Command Output The following information is displayed on the show ip rip interface brief screen:

Related Commands ip address <ipaddress> <subnetmask> on page 5-1ip rip on page 6-6ip rip receive version {rip1 | rip2 | both | none} on page 6-8ip rip send version {rip1 | rip1c | rip2 | none} on page 6-8

Summary Display the RIP configuration and mode settings for the specified interface.




Description This command displays RIP information related to the interface identified by <slot/port>.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip rip interface brief Send Receive RIP LinkSlot/Port IP Address Version Version Mode State--------- --------------- ----------- ----------- --------- ----------0/1 ----- ----- ----- Disable -----0/2 ----- ----- ----- Disable -----0/6 10.10.17.1 RIP-2 Both Enable Down0/9 ----- ----- ----- Disable -----

Slot/Port The unit slot/port identifying each interface.

IP Address The IP address assigned to the RIP interface.

Send Version The RIP version(s) used when sending updates on the interface. The types are none, RIP-1, RIP-1c, or RIP-2.

Receive Version The RIP version(s) allowed when receiving updates from the interface. The types are none, RIP-1, RIP-2, or Both.

RIP Mode The administrative mode of router RIP operation on the interface: enabled or disabled.

Link State The link state of the interface (link up or link down).

show ip rip interface <slot/port>


6-12

6.3RIP Display Commands

Example

Command Output The following fields are displayed on the show ip rip interface screen:

The following information will be invalid if the link state is “down”:

Related Commands ip address <ipaddress> <subnetmask> on page 5-1ip rip on page 6-6ip rip authentication {none | {simple <key>} | {encrypt <key> <keyid>}} on page 6-7ip rip receive version {rip1 | rip2 | both | none} on page 6-8ip rip send version {rip1 | rip1c | rip2 | none} on page 6-8routing on page 5-2

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip rip interface 0/1

Interface...................................... 0/1IP Address..................................... 10.10.23.1Send version................................... RIP-1cReceive version................................ BothRIP Admin Mode................................. EnableLink State..................................... DownAuthentication Type............................ NoneDefault Metric................................. -----Bad Packets Received........................... -----Bad Routes Received............................ -----Updates Sent................................... -----

Interface The unit slot/port identifying each interface.

IP Address The IP address assigned to the specified RIP interface.

Send version The RIP version(s) used when sending updates on the specified interface: none, RIP-1, RIP-1c, or RIP-2.

Receive version The RIP version(s) allowed when receiving updates from the specified interface: none, RIP-1, RIP-2, or both.

RIP Admin Mode The administrative mode of RIP operation on this interface: enabled or disabled.

Link State Indicates whether the link on this interface is up or down.

Authentication Type The RIP Authentication Type for the interface: none, simple, and encrypt.

Authentication Key The RIP Authentication Key for the interface is simple or encrypted authentication are set for the interface. The actual key will be **** to avoid compromising privacy.

Authentication Key ID The RIP Authentication Key ID for the specified interface.

Default Metric The metric used for default routes in RIP updates originated on the specified interface.

Bad Packets Received The number of RIP response packets received by the RIP process which were subsequently discarded for any reason.

Bad Routes Received The number of routes contained in valid RIP packets that were ignored for any reason.

Updates Sent The number of triggered RIP updates actually sent on this interface.

Chapter 7OSPF Routing Commands

This chapter provides detailed information about Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) routing commands in the Pannaway BAR.

7.1 Contents of this ChapterThis chapter provides a list of the CLI commands that configure and control OSPF routing operations on the BAR. This chapter also provides descriptions of the commands that supply information about OSPF settings and statistics. The following topics are presented in this chapter:

7.2 OSPF Configuration CommandsThe following commands control operation of the OSPF (Open Shortest Path First) routing protocol on the BAR.

System-Level OSPF Commands

These commands configure OSPF on the BAR at a system-wide level.

Summary Enable OSPF 1583 compatibility on the BAR.

Required Mode Router OSPF Config


None

Description This command enables the RFC 1583 compatibility mode of operation for the interfaces in the BAR.

Topic on page

OSPF Configuration Commands 7-1

OSPF Display Commands 7-22

1583compatibility

\

NOTE: 1583 compatibility mode is enabled by default. If all OSPF routers in the routing domain are capable of operating according to RFC 2328, OSPF 1583 compatibility mode should be disabled with the “no” form of the command.


7-2

7.2OSPF Configuration Commands

“no” Form no 1583compatibilityThe “no” form of this command disables OSPF 1583 compatibility.


Example

Related Commands show ip ospf on page 7-22

Summary Set authentication type for an OSPF area.



<areaid>The identification of the OSPF area to be configured. Values from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 are acceptable.

noneSets the BAR to use no authentication for OSPF area operation.

simpleConfigures the BAR to use simple authentication for OSPF.

encryptSets the BAR to use encrypted authentication methods for OSPF on this area.

Description This command specifies the authentication type to be used for the specified OSPF area.

“no” Form no area <areaid> authenticationThe “no” form of this command sets the authentication type to be used for the specified <areaid> back to the default of “none”.

Defaults Authentication type: none

Example

Related Commands show ip ospf area <areaid> on page 7-24

Summary Configure default cost for stub or not-so-stubby areas.




(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#no 1583compatibility

area <areaid> authentication {none | simple | encrypt}

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.7 authentication encrypt

area <areaid> default-cost <cost>


7-3

7.2OSPF


<cost>The OSPF cost of the stub area or not-so-stubby area. Acceptable values are from 1 - 16,777,215.

Description This command configures the monetary default cost for the stub area or nssa. The operator must specify the <areaid> and an integer value between 1-16,777,215 for default cost.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example


Summary Configures an OSPF area to function as an NSSA.




Description This command configures the specified <areaid> to function as an NSSA (“not so stubby area”).

“no” Form no area <areaid> nssaThis command removes a configured NSSA function from the specified <areaid>.

Defaults None

Example


Summary Configure metrics for the NSSA’s default route.




[<metric>]The optional <metric> parameter specifies the metric of the default route and must be in a range of 1-16,777,215.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.7 default-cost 5

area <areaid> nssa

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.7 nssa

area <areaid> nssa default-info-originate [<metric>] {comparable | non-comparable}


7-4


{comparable | non-comparable}Selects the metric type that will be advertised for the NSSA. The metric type can be “comparable” (nssa-external 1) or “non-comparable” (nssa-external 2).

Description This command configures the metric value and type for the default route advertised into the NSSA specified by <areaid>.

If no metric is specified, the default metric value is 1 and the metric type is comparable.

“no” Form no area <areaid> nssa default-info-originateThe “no” form of this command sets the specified area to the default values for the Metric and Metric-type parameters.

Defaults Metric: 1

Metric-type: comparable

Example


Summary Stop NSSA redistribution of learned routes.




Description This command configures the NSSA ABR (Area Border Router) so that learned external routes will not be redistributed to the NSSA specified by <areaid>.

“no” Form no area <areaid> nssa no-redistributeUse the “no” form of this command to redistribute learned external routes into the NSSA specified by <areaid>.

Defaults Mode enabled (no redistribution)

Example


Summary Stop advertisement of summary LSAs by NSSA.


(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.7 nssa default-info-originate 20 comparable

area <areaid> nssa no-redistribute

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.7 nssa no-redistribute

area <areaid> nssa no-summary


7-5

7.2OSPF




Description This command configures the NSSA so that summary LSAs are not advertised into the NSSA specified by <areaid>.

“no” Form no area <areaid> nssa no-summaryUse the “no” form of this command to advertise summary LSAs into the NSSA specified by <areaid>.

Defaults Mode enabled (no summary LSAs)

Example


Summary Set translator role of NSSA.

Required Mode Router OSPF Config.



{always | candidate}The translator role that the specified NSSA will take:

• Always: The router will assume the role of the translator the instant it becomes a border router. It will always translate Type-7 LSAs into Type-5 LSAs regardless of the translator state of other NSSA border routers.

• Candidate: The router will participate in the translator election process when it attains border router status.

Description This command configures the translator role of the NSSA specified by <areaid>. This specifies whether or not an NSSA border router will unconditionally translate Type-7 LSAs into Type-5 LSAs.

“no” Form no area <areaid> nssa translator-roleUse the “no” form of this command to set the NSSA translator role back to its default of candidate.

Defaults Translator-role: candidate

Example


(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.7 nssa no-summary

area <areaid> nssa translator-role {always | candidate}

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.7 nssa translator-role always


7-6


Summary Configure NSSA stability interval setting.




<stabilityinterval>The period of time that an elected translator continues to perform its duties after it determines that its translator status has been deposed by another NSSA border router translator.

Description This command configures the translator stability interval of the NSSA border router.

“no” Form None

Defaults Stabilityinterval: 40

Example


Summary Create an area range in the NSSA.




<ipaddr>The <ipaddr> is a valid IP address.

<subnetmask>The <subnetmask> is a valid subnet mask.

{summarylink | nssaexternallink}The Link State Database (LSDB) type for the area range.

[advertise | not-advertise]The optional advertising setting of the new area. Entering “advertise” allows advertisement.

Description This command creates a defined area range for the NSSA specified by <areaid>. The range performs the dual function of setting propagation policy via its Advertise/DoNotAdvertise parameter and aggregation via its network address and mask pair.

area <areaid> nssa translator-stab-intv <stabilityinterval>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.7 nssa translator-stab-intv 45

area <areaid> range <ipaddr> <subnetmask> {summarylink | nssaexternallink} [advertise | not-advertise]


7-7

7.2OSPF


“no” Form no area <areaid> range <ipaddr> <subnetmask>The “no” form of this command deletes an area range specified by <ipaddr> and <subnetmask>.

Defaults None

Example


Summary Create a stub area.



<areaid>The identification of the OSPF area that the stub will be created on. Values from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 are acceptable.

Description This command creates a stub area for the specified <areaid>. A stub area is characterized by the fact that AS External LSAs (Autonomous System External Link Service Announcements) are not propagated into the area. Removing AS External LSAs and Summary LSAs can significantly reduce the link state database of routers within the stub area.

“no” Form no area <areaid> stubThe “no” form of this command deletes a stub area for the specified <areaid>.

Defaults None

Example


Summary Set Summary LSA mode.




Description This command configures the Summary LSA mode for the stub area identified by <areaid> to enabled. The Summary LSA mode is configured as enabled.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.7 range 10.10.10.0 255.255.255.252 nssaexternallink advertise

area <areaid> stub

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.6 stub

area <areaid> stub summarylsa


7-8


“no” Form no area <areaid> stub summarylsaThe “no” form of this command disables the Summary LSA mode for the stub area identified by <areaid>. This is the default state.


Example


Summary Create an OSPF virtual interface.




<neighbor>The IP address of a neighbor interface for the new virtual link.

Description This command creates the OSPF virtual interface for the specified <areaid> and <neighbor>.

“no” Form no area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor>The “no” form of this command deletes the OSPF virtual interface from the specified <areaid> and <neighbor>.

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands show ip ospf virtual-link <areaid> <neighbor> on page 7-28show ip ospf virtual-link brief on page 7-30

Summary Set authentication mode for a virtual interface.




(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.6 stub summarylsa

area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor>

NOTE: Virtual links cannot be created across stub areas and NSSAs.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.9 virtual-link 10.10.12.1

area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> authentication {none | simple <key> | encrypt <key> <keyid>}


7-9

7.2OSPF


<neighbor>The IP address of the neighbor interface for the virtual link.

{none | simple | encrypt}The encryption mode that the interface will use.

<key>An authentication key that will be used for the interface. A key must be supplied if “simple” or “encrypt” are selected as authentication options. The key must consist of standard alphanumeric characters.

If “simple” authentication is used, the <key> must be 8 bytes or less in length. If “encrypt” authentication is used, the key may be up to 256 bytes.

<keyid>The identification number of the key to be used for encrypted authentication. The keyid is a number from 0 to 255.

Description This command configures the authentication type and key for the OSPF virtual interface identified by <areaid> and <neighbor>.

“no” Form no area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> authenticationThe “no” form of this command configures the default authentication type for the OSPF virtual interface identified by <areaid> and <neighbor>. The <neighbor> parameter is the IP address of the neighbor.

The default is no authentication, with no default password or default key.

Defaults Authentication: none

Example


Summary Set dead interval timer for the virtual interface.




<neighbor>The IP address of the neighbor interface that identifies the virtual link.

<d-interval>The dead interval value for the virtual interface, measured in seconds. The acceptable range for this value is from 1 to 65,535 seconds.

Description This command configures the dead interval for the OSPF virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by <areaid> and <neighbor>.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.9 virtual-link 10.10.12.1 authentication simple abcd1234

area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> dead-interval <d-interval>


7-10


“no” Form no area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> dead-intervalThe “no” form of this command restores the dead interval to its default of 40 seconds.

Defaults D-interval: 40

Example


Summary Set hello interval for the virtual link.





<h-interval>The hello interval value for the virtual interface, measured in seconds. The acceptable range for this value is from 1 to 65535 seconds.

Description This command configures the hello interval (in seconds) for the OSPF virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by <areaid> and <neighbor>.

“no” Form no area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> hello-intervalThe “no” form of this command restores the hello interval for the specified virtual interface to its default 10 seconds.

Defaults H-interval: 10

Example


Summary Set retransmit interval for an OSPF area.


(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.9 virtual-link 10.10.12.1 dead-interval 60

area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> hello-interval <h-interval>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.9 virtual-link 10.10.12.1 hello-interval 15

area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> retransmit-interval <r-interval>


7-11

7.2OSPF





<r-interval>The retransmit interval value for the virtual interface, measured in seconds. The acceptable range for this value is from 0 to 3600 seconds.

Description This command configures the retransmit interval for the OSPF virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by <areaid> and <neighbor>.

“no” Form no area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> retransmit-intervalThe “no” form of this command restores the retransmit interval for the specified virtual interface to its default 5 seconds.

Defaults R-interval: 5

Example


Summary Configure transmit delay for a virtual link.





<delay>The transmit delay setting for the virtual interface, measured in seconds. The acceptable range for this value is from 0 to 3600 seconds.

Description This command configures the transmit delay for the OSPF virtual interface on the virtual interface identified by <areaid> and <neighbor>.

“no” Form no area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> transmit-delayThe “no” form of this command restores the transmit delay for the specified virtual interface to its default of 1 second.

Defaults Delay: 1

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.9 virtual-link 10.10.12.1 retransmit-interval 8

area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> transmit-delay <delay>


7-12


Example


Summary Set route advertisement behavior.



[always]This optional parameter sets the BAR to always advertise default routes.

[metric <value>]This optional parameter specifies a metric value for default routes advertised by the BAR. The <value> may be from 0 to 16,777,215

[metric-type {1 | 2}]This optional parameter specifies the metric type that the BAR will advertise.

Description This command is used to control the advertisement of default routes.

“no” Form no default-information originateThe “no” form of this command restores the advertisement of default routes back to the default state of an unspecified metric and 2 as the default metric type.


Metric-type: 2

Example


Summary Set a default metric for OSPF interfaces.



<value>This parameter specifies the new default metric for distributed OSPF routes. The value may be from 1 to 16,777,215

Description This command is used to set a default metric value for distributed OSPF routes.

“no” Form no default-metricThe “no” form of this command restores the default-metric value for distributed OSPF routes back to the default of not configured.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#area 0.0.0.9 virtual-link 10.10.12.1 transmit-delay 2

default-information originate [always] [metric <value>] [metric-type {1 | 2}]

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#default-information originate always metric 15 metric-type 2

default-metric <value>


7-13

7.2OSPF


Defaults Not configured

Example


Summary Set the preference value for OSPF route types on the BAR.



{intra | inter | type1 | type2}Specifies the type of OSPF route that the new distance preference value will apply to.

<preference-value>The preference value assigned to the specified route type. The acceptable range of values for this parameter is 0 - 255. Lower values represent an increased preference for the route.

Description This command sets the preference value of OSPF in the router for each route type. Lower route preference values are preferred when determining the best route. The type of OSPF route can be intra, inter, type-1, or type-2.

The OSPF specification (RFC 2328) requires that preferences must be given to the routes learned via OSPF in the following order: intra < inter < type-1 < type-2.

“no” Form no distance ospf {intra | inter | type1 | type2}The “no” form of this command resets the route preference values of OSPF to the defaults.

Defaults Intra preference value: 8

Inter preference value: 10

Type-1 preference value: 13

Type-2 preference value: 150

Example

Summary Enable OSPF routing.



None

Description This command resets the default administrative mode of OSPF in the router to enabled (active).

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#default-metric 15

distance ospf {intra | inter | type1 | type2} <preference-value>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#distance ospf type2 175

enable


7-14


“no” Form no enableThe “no” form of this command sets the administrative mode of OSPF in the router to disabled (inactive).


Example


Summary Set exit overflow interval for the BAR.



<o-interval>This interval is the number of seconds after entering overflow state that a router will wait before attempting to leave the overflow state. Acceptable values are from 0 (never automatically leave overflow state) to 2,147,483,647 seconds.

Description This command configures the exit overflow interval for OSPF. This allows the router to again originate non-default AS-external-LSAs. When set to 0, the router will not leave overflow state until restarted.

“no” Form no exit-overflow-intervalThe “no” form of this command restores the exit overflow interval to its default of 0.

Defaults O-interval: 0 (never automatically leave overflow state)

Example


Summary Set LSDB overflow state limit.



<l-limit>The LSDB limit for OSPF operation on the BAR. The value for this parameter may be from -1 (indicating no limit) to 2,147,483,647.

Description This command configures the external LSDB limit for OSPF. When the number of non-default AS-external-LSAs in a router’s link-state database reaches the external LSDB limit, the router enters overflow state. The router never holds more than the external LSDB limit non-default AS-external-LSAs in its database. The external LSDB limit MUST be set identically in all routers attached to the OSPF backbone and/or any regular OSPF area.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#enable

exit-overflow-interval <o-interval>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#exit-overflow-interval 5000

external-lsdb-limit <l-limit>


7-15

7.2OSPF


“no” Form no external-lsdb-limitThe “no” form of this command restores the external LSDB limit to its default value of -1.

Defaults L-limit: -1

Example


Summary Specify a standard access list index number for incoming protocols.



<list-number>A numerical value identifying the access list. Acceptable values are from 1 to 199.

{rip | bgp | static | connected}This parameter indicates the protocol that the distribution IP access list index will filter for.

Description This command is used to specify a standard IP access list index number, ranging from 1-199, for which routes received from the specified source protocol will be filtered.

“no” Form no distribute-list <list-number> out {rip | bgp | static | connected}The “no” form of this command removes filtering of routes received from the selected protocol for the specified IP access list entry.

Defaults None

Example


Summary Set route redistribution behavior for OSPF.



{rip | bgp | static | connected}The selected parameter indicates the type of source protocol (RIP, BGP, static) or router (connected) that will be redistributed.

metric <metrictype>This optional parameter specifies a routing metric to use in place of the default metric for the BAR. The <metrictype> value is a whole number from 0 to 16,777,215.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#external-lsdb-limit 200000

distribute-list <list-number> out {rip | bgp | static | connected}

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#distribute-list 2 out rip

redistribute {rip | bgp | static | connected} [metric <metrictype>] [metric-type {1 | 2}] [tag <tagvalue>] [subnets]


7-16


metric-type {1 | 2}This optional parameter defines the type of metric that the <metrictype> parameter represents.

tag <tagvalue>This optional parameter specifies a tag value for the redistributed routes. The <tagvalue> value is a whole number from 0 to 4,294,967,295.

subnetsThis optional parameter, if specified, applies the redistribute command to subnets.

Description This command configures OSPF routing to redistribute routes from the specified source protocol/routers.

“no” Form no redistribute {rip | bgp | static | connected} [metric] [metric-type] [tag] [subnets]The “no” version of this command prevents OSPF routing from redistributing routes from the specified source/protocol routers.


Metric type: 2

tag: 0

Example


Summary Set the ID of the OSPF router.



<router_id>The number, in dotted decimal notation, of the router OSPF ID.

Description This command sets the unique identifier of the router OSPF ID.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example


Summary Set the trap flag mode.


(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#redistribute bgp metric 0 metric-type 2 tag 0 subnets

router-id <router_id>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#router-id 10.10.5.17

trapflags


7-17

7.2OSPF



None

Description This command enables OSPF traps.

“no” Form no trapflagsThe “no” form of this command disables OSPF traps.


Example

Related Commands snmptrap <name> <ipaddr> on page 13-8show snmptrap on page 13-13show trapflags on page 13-14show logging on page 15-8

Interface-Level OSPF Commands

The following commands configure OSPF on a specific BAR interface.

Summary Enable OSPF operation on the interface.



None

Description This command enables OSPF on a router interface.

“no” Form no ip ospfThe “no” form of this command disables OSPF on a router interface.


Example

Related Commands show ip ospf interface <slot/port> on page 7-31

Summary Assign interface to an OSPF area.



<areaid>The identification of the OSPF area that the interface connects to. Values from 0.0.0.0 to 255.255.255.255 are acceptable.

Description This command sets the OSPF area to which the specified router interface belongs.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-router)#trapflags

ip ospf

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#ip ospf

ip ospf areaid <areaid>


7-18


“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example


Summary Set OSPF authentication behavior.



{none | simple | encrypt}The encryption mode that the interface will use.

<key>An authentication key that will be used for the interface. A key must be supplied if “simple” or “encrypt” are selected as authentication options. The key must be made of standard alphanumeric characters.

If “simple” authentication is used, the <key> must be 8 bytes or less in length. If “encrypt” authentication is used, the key may be up to 256 bytes.

<keyid>The identification number of the key to be used for encrypted authentication. The keyid is a number from 0 to 255.

Description This command sets the OSPF Authentication Type and Key for the specified interface.

“no” Form no ip ospf authenticationThe “no” form of this command sets the default OSPF Authentication Type for the interface (no authentication, no password key, no key id).

Defaults Authentication type: none

Example

Related Commands area <areaid> authentication {none | simple | encrypt} on page 7-2show ip ospf interface <slot/port> on page 7-31

Summary Set the cost of the OSPF interface.


(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip ospf areaid 0.0.0.7

ip ospf authentication {none | {simple <key>} | {encrypt <key> <keyid>}}

NOTE: The authentication setting must match the authentication set for the OSPF area to which the port belongs.

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip ospf authentication encrypt abcd12345

ip ospf cost <cost>


7-19

7.2OSPF



<cost>The cost of the interface. Values from 1 to 65,535 are acceptable.

Description This command configures the cost of an OSPF interface.

“no” Form no ip ospf costThe “no” form of this command sets the OSPF cost to its default value of 10.

Defaults Cost: 10

Example

Related Commands show ip ospf interface <slot/port> on page 7-31

Summary Set hello interval time for the interface.



<h-interval>The hello interval for the interface. Values are measured in seconds, and may be from 1 to 65,535 seconds.

Description This command sets the OSPF hello interval for the specified interface, in seconds.

“no” Form no ip ospf hello intervalThe “no” form of this command sets the OSPF hello interval for this interface back to its default value of 10 seconds.

Defaults H-interval: 10 seconds

Example

Related Commands ip ospf dead-interval <d-interval> on page 7-19show ip ospf interface <slot/port> on page 7-31show ip ospf interface brief on page 7-33

Summary Set dead interval timer for the interface.


(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip ospf cost 20

ip ospf hello interval <h-interval>

NOTE: The hello interval used for the interface must be the same for all OSPF routers attached to the network.

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#ip ospf hello-interval 15

ip ospf dead-interval <d-interval>


7-20



<d-interval>The dead interval value for the interface. The acceptable range for this value is from 1 to 2,147,483,647 seconds. The recommended value for the dead interval is a multiple of the hello interval configured for the interface.

Description This command sets the OSPF dead interval for the specified interface, in <seconds>. The value is a valid positive integer, which represents the length of time in seconds that a router’s Hello packets have not been seen before its neighbor routers declare that the router is down. The value for the length of time must be the same for all routers attached to a common network.

“no” Form no ip ospf dead-intervalThe “no” form of this command restores the interface’s OSPF dead interval back to its default value of 40.

Defaults D-interval: 40 seconds (4 * default hello interval)

Example

Related Commands ip ospf hello interval <h-interval> on page 7-19show ip ospf interface <slot/port> on page 7-31show ip ospf interface brief on page 7-33

Summary Set the priority value of the interface.



<priority>The priority value assigned to the interface. Acceptable values are from 0 to 255. Lower values indicate a higher priority. A priority value of ‘0’ indicates that the router is not eligible to become the designated router on this network.

Description This command sets the OSPF priority for the specified router interface.

“no” Form no ip ospf priorityThe “no” form of this command restores this interface’s OSPF priority value to its default of 1 (the highest priority).

Defaults Priority: 1

Example

Related Commands show ip ospf interface <slot/port> on page 7-31show ip ospf interface brief on page 7-33

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip ospf dead-interval 60

ip ospf priority <priority>

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip ospf priority 2


7-21

7.2OSPF


Summary Set the interface’s retransmit interval.



<r-interval>This parameter specifies the retransmit interval for the interface. This value may be from 0 to 3,600 seconds.

Description This command sets the OSPF retransmit interval for the specified interface, in seconds. This is the number of seconds between link-state advertisement retransmissions for adjacencies belonging to this router interface. This value is also used when retransmitting database descriptions and link-state request packets.

“no” Form no ip ospf retransmit-intervalThe “no” form of this command resets the OSPF retransmit interval for the interface to its default value of 5.

Defaults R-interval: 5 seconds

Example


Summary Set the interface’s transmit delay value.



<delay>The retransmit delay value for the interface. Acceptable values are from 1 to 3600, measured in seconds.

Description This command sets the OSPF Transmit Delay for the specified interface. In addition, it sets the estimated number of seconds it takes to transmit a link state update packet over this interface.

“no” Form no ospf transmit-delayThe “no” form of this command rests the OSPF transmit delay for the interface to its default value of 1.

Defaults Delay: 1 second

Example


ip ospf retransmit-interval <r-interval>

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip ospf retransmit-interval 10

ip ospf transmit-delay <delay>

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/2)#ip ospf transmit-delay 10


7-22

7.3OSPF Display Commands

7.3 OSPF Display CommandsThe following commands provide statistics and configuration information for OSPF operation on the BAR.

Summary Show the OSPF routing settings of the BAR.



None

Description This command displays information relevant to the OSPF router.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The following information is show in response to the show ip ospf command:

show ip ospf

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ospfRouter ID...................................... 10.10.5.17OSPF Admin Mode................................ EnableASBR Mode...................................... EnableRFC 1583 Compatibility......................... EnableABR Status..................................... EnableExit Overflow Interval......................... 5000External LSA Count............................. 4294967295External LSA Checksum.......................... 4294949548New LSAs Originated............................ 132LSAs Received.................................. 0External LSDB Limit............................ No LimitDefault Metric................................. 15

Default Route Advertise........................ DisabledAlways......................................... FALSEMetric.........................................Metric Type.................................... External Type 2

Redistributing.................................Source......................................... bgpMetric......................................... 0Metric Type.................................... 2--More-- or (q)uitTag............................................ 0Subnets........................................ YesDistribute List................................ Not configured

Router ID The 32 bit integer in dotted decimal format identifying the router about which information is displayed.

OSPF Admin Mode The administrative mode of OSPF in the router.


7-23

7.3OSPF Display

Commands

The information below will only be displayed if OSPF is enabled.

Related Commands 1583compatibility on page 7-1default-information originate [always] [metric <value>] [metric-type {1 | 2}] on page 7-12default-metric <value> on page 7-12enable on page 7-13distribute-list <list-number> out {rip | bgp | static | connected} on page 7-15exit-overflow-interval <o-interval> on page 7-14external-lsdb-limit <l-limit> on page 7-14redistribute {rip | bgp | static | connected} [metric <metrictype>] [metric-type {1 | 2}] [tag <tagvalue>] [subnets] on page 7-15router-id <router_id> on page 7-16

ASBR Mode Indicates whether the ASBR mode is enabled or disabled. Enabled implies that the router is an autonomous system border router. A router automatically becomes an ASBR when it is configured to redistribute routes learned from other protocols. The possible values for the ASBR status is enabled (if the router is configured to re-distribute routes learnt by other protocols) or disabled (if the router is not configured for the same).

RFC 1583 Compatibility Indicates whether 1583 compatibility is enabled or disbled.

Default-Metric The router’s default metric value for redistributed routes.

Source Source protocol/routes that the router can redistribute.

Metric-value Metric of the routes being redistributed.

Match-value The criteria by which OSPF routes are redistributed into other routing domains.

Type-value External Type 1 or External Type 2 routes.

Tag-value Decimal value attached to each external route.

Subnets For redistributing routes into OSPF, the scope of redistribution for the specified protocol.

Distribute-list Access list used to filter redistributed routes.

Default Route Advertise Indicates whether the default routes received from other source protocols are advertised (Enabled) or not (Disabled).

ABR Status Indicates whether or not the router is an OSPF Area Border Router.

Exit Overflow Interval The number of seconds that, after entering OverflowState, a router will attempt to leave OverflowState.

External LSA count The number of external (LS type 5) link-state advertisements in the link-state database.

External LSA Checksum A number which represents the sum of the LS checksums of external link-state advertisements contained in the link-state database.

New LSAs Originated The number of new link-state advertisements that have been originated.

LSAs Received The number of link-state advertisements received determined to be new instantiations.

External LSDB Limit The maximum number of non-default AS-external-LSAs entries that can be stored in the link-state database.


7-24


Summary Show the configuration of an OSPF area.



<areaid>The identification of an existing OSPF area to be viewed.

Description This command displays information about the area.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The following information is shown on the show ip ospf area screen:

show ip ospf area <areaid>

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ospf area 0.0.0.7AreaID......................................... 0.0.0.7Aging Interval................................. 10External Routing............................... Import NSSAsAuthentication Type............................ EncryptSpf Runs....................................... 1Area Border Router Count....................... 0Area LSA Count................................. 1Area LSA Checksum.............................. 44597Stub Mode...................................... DisableImport Summary LSAs............................ Enable

OSPF NSSA Specific Information.

No-Summary Mode................................ EnableNo-Redistribute Mode........................... EnableDefault Information Originate.................. FALSEDefault Metric................................. 10Default Metric Type............................ Non-ComparableTranslator Role................................ CandidateTranslator Stability Interval.................. 40Translator State............................... Disabled

AreaID The area id of the requested OSPF area.

Aging Interval The aging interval for this area.

External Routing The external routing capabilities for this area.

Authentication Type The configured authentication type to use for this area.

Spf Runs The number of times that the intra-area route table has been calculated using this area’s link-state database.

Area Border Router Count The total number of area border routers reachable within this area.

Area LSA Count The total number of link-state advertisements in this area’s link-state database, excluding AS External LSA’s.


7-25

7.3OSPF Display

CommandsIf the value is configured as a stub area, the following stub area-specific information is displayed

If the area is configured as an NSSA, the following NSSA-specific information is displayed.

Related Commands area <areaid> authentication {none | simple | encrypt} on page 7-2area <areaid> default-cost <cost> on page 7-2area <areaid> nssa default-info-originate [<metric>] {comparable | non-comparable} on page 7-3area <areaid> nssa no-redistribute on page 7-4area <areaid> nssa no-summary on page 7-4area <areaid> nssa translator-role {always | candidate} on page 7-5area <areaid> nssa translator-stab-intv <stabilityinterval> on page 7-6area <areaid> stub on page 7-7area <areaid> stub summarylsa on page 7-7show ip ospf area <areaid> on page 7-24

Area LSA Checksum A number representing the Area LSA Checksum for the specified AreaID excluding the external (LS type 5) link-state advertisements.

Stub Mode Indicates whether the specified Area is a stub area or not. The possible values are enabled and disabled.

Import Summary LSAs Indicates whether the area Summary LSA mode for stub areas is enabled or disabled.

Type of Service The BAR only supports Normal type of service.

Metric Value The Metric Value for the specified area.

Metric Type The Default Metric Type for the specified Area.

No-Summary Mode Indicates whether the area Summary LSA mode for NSSAs is enabled or disabled.

No-Redistribute Mode Indicates the No Redistribute mode setting for the NSSA: enabled (external routes are not distributed) or disabled (external routes are distributed).

Default Information Originate Indicates whether the metric value and type for the default route advertised into the NSSA has been administratively configured (TRUE) or left at the default state (FALSE).

Default Metric Indicates the metric value for the default route advertised into the NSSA.

Default Metric Type Indicates the metric type (comparable or non-comparable) for the default route advertised into the NSSA.

Translator Role Indicates whether this NSSA’s border router unconditionally becomes the LSA translator (always), or participates in a translator election process (candidate).

Translator Stability Interval Displays the translator stability interval set for this NSSA’s border router.

Translator State Displays the current translator state: enabled or disabled.


7-26


Summary Show the contents of the OSPF database.



None

Description This command displays the link state database. This command will only display information if OSPF administrative mode is enabled on the BAR.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The following information is shown in response to the command:

show ip ospf database

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ospf database

Router ID...................................... 10.10.5.17Area ID........................................ 0.0.0.0LSA Type....................................... networkLS ID.......................................... 10.10.8.0Age............................................ 85Sequence....................................... 80000018Checksum....................................... 48959Options........................................ Q-MCOV

Router ID...................................... 10.10.5.17Area ID........................................ 0.0.0.6LSA Type....................................... router linksLS ID.......................................... 10.10.5.17Age............................................ 1095Sequence....................................... 8000000fChecksum....................................... 46365Options........................................ QEMCOV

--More-- or (q)uit

Router ID...................................... 10.10.5.17Area ID........................................ 0.0.0.6LSA Type....................................... network summaryLS ID.......................................... 0.0.0.0Age............................................ 1733Sequence....................................... 8000000cChecksum....................................... 54597Options........................................ QEMCOV

Router ID The 32 bit dotted decimal number representing the LSDB interface.

Area ID The OSPF area ID for the BAR.

LSA Type The types are: router, network, ipnet sum, asbr sum, as external, group member, tmp 1, tmp 2, opaque link, opaque area.

LS ID An identification number that uniquely identifies an LSA that a router originates from all other self originated LSA’s of the same LS type.


7-27

7.3OSPF Display

CommandsRelated Commands router-id <router_id> on page 7-16

area <areaid> nssa on page 7-3area <areaid> stub on page 7-7ip ospf areaid <areaid> on page 7-17

Summary Show the ranges configured for the specified Area ID.



<areaid>The identification of the OSPF area to be examined.

Description This command displays information about the area ranges for the specified <areaid>.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The following information is presented in response to the show ip ospf range command:

Related Commands area <areaid> range <ipaddr> <subnetmask> {summarylink | nssaexternallink} [advertise | not-advertise] on page 7-6

Age The age of the link state advertisement in seconds.

Sequence A number that indicates the sequential order of the LSA.

Checksum The total number LSA checksum.

Options An indicator of any special handling LSA receives during routing calculations.

show ip ospf range <areaid>

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ospf range 0.0.0.7

Area ID IP Address Subnet Mask Lsdb Type Advertisement--------------- --------------- --------------- --------------- -------------0.0.0.7 10.10.10.0 255.255.255.252 External Link Enabled

Area ID The area id of the requested OSPF area.

IP Address An IP Address which represents this area range.

Subnet Mask A valid subnet mask for this area range.

Lsdb Type The type of link advertisement associated with this area range.

Advertisement Indicates whether the advertisement status is enabled or disabled.


7-28


Summary Display the contents of the BAR’s OSPF stub table.



None

Description This command displays the OSPF stub table. The information below will only be displayed if OSPF is initialized on the switch.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The following information is shown in the OSPF stub table:

Related Commands area <areaid> stub on page 7-7area <areaid> stub summarylsa on page 7-7

Summary Display virtual interface information for a BAR area.

Required Mode Privileged Exec and User Exec.


<areaid>The identification of the OSPF area that the virtual link resides in.

<neighbor>The IP address of the neighbor interface that (in combination with the areaID) defines the virtual link.

Description This command displays the OSPF Virtual Interface information for a specific area and neighbor.

show ip ospf stub table

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ospf stub table

AreaId TypeofService Metric Val Metric Type Import SummaryLSA---------------- ------------- ---------- ------------------- -----------------0.0.0.6 Normal 15 Non-Comparable Disable

Area ID A 32-bit identifier for the created stub area.

Type of Service The type of service (TOS) associated with the stub metric. The BAR only supports Normal TOS.

Metric Val The metric value is applied based on the TOS. It defaults to the least metric of the type of service among the interfaces to other areas. The OSPF cost for a route is a function of the metric value.

Metric Type The type of metric advertised as the default route.

Import Summary LSA Indicates whether summary LSAs are imported into stub areas.

show ip ospf virtual-link <areaid> <neighbor>


7-29

7.3OSPF Display

Commands

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The virtual interface information consists of the following fields:

Related Commands area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> on page 7-8area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> authentication {none | simple <key> | encrypt <key> <keyid>} on page 7-8area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> dead-interval <d-interval> on page 7-9area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> hello-interval <h-interval> on page 7-10area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> retransmit-interval <r-interval> on page 7-10area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> transmit-delay <delay> on page 7-11

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ospf virtual-link 0.0.0.9 10.10.12.1

Area ID........................................ 0.0.0.9Neighbor IP Address............................ 10.10.12.1Hello Interval................................. 10Dead Interval.................................. 60Iftransit Delay Interval....................... 1Retransmit Interval............................ 5State.......................................... downNeighbor State................................. downAuthentication Type............................ SimpleAuthentication Key............................. ********

Area ID The area ID of the requested OSPF area.

Neighbor IP Address The neighbor IP Address that is entered.

Hello Interval The configured hello interval for the OSPF virtual interface.

Dead Interval The configured dead interval for the OSPF virtual interface.

Iftransit Delay Interval The configured transit delay for the OSPF virtual interface.

Retransmit Interval The configured retransmit interval for the OSPF virtual interface.

State The current state of the OSPF interface: down, loopback, waiting, point-to-point, designated router, and backup designated router.

Neighbor State Displays the neighbor state.

Authentication Type The configured authentication type of the OSPF virtual interface.

Authentication Key The key used by the authentication method (masked).


7-30


“

Summary Show a summary of virtual link information.



None

Description This command displays the OSPF Virtual Interface information for all areas in the system.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The following information is shown in the table:

Related Commands area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> on page 7-8area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> dead-interval <d-interval> on page 7-9area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> hello-interval <h-interval> on page 7-10area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> retransmit-interval <r-interval> on page 7-10area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> transmit-delay <delay> on page 7-11

show ip ospf virtual-link brief

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ospf virtual-link brief Hello Dead Retransmit Transit Area ID Neighbor Interval Interval Interval Delay--------------- --------------- ---------- ---------- ---------- --------0.0.0.9 10.10.12.1 15 60 8 2

Area ID The area ID of the requested OSPF area.

Neighbor The neighbor interface of the OSPF virtual interface.

Hello Interval The configured hello interval for the OSPF virtual interface.

Dead Interval The configured dead interval for the OSPF virtual interface.

Retransmit Interval The configured retransmit interval for the OSPF virtual interface.

Transit Delay The configured transit delay for the OSPF virtual interface.


7-31

7.3OSPF Display

Commands

Interface-Level Monitoring Commands

The following commands display interface-specific OSPF configuration information.

Summary Display the OSPF configuration of an interface.



<slot/port>The combination of slot number and port number that identifies a unique interface on the BAR.

Description This command displays the information for the interface object or virtual interface tables.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The following information is shown in the ip ospf interface table:

show ip ospf interface <slot/port>

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ospf interface 0/2

IP Address..................................... 10.10.10.1Subnet Mask.................................... 255.255.255.252OSPF Admin Mode................................ EnableOSPF Area ID................................... 0.0.0.7Router Priority................................ 2Retransmit Interval............................ 5Hello Interval................................. 10Dead Interval.................................. 60LSA Ack Interval............................... 1Iftransit Delay Interval....................... 5Authentication Type............................ MD5Authentication Key............................. ********Authentication Key ID.......................... 5Metric Cost.................................... 20OSPF Interface Type............................ broadcastState.......................................... designated-routerDesignated Router.............................. 10.10.5.17Backup Designated Router....................... 0.0.0.0Number of Link Events.......................... 2504

IP Address The IP address for the specified interface.

Subnet Mask A mask of the network and host portion of the IP address for the OSPF interface.

OSPF Admin Mode Indicates whether OSPF is enabled or disabled on a router interface.

OSPF Area ID Indicates the OSPF Area ID for the specified interface.

Router Priority The OSPF Priority setting for the specified interface.

Retransmit Interval The OSPF Retransmit Interval for the specified interface.


7-32


The information below will only be displayed if OSPF is enabled.

Related Commands ip address <ipaddress> <subnetmask> on page 5-1ip ospf on page 7-17ip ospf areaid <areaid> on page 7-17ip ospf authentication {none | {simple <key>} | {encrypt <key> <keyid>}} on page 7-18ip ospf cost <cost> on page 7-18ip ospf dead-interval <d-interval> on page 7-19ip ospf hello interval <h-interval> on page 7-19ip ospf priority <priority> on page 7-20ip ospf retransmit-interval <r-interval> on page 7-21ip ospf transmit-delay <delay> on page 7-21

Hello Interval The OSPF Hello Interval for the specified interface.

Dead Interval The OSPF Dead Interval for the specified interface.

LSA Ack Interval The OSPF LSA Acknowledgement Interval for the specified interface.

IfTransit Delay Interval The OSPF Transit Delay for the specified interface.

Authentication Type The OSPF Authentication Type for the specified interface: none, simple, or encrypt.

Authentication Key The key used by the authentication method.

Authentication Key ID The number of the key type being used in multi-key configurations.

Metric Cost The cost of the OSPF interface.

OSPF Interface Type Broadcast LANs, such as Ethernet and IEEE 802.5, take the value ’broadcast’. The OSPF Interface Type will be ’broadcast’.

State The current state of the OSPF interface: down, loopback, waiting, point-to-point, designated router, and backup designated router.

Designated Router The router ID representing the designated router.

Backup Designated Router The router ID representing the backup designated router.

Number of Link Events The number of link events.


7-33

7.3OSPF Display

Commands

Summary Display a summary of OSPF settings for interfaces in the BAR.



None

Description This command displays brief information for the interface object or virtual interface tables.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The show ip ospf interface brief command presents the following information:

Related Commands ip ospf on page 7-17ip ospf areaid <areaid> on page 7-17ip ospf authentication {none | {simple <key>} | {encrypt <key> <keyid>}} on page 7-18ip ospf cost <cost> on page 7-18ip ospf dead-interval <d-interval> on page 7-19ip ospf hello interval <h-interval> on page 7-19ip ospf priority <priority> on page 7-20ip ospf retransmit-interval <r-interval> on page 7-21ip ospf transmit-delay <delay> on page 7-21

show ip ospf interface brief

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ospf interface brief

Router Hello Dead Retrax Retrax LSAAckSlot/Port AdminMode Area ID Priority Intval Intval Intval Delay Intval--------- --------- ----------- -------- ------ ------ ------ ------ ------0/1 Enable 0.0.0.6 1 10 40 5 1 10/2 Enable 0.0.0.7 2 10 60 5 5 10/6 Disable 0.0.0.0 1 10 40 5 1 -----0/9 Enable 0.0.0.9 1 10 40 5 1 1

Slot/Port The combination of a slot number and port number in the BAR that identifies an OSPF interface.

Admin Mode Indicates whether OSPF is enabled or disabled on a router interface.

Area ID Indicates the OSPF Area Id for the specified interface.

Router Priority The OSPF Priority setting for the specified interface.

Hello Intval The OSPF Hello Interval for the specified interface.

Dead Intval The OSPF Dead Interval for the specified interface.

Retrax Intval The OSPF Retransmit Interval for the specified interface.

Retrax Delay The OSPF Transit Delay for the specified interface.

LSA Ack Intval The OSPF LSA Acknowledgement Interval for the specified interface.


7-34


Summary Display OSPF statistics for a specified interface.




Description This command displays the statistics for a specific interface. The information below will only be displayed if OSPF is enabled.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands The show ip ospf interface stats screen displays the following statistics:

show ip ospf interface stats <slot/port>

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ospf interface stats 0/2

OSPF Area ID................................... 0.0.0.7Spf Runs....................................... 31Area Border Router Count....................... 0AS Border Router Count......................... 0Area LSA Count................................. 2IP Address..................................... 10.10.10.1OSPF Interface Events.......................... 2572Virtual Events................................. 0Neighbor Events................................ 0External LSA Count............................. 4294967295LSAs Received.................................. 0Originate New LSAs............................. 170

OSPF Area ID The area ID of this OSPF interface.

Spf Runs The number of times that the intra-area route table has been calculated using this area’s link-state database.

Area Border Router Count The total number of area border routers reachable within this area. This is initially zero, and is calculated in each SPF pass.

AS Border Router Count The total number of Autonomous System border routers reachable within this area.

Area LSA Count The total number of link-state advertisements in this area’s link-state database, excluding AS External LSAs.

IP Address The IP address associated with this OSPF interface.

OSPF Interface Events The number of times the specified OSPF interface has changed its state, or an error has occurred.

Virtual Events The number of state changes or errors that occurred on this virtual link.

Neighbor Events The number of times this neighbor relationship has changed state, or an error has occurred.


7-35

7.3OSPF Display

Commands

Related Commands ip address <ipaddress> <subnetmask> on page 5-1ip ospf areaid <areaid> on page 7-17

t

Summary Show the neighbor table for a specified BAR interface.



[<ipaddr>]An optional parameter that identifies a particular neighbor to the interface. If this parameter is supplied, information presented will be specific to the neighbor.


Description This command displays the OSPF neighbor table list for a given interface. The information below will only be displayed if OSPF is enabled and the interface has a neighbor.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands The following information is presented in response to the command:

External LSA Count The number of external (LS type 5) link-state advertisements in the link-state database.

LSAs Received The number of LSAs received by this interface.

Originate New LSAs The number of LSAs originated by this interface.

show ip ospf neighbor [<ipaddr>] <slot/port>

(Pannaway-BAR) #show ip ospf neighbor 66.15.30.1 0/5

Interface...................................... 0/5Router ID...................................... 10.10.10.10Options........................................ 2Router Priority................................ 1State.......................................... FullEvents......................................... 5Permanence..................................... DynamicHellos Suppressed.............................. NoRetransmission Queue Length.................... 0

Interface The slot/port identifying the internal interface number of the OSPF neighbor.

Router ID The 4-digit dotted-decimal number identifying the neighbor router.


7-36


Related Commands ip ospf priority <priority> on page 7-20

Options An integer value that indicates the optional OSPF capabilities supported by the neighbor. The neighbor’s optional OSPF capabilities are also listed in its Hello packets. This enables received Hello Packets to be rejected (i.e., neighbor relationships will not even start to form) if there is a mismatch in certain crucial OSPF capabilities.

Router Priority Displays the OSPF priority for the specified interface. The priority of an interface is a priority integer from 0 to 255. A value of ’0’ indicates that the router is not eligible to become the designated router on this network.

State The state of communications between the specified interface and the neighbor. Possible returned values are: • Down: Initial state of the neighbor conversation; no recent

information has been received from the neighbor. • Attempt: No recent information has been received from the

neighbor but a more concerted effort should be made to contact the neighbor.

• Init: A Hello packet has recently been seen from the neighbor, but bi-directional communication has not yet been established.

• 2 way: Communication between the two routers is bi-directional.

• Exchange start: The router is negotiating a master relationship with the neighbor routers and deciding on an initial DD sequence number.

• Exchange: The router is describing its entire link state database by sending Database Description packets to the neighbor.

• Loading: Link State Request packets are sent to the neighbor asking for the more recent LSAs that have been discovered (but not yet received) in the Exchange state.

• Full: The neighboring routers are fully adjacent and they will now appear in router-LSAs and network-LSAs.

Events The number of times this neighbor relationship has changed state, or an error has occurred.

Permanence This variable displays the status of the entry, either dynamic or permanent. This refers to how the neighbor became known.

Hellos Suppressed This indicates whether Hellos are being suppressed to the neighbor. The types are enabled and disabled.

Retransmission Queue Length An integer representing the current length of the retransmission queue of the specified neighbor router ID of the specified interface.


7-37

7.3OSPF Display

Commands

t

Summary Show a summary of OSPF neighbor information.




Description This command displays abbreviated OSPF neighbor table information for the interface identified by <slot/port>, or for all interfaces. The information below will only be displayed if OSPF is enabled and the interface has a neighbor.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example


show ip ospf neighbor brief {<slot/port> | all}

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ospf neighbor brief all

Router ID IP Address Neighbor Interface Index---------------- ---------------- -----------------------------10.10.10.10 66.15.30.1 0/5

Router ID The 4-digit dotted-decimal number identifying the neighbor router.

IP Address An IP address representing the neighbor interface.

Neighbor Interface Index The slot/port identifying the internal interface number of the OSPF neighbor.


7-38


Chapter 8VRRP Routing Commands

This chapter provides detailed information about Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) configuration on the BAR.

8.1 Contents of this ChapterThis chapter contains the following groups of CLI commands:

8.2 VRRP Configuration CommandsUse the following commands to configure the Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) on the BAR.

Summary Enable VRRP routing.



None

Description This command enables the administrative mode of VRRP in the router.

“no” Form no ip vrrpThe “no” version of this command disables the administrative mode of VRRP.


Example

Related Commands show ip vrrp on page 8-5

Topic on page

VRRP Configuration Commands 8-1

VRRP Display Commands 8-5

ip vrrp

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#ip vrrp


8-2

8.2VRRP Configuration Commands

Summary Create Virtual Router ID on the interface.



<vrID>This parameter is the virtual router identification (vrID) that will be created on the current interface. This value is a number from 1 to 255.

Description This command sets the virtual router ID on an interface for virtual router configuration in the router.

“no” Form no ip vrrp <vrID>The “no” form of this command deletes all VRRP configuration details of the virtual router configured on a specific interface.

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands show ip vrrp interface <slot/port> <vrID> on page 8-6show ip vrrp interface brief on page 8-7

Summary Set an IP address for a virtual router.



<vrID>This parameter is the virtual router identification (vrID) of the virtual router on the interface that the address will be assigned to. This value is a number from 1 to 255.

<ipaddr>This parameter is the IP address (in dotted decimal notation) to assign to the virtual router.

Description This command sets the IP address value for a virtual router, identified by its <vrID>, that is configured on a given interface.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands ip vrrp on page 8-1show ip vrrp interface <slot/port> <vrID> on page 8-6show ip vrrp interface brief on page 8-7

ip vrrp <vrID>

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#ip vrrp 12

ip vrrp <vrID> ip <ipaddr>

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#ip vrrp 12 ip 10.10.28.1


8-3

8.2VRRP


Summary Set authentication for a virtual router.



<vrID>This parameter is the virtual router identification (vrID) of a virtual router on the interface that authentication will be set for. This value is a number from 1 to 255.

{none | simple <key>}The parameter {none | simple} selects the authentication type for the virtual router. The <key> parameter is required when the authentication type is simple. The <key> parameter is a password that will be used for VRRP authentication on the virtual router.

Description This command sets the authentication details value for a specified virtual router configured on a given interface.

“no” Form no ip vrrp <vrID> authenticationThe “no” version of this command sets authorization to none for the virtual router. This is the default state.

Defaults No authentication

Example

Related Commands show ip vrrp interface <slot/port> <vrID> on page 8-6

Summary Enable preemption mode for a virtual router.



<vrID>This parameter is the virtual router identification (vrID) of the virtual router that preemption will be enabled for. This value is a number from 1 to 255.

Description This command enables the preemption mode value for a virtual router, identified by its <vrID>, that is configured on a given interface.

“no” Form no ip vrrp <vrID> preemptThe “no” version of this command disables preemption mode for the virtual router.


Example


ip vrrp <vrID> authentication {none | simple <key>}

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#ip vrrp 12 authentication simple a_passwd

ip vrrp <vrID> preempt

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#ip vrrp 12 preempt


8-4

8.2VRRP Configuration Commands

Summary Set interface’s virtual router priority value.



<vrID>This parameter is the virtual router identification (vrID) of a virtual router on the interface that the router priority value will be set for. This value is a number from 1 to 255.

<priority-value>This parameter is the priority value assigned to the virtual router. This value is a number from 1 to 254.

Description This command sets the priority value for the virtual router, identified by its <vrID>, that is configured on a given interface.

“no” Form no ip vrrp <vrID> priority <priority-value>The “no” version of this command sets the priority value to its default value of 100.

Defaults Priority: 100

Example


Summary Set advertised value for virtual router timers.



<vrID>This parameter is the virtual router identification (vrID) of a virtual router on the interface that the advertised value will be set for. This value is a number from 1 to 255.

<adv-interval>This parameter is the advertisement value for the virtual router. This value is a number of seconds from 1 to 255.

Description This command sets the advertisement value for a virtual router, identified by its <vrID>, that is configured on a given interface.

“no” Form no ip vrrp <vrID> timers advertiseThe “no” version of this command sets the advertisement value for the virtual router.

Defaults Advertise: 1

ip vrrp <vrID> priority <priority-value>

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#ip vrrp 12 priority 15

ip vrrp <vrID> timers advertise <adv-interval>


8-5

8.3VRRP Display

Commands

Example


Summary Activate a virtual router on the current interface.



<vrID>This parameter is the virtual router identification (vrID) of the virtual router that will be enabled on the interface. This value is a number from 1 to 255.

Description This command enables a virtual router, identified by its <vrID>, that is configured on a given interface. This starts the virtual router.

“no” Form no ip vrrp <vrID> modeThe “no” form of this command disables the virtual router identified by <vrID>.


Example

Related Commands show ip vrrp interface <slot/port> <vrID> on page 8-6show ip vrrp interface brief on page 8-7

8.3 VRRP Display CommandsThe commands in this section display configuration settings and operational statistics for VRRP.

Summary Show current VRRP settings.



None

Description This command displays whether VRRP functionality is enabled or disabled on the BAR. It also displays some global parameters which are required for monitoring. This command takes no options.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#ip vrrp 12 timers advertise 1

ip vrrp <vrID> mode

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#ip vrrp 12 mode

show ip vrrp


8-6

8.3VRRP Display Commands

Example

Command Output The show ip vrrp command displays the following information:

Related Commands ip vrrp on page 8-1

Summary Show VRRP interface configuration.




<vrID>This parameter is the virtual router identification (vrID) of the virtual router to be examined. This value is a number from 1 to 255.

Description This command displays all configuration information and VRRP router statistics of a virtual router configured on a specific interface.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip vrrpAdmin Mode..................................... EnableRouter Checksum Errors......................... 0Router Version Errors.......................... 0Router VRID Errors............................. 0

Admin Mode Displays the admin mode for VRRP functionality on the switch.

Router Checksum Errors The total number of VRRP packets received with an invalid VRRP checksum value.

Router Version Errors The total number of VRRP packets received with Unknown or unsupported version number.

Router VRID Errors The total number of VRRP packets received with invalid VRID for this virtual router.

show ip vrrp interface <slot/port> <vrID>

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip vrrp interface 0/1 12IP Address..................................... 10.10.28.1VMAC Address................................... 00:00:5e:00:01:0cAuthentication Type............................ SimplePriority....................................... 15Advertisement Interval (secs).................. 1Pre-empt Mode.................................. EnableAdministrative Mode............................ EnableState.......................................... Initialized


8-7

8.3VRRP Display

Commands

Command Output The show ip vrrp interface command provides the following information:

Related Commands ip vrrp <vrID> ip <ipaddr> on page 8-2ip vrrp <vrID> authentication {none | simple <key>} on page 8-3ip vrrp <vrID> preempt on page 8-3ip vrrp <vrID> priority <priority-value> on page 8-4ip vrrp <vrID> timers advertise <adv-interval> on page 8-4ip vrrp <vrID> mode on page 8-5

Summary Show summarized VRRP interface information.



None

Description This command displays information about each virtual router configured on the BAR. This command takes no options. It displays information about each virtual router.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The following statistics are shown on the show ip vrrp interface brief screen:

IP Address The configured IP Address for the virtual router.

VMAC address The VMAC address of the specified router.

Authentication Type The authentication type for the specific virtual router.

Priority The priority value for the specific virtual router.

Advertisement interval The advertisement interval for the specific virtual router.

Pre-Empt Mode The preemption mode configured on the specified virtual router.

Administrative Mode The status (Enable or Disable) of the specific router.

State The state of the virtual router.

show ip vrrp interface brief

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip vrrp interface brief

Slot/Port VRID IP Address Mode State--------- ---- -------------- ------ ------------ 0/1 12 10.10.28.1 Enable Initialize

Slot/Port The slot/port combination of the virtual router.

VRID The router ID of the virtual router.

IP Address The IP Address that was configured on the virtual router.

Mode Indicates whether the virtual router is enabled or disabled.

State Indicates the state of the virtual router.


8-8


Related Commands ip vrrp <vrID> on page 8-2ip vrrp <vrID> ip <ipaddr> on page 8-2ip vrrp <vrID> mode on page 8-5

Summary Display VRRP configuration and stats for a virtual router.




<vrID>This parameter is the virtual router identification (vrID) of the virtual router to be examined. This value is a number from 1 to 255.

Description This command displays the statistical information about each virtual router configured on the BAR.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The following items are shown on the show ip vrrp interface stats screen:

show ip vrrp interface stats <slot/port> <vrID>

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip vrrp interface stats 0/1 12UpTime......................................... 0 days 0 hrs 0 mins 0 secsProtocol....................................... IPState Transitioned to Master................... 0Advertisement Received......................... 0Advertisement Interval Errors.................. 0Authentication Failure......................... 0IP TTL Errors.................................. 0Zero Priority Packets Received................. 0Zero Priority Packets Sent..................... 0Invalid Type Packets Received.................. 0Address List Errors ........................... 0Invalid Authentication Type.................... 0Authentication Type Mismatch................... 0Packet Length Errors........................... 0

Uptime The amount of time the IP VRRP interface has been operating since the last reset.

Protocol The protocol set for the VRRP interface’s operation.

State Transitioned to Master The total number of times the virtual router state has changed to MASTER.

Advertisement Received The total number of VRRP advertisements received by this virtual router.

Advertisement Interval Errors The total number of VRRP advertisements received for which the advertisement interval is different than the configured value for this virtual router.


8-9

8.3VRRP Display

Commands

Authentication Failure The total number of VRRP packets received that did not pass the authentication check.

IP TTL errors The total number of VRRP packets received by the virtual router with the IP TTL (time to live) not equal to 255.

Zero Priority Packets Received The total number of VRRP packets received by the virtual router with a priority of ’0’.

Zero Priority Packets Sent The total number of VRRP packets sent by the virtual router with a priority of ’0’.

Invalid Type Packets Received The total number of VRRP packets received by the virtual router with an invalid “type” field.

Address List Errors The total number of VRRP packets received for which the address list does not match the locally configured list for the virtual router.

Invalid Authentication Type The total number of VRRP packets received with an unknown authentication type.

Authentication Type Mismatch The total number of VRRP advertisements received for which the ‘auth type’ is not equal to the one locally configured for this virtual router.

Packet Length Errors The total number of VRRP packets received with a packet length less than the length of the VRRP header.


8-10


Chapter 9Multicast Commands

This chapter provides descriptions of the commands that configure multicast routing on the BAR and retrieve configuration information and statistics related to multicast operation.

9.1 Contents of this ChapterThis chapter describes the commands that configure and manage multicast routing on the Pannaway BAR. The following sections are presented in this chapter:

9.2 Multicast Configuration CommandsThe configuration of multicast associations on the BAR requires the use of a number of management commands. The commands in this section of the Administration Guide provide control over the settings and operational parameters of the BAR as they apply to multicast routing.

System-Level Commands

The commands in this section provide configuration and control over the operation of multicast routing for all interfaces of the BAR. These commands offer system-wide configuration of multicast settings.

Summary Activate IGMP mode.



None

Description This command sets the administrative mode of IGMP in the BAR to active.

“no” Form no ip igmpThe “no” form of this command sets the administrative mode of IGMP to inactive (disabled).

Topic on page

Multicast Configuration Commands 9-1

Multicast Display Commands 9-18

ip igmp


9-2

9.2Multicast Configuration Commands


Example

Related Commands show ip igmp on page 9-24

Summary Activate IP multicast forwarding mode on the BAR.



None

Description This command sets the administrative mode of the IP multicast forwarder in the router to active. For multicast routing to become operational, IGMP must be currently enabled.

An error message will be displayed on the CLI if multicast routing is enabled while IGMP is disabled. However, the IP multicast mode configuration is stored in the multicast configuration file and is automatically enabled once IGMP is enabled.

“no” Form no ip multicastThe “no” form of this command sets the administrative mode of the IP multicast forwarder in the router to inactive.


Example

Related Commands ip igmp on page 9-1

Summary Activate DVRMP mode.



None

Description This command sets the administrative mode of Distance-Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) in the BAR to active. IGMP must be enabled before DVMRP can be enabled.

“no” Form no ip dvmrpThe “no” form of this command sets the administrative mode of DVMRP in the BAR to inactive (disabled).


Pannaway BAR (Config)#ip igmp

ip multicast

Pannaway BAR (Config)#ip multicast

ip dvmrp


9-3

9.2Multicast


Example


Summary Enable trap mode.



None

Description This command enables the DVMRP trap mode.

“no” Form no ip dvmrp trapflagsThe “no” form of this command disables the DVMRP trap mode (the default state).


Example

Summary Create a Reverse Path Forwarding (RPF) static route.



<sourceipaddr>The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the multicast packet source the static route defines a connection to.

<mask>The network mask, in dotted decimal notation, that specifies the network portion of the <sourceipaddr> parameter.

<rpfipaddr>The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the next router hop toward the multicast packet source.

<metric>The metric, or cost, of the route entry. Values may be from 0 to 255.

<slot/port>The combination of a BAR slot and port (on that slot) identifying a unique interface that will be used by the static route to validate Reverse Path Forwarding operation.

Description This command creates a static route which is used to perform Reverse Path Forwarding checking in multicast packet forwarding.

Pannaway BAR (Config)#ip dvmrp

ip dvmrp trapflags

Pannaway BAR (Config)#ip dvmrp trapflags

ip multicast staticroute <sourceipaddr> <mask> <rpfipaddr> <metric> <slot/port>


9-4


“no” Form no ip multicast staticroute <sourceipaddr>The “no” form of this command deletes a static route in the static multicast table. The <sourceipaddr> is the IP address of the multicast packet source.

Defaults None

Example

Summary Activate PIM Dense Mode operation.



None

Description This command sets the administrative mode of Protocol Independent Multicast – Dense Mode (PIM-DM) on the BAR to enabled. IGMP must be enabled before PIM-DM can be enabled.

“no” Form no ip pimdmThe “no” form of this command sets the administrative mode of PIM-DM to disabled (the default state).


Example


Summary Enable PIM Sparse Mode (PIM-SM) multicast routing.



None

Description This command sets administrative mode of PIM-SM multicast routing across the router to enabled. IGMP must be enabled before PIM-SM can be enabled.

“no” Form no ip pimsmThe “no” form of this command sets the administrative mode of PIM-SM across the router to disabled (the default state).


(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#ip multicast staticroute 229.3.3.3 255.255.0.0 10.10.1.4 1 0/1

ip pimdm

Pannaway BAR (Config)#ip pimdm

ip pimsm


9-5

9.2Multicast


Example


Summary Specify the PIM-SM data threshold rate.



<d-threshold>The data threshold rate, in kilobits per second, for BAR PIM-SM routing operations. The acceptable range for this value is from 0 to 2000 kbps.

Description This command configures the data threshold rate for the PIM-SM router.

“no” Form no ip pimsm datathreshrateThe “no” form of this command resets the data threshold rate back to its default value.

Defaults D-threshold: 50 kbps

Example

Summary Set the PIM-SM Join/Prune message interval.



<msg-interval>The Join/Prune message interval, measured in seconds, that will be used for PIM-SM router operations on the BAR. The valid range for this value is 10 to 3600 seconds.

Description This command is used to configure the global join/prune interval for PIM-SM router. The join/prune interval is specified in seconds.

“no” Form no ip pimsm message-intervalThe “no” form of this command resets the global join/prune interval back to its default value of 60 seconds.

Defaults Msg-interval: 60

Example

Pannaway BAR (Config)#ip pimsm

ip pimsm datathreshrate <d-threshold>

Pannaway BAR (Config)#ip pimsm datathreshrate 1000

ip pimsm message-interval <msg-interval>

Pannaway BAR (Config)#ip pimsm message-interval 5


9-6


Summary Configure the BAR PIM-SM shortest path threshold.



<spath-threshold>The rate, in kilobits per second, at which the BAR will switch to seeking a shortest path. This value may be from 0 to 2000 kbps.

Description This command configures the Threshold rate for the Rendezvous Point (RP) router to switch to the shortest path. The rate is specified in Kilobytes per second.

“no” Form no ip pimsm spt-thresholdThe “no” form of this command resets the Threshold rate for the RP router to switch to the shortest path to its default value of 50 Kbps.

Defaults 50 Kbps

Example

Summary Enable PIM trap mode.



None

Description This command enables the PIM trap mode for both Sparse Mode (SM) and Dense Mode (DM).

“no” Form no ip pim-trapflagsThe “no” form of this command disables the PIM trap mode (the default state).


Example

ip pimsm spt-threshold <spath-threshold>

Pannaway BAR (Config)# ip pimsm spt-threshold 1000

ip pim-trapflags

Pannaway BAR (Config)#ip pim-trapflags


9-7

9.2Multicast


Summary Define a static Rendezvous Point (RP).



<ipaddress>The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the Rendezvous Point being created.

<groupaddress>The group address supported by the RP.

<groupmask>The mask that identifies the group portion of the <groupaddress> parameter.

Description This command is used to create an RP IP address for the PIM-SM router.

“no” Form no ippimsm staticrp <ipaddress> <groupaddress> <groupmask>The “no” form of the command is used to delete a specified static RP IP address.

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands show ip pimsm rphash <groupaddress> on page 9-41show ip pimsm staticrp on page 9-41

Interface-Level Commands

The commands in this section control the operation of multicast routing on individual BAR interfaces.

Summary Set the DVMRP metric for the interface.



<metric>:The metric to be set for the current interface. Acceptable range for this value is from 1 to 63.

Description This command configures the metric for the current interface. This value is used in the DVMRP messages as the cost to reach this network.

“no” Form no ip dvmrp metricThe “no” form of this command resets the metric for the current interface back to its default value of 1.

Defaults Metric: 1

Example

ip pimsm staticrp <ipaddress> <groupaddress> <groupmask>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#ip pimsm staticrp 192.168.10.220 192.168.10.10 255.255.0.0

ip dvmrp metric <metric>

Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip dvmrp metric 20


9-8


Summary Activate DVMRP on the current interface.



None

Description This command sets the administrative mode of DVMRP on the current interface to active.

“no” Form no ip dvmrpThe “no” form of this command sets the administrative mode of DVMRP on the current interface to inactive (disabled).


Example

Summary Set total number of last member group queries.



<count>The number of queries sent to group members on the interface. Acceptable values are whole numbers from 1 to 20.

Description This command sets the number of Group-Specific Queries sent before the router assumes that there are no local members on the current interface.

“no” Form no ip igmp last-member-query-countThe “no” form of this command resets the number of Group-Specific Queries back to its default value of 2.

Defaults Count: 2

Example

ip dvmrp

Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip dvmrp

ip igmp last-member-query-count <count>

Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip igmp last-member-query-count 1


9-9

9.2Multicast


Summary Set the maximum response time for group queries.



<lmqinterval>The interval, measured in tenths of a second, that the BAR will wait for an answer to a Group-Specific Query. Acceptable range is from 1 to 255 (.1 to 25.5 seconds).

Description This command configures the Maximum Response Time being inserted into Group-Specific Queries sent in response to Leave Group messages on the current interface.

“no” Form no ip last-member-query-intervalThe “no” form of this command resets the Maximum Response Time back to its default value.

Defaults LMQinterval: 10 tenths of a second (1 second)

Example

Summary Set host query time interval.



<query-interval>The time (in seconds) that elapses between the transmission of IGMP Host Query packets on this interface. The range is from 1 to 3600.

Description This command configures the query interval for the currently configured interface. This is the frequency at which IGMP Host-Query packets are transmitted on this interface.

“no” Form no ip igmp query-intervalThe “no” form of this command resets the IGMP query interval back to its default value.

Defaults Query-interval: 125 seconds

Example

ip igmp last-member-query-interval <lmqinterval>

Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip igmp last-member-query-interval 100

ip igmp query-interval <query-interval>

Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip igmp query-interval 200


9-10


Summary Set IGMP advertised query response time.



<max-time>The maximum response time, in tenths of a second, that will be advertised in IGMPv2 queries. The range for this field is 1 to 255 (0.1 to 25.5 seconds).

Description This command configures the maximum response time interval for the currently configured interface, which is the maximum query response time advertised in IGMPv2 queries on this interface.

“no” Form no ip igmp query-max-response-timeThe “no” form of this command resets the maximum response time back to its default of 100 tenths of a second

Defaults Max-time: 100 (10 seconds)

Example

Summary Set the robustness metric for the interface.



<robustness>The numerical rating of the interface’s robustness, a measure of expected packet loss. Ranges for this value are from 1 to 255

Description This command configures the robustness that allows tuning of the interface. The robustness is the tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet. If a subnet is expected to have a lot of loss, the Robustness variable may be increased for the interface.

“no” Form no ip igmp robustness <robustness>The “no” form of this command resets the robustness value to its default of 2.

Defaults Robustness: 2

Example

ip igmp query-max-response-time <max-time>

Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip igmp query-max-response-time 70

ip igmp robustness <robustness>

Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip igmp robustness 153


9-11

9.2Multicast


Summary Set the number of queries the interface will send at startup.



<count>The number of times that the interface will send queries at startup. The range for this value is from 1 to 20.

Description This command sets the number of queries sent out on startup, separated by the Startup Query Interval on the currently configured interface.

“no” Form no ip igmp startup-query-countThe “no” form of this command resets the number of queries back to its default value of 2.

Defaults Count: 2

Example

Summary Set the time between general queries.



<interval>The amount of time, in seconds, that the interface will wait before sending a new general query. Acceptable range for this value is from 1 to 300.

Description This command sets the interval (in seconds) between General Queries sent by a Querier on startup on the currently configured interface.

“no” Form no ip igmp startup-query-intervalThe “no” form of this command resets the interval between General Queries back to its default value.

Defaults Interval: 31 seconds

Example

ip igmp startup-query-count <count>

Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip igmp startup-query-count 5

ip igmp startup-query-interval <interval>

Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip igmp startup-query-interval 60


9-12


Summary Set the IGMP version for the interface.



<version>The version of IGMP to be used on this interface. The value for <version> is either 1 (indicating IGMPv1) or 2 (indicating IGMPv2).

Description This command configures the version of IGMP to be supported for this interface.

“no” Form no ip igmp versionThe “no” form of this command restores the default value of 2.

Defaults Version: 2

Example

Summary Identify a multicast boundary.



<groupipaddr>A group IP address in dotted decimal notation.

<mask>A group IP mask in dotted decimal notation.

Description This command adds an administrative scope multicast boundary specified by <groupipaddr> and <mask> for which this multicast administrative boundary is applicable.

“no” Form no ip mcast boundary <groupipaddr> <mask>The “no” form of this command deletes the administrative scope multicast boundary specified by <groupipaddr> and <mask>.

Defaults None

Example

ip igmp version <version>

Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip igmp version 2

ip mcast boundary <groupipaddr> <mask>

Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip mcast boundary 10.10.30.200 255.255.255.0


9-13

9.2Multicast


Summary Set the Time To Live (TTL) threshold value for the interface.



<ttlvalue>The numerical TTL threshold setting for the interface. The range for this value is from 0 to 255.

Description This command applies the given value for the Time To Live threshold to the currently configured routing interface. This is the TTL threshold which is to be applied to the multicast data packets which are to be forwarded from the interface.

“no” Form no ip multicast ttl-thresholdThe “no” form of this command restores the default TTL threshold of 1 to the interface.

Defaults TTLvalue: 1

Example

Summary Activate PIM-DM administrative mode.



<slot/port>The combination of a BAR slot and a port in that location that identifies a unique interface.

Description This command sets the administrative mode of PIM-DM on the currently configured interface to enabled.

“no” Form no ip pimdm modeThe “no” form of this command sets the administrative mode of PIM-DM on the interface to disabled (the default state).


Example


ip multicast ttl-threshold <ttlvalue>

Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip multicast ttl-threshold 45

ip pimdm mode <slot/port>

Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip pimdm mode


9-14


Summary Set PIM-DM query interval.



<dmq-interval>The length, in seconds, of the query interval for the interface. The acceptable range of this value is from 10 to 3600 seconds.

Description This command sets the transmission frequency of hello messages between PIM enabled neighbors for the currently configured interface.

“no” Form no ip pimdm query-intervalThe “no” form of this command resets the transmission frequency to its default value of 30 seconds.

Defaults DMQ-interval: 30

Example

Summary Set Candidate Bootstrap Router (CBSR) preference for a PIM-SM interface.



<preference>This parameter is the numerical value representing the CBSR preference value for the interface. The range of this parameter is from -1 to 255.

Description This command configures the CBSR preference for a particular PIM-SM interface. This preference value is used in the bootstrap router election process.

“no” Form no ip pimsm cbsrpreferenceThe “no” form of this command resets the CBSR preference back to its default value.

Defaults Preference: 0

Example

ip pimdm query-interval <dmq-interval>

Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip pimdm query-interval 1500

ip pimsm cbsrpreference <preference>

Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip pimsm cbsrpreference -1


9-15

9.2Multicast


Summary Set PIM-SM administrative mode for the interface.



None

Description This command sets administrative mode of PIM-SM multicast routing on the currently configured interface to enabled.

“no” Form no ip pimsm modeThe “no” form of this command sets the administrative mode of PIM-SM on the interface to disabled.


Example


Summary Set the time between PIM hello-message queries.



<smq-interval>The length, in seconds, of the query interval for the interface. The acceptable range of this value is from 10 to 3600 seconds.

Description This command sets the transmission frequency of hello messages between PIM enabled neighbors for the currently configured interface.

“no” Form no ip pimsm query-intervalThe “no” form of this command resets the transmission frequency to its default value of 30 seconds.

Defaults SMQ-interval: 30

Example

ip pimsm mode

Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip pimsm mode

ip pimsm query-interval <smq-interval>

Pannaway BAR (Interface-"0/1")#ip pimsm query-interval 1500


9-16


Multicast Query and Trace Commands

The following commands are used to initiate various multicast query and trace commands.

Summary Disable processing of mtrace queries.



None

Description This command is used to disable the processing capability of mtrace query on the BAR. If the mode is enabled, the BAR process mtrace queries that it receives and forwards them appropriately. If the mode is disabled, the BAR does not respond to the mtrace queries it receives from other router devices.

“no” Form no disable ip multicast mdebug mtraceThe “no” form of this command enables the BAR to process and forward mtrace queries that it receives.

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands mtrace <source_ipaddr> [<group/destination>] [<group/destination>] on page 9-17

Summary Queries the neighbor information of a multicast-capable router.



<ipaddr>The IP address of the system to query. If no IP address is specified, the default of the current BAR is used.

Description This command is used to query the neighbor information of a multicast-capable router specified by <ipaddr>. The default value is the IP address of the system at which the command is issued. The mrinfo command can take up to 2 minutes to complete. Only one mrinfo command may be in process at a time. The results of this command will be available in the results bufferpool which can be displayed by using show mrinfo.

Defaults The IP address of the current BAR.

disable ip multicast mdebug mtrace

(BAR) (Config)#disable ip multicast mdebug mtrace

mrinfo <ipaddr>


9-17

9.2Multicast


Example

Related Commands show mrinfo on page 9-42

Summary Finds the IP Multicast packet race and loss information from a multicast source to a receiver.



None

Description This command is used to find the IP Multicast packet rate and loss information path from a source to a receiver (unicast router id of the host running mstat). The results of this command will be available in the results bufferpool which can be displayed by using the command “show mstat”. If a debug command is already in progress, a message is displayed and the new request fails.

The <source> is the IP address of the remote multicast-capable source. The [receiver] is the IP address of the receiver. The default value is the IP address of the system at which the command is issued. The [group] is a multicast address of the group to be displayed. The default value is 224.2.0.1(the group used for the multicast backbone).

Note that the group and receiver IP addresses can be entered in any order.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands show mstat on page 9-42

Summary Finds the IP Multicast path from a source to a receiver.



None

(BAR) (Config)#mrinfo

Debug command execution started succesfully. Results available after 20 seconds. Use 'show mrinfo' to display the results.

mstat <source_ipaddr> [<group/destination>] [<group/destination>]

(BAR) (Config)#mstat 10.97.56.7 224.16.16.14 10.99.255.58

Debug command execution started successfully. Results available after 2 minutes. Use 'show mstat' to display the results.

mtrace <source_ipaddr> [<group/destination>] [<group/destination>]


9-18

9.3Multicast Display Commands

Description This command is used to find the IP Multicast path from a source to a receiver (unicast router ID of the host running mtrace). A trace query is passed hop-by-hop along the reverse path from the receiver to the source, collecting hop addresses, packet counts, and routing error conditions along the path, and then the response is returned to the requestor. The results of this command are available in the results buffer pool which can be displayed by using the command “show mtrace”.

The <source> is the IP address of the remote multicast-capable source. The [destination] is the IP address of the receiver system. The default value is the IP address of system at which the command is issued.

The [group] is the multicast address of the group to be displayed. The default value is 224.2.0.1(the group used for the multicast backbone).

If a debug command is already in execution, a message is displayed and the new request fails.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands disable ip multicast mdebug mtrace on page 9-16

9.3 Multicast Display CommandsThese monitoring and statistics-gathering commands provide administrative information about the settings and operational status of multicast interfaces and of multicast operation throughout the BAR.

Summary Show DVMRP settings.



None

Description This command displays system-wide information for DVMRP.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

(BAR) (Config)#mtrace 10.97.51.7 224.11.11.42

Debug command execution started successfully. Results available after 1 minute. Use 'show mtrace' to display the results.

show ip dvmrp


9-19

9.3Multicast

DisplayCommands

Example

Command Output The command provides the following general information:

The following fields are displayed for each interface.

Summary Show DVMRP settings.




Description This command displays the interface information for DVMRP on the specified interface.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip dvmrp

Admin Mode..................................... DisableVersion........................................ 3Total Number of Routes......................... 0Reachable Routes .............................. 0

DVMRP INTERFACE STATUSSlot/Port Interface Mode Protocol State--------- --------------- ---------------3/1 Disable Non-Operational3/2 Disable Non-Operational

Admin Mode Indicates whether DVMRP is enabled or disabled.

Version The version of DVMRP being used.

Total Number of Routes

The number of routes in the DVMRP routing table.

Reachable Routes The number of entries in the routing table with non-infinite metrics.

Slot/Port The Slot/Port combination identifying a single routing interface in the BAR.

Interface Mode The mode of this interface: Enable or Disable.

Protocol State The current state of DVMRP on this interface: Operational or Non-Operational.

show ip dvmrp interface <slot/port>


9-20


Example

Command Output The command displays the following information:

The following field is displayed only when DVMRP is operational on the interface.

The following fields are displayed only if DVMRP is enabled on this interface.

Summary Show DVMRP neighbor information.



None

Description This command displays the neighbor information for DVMRP.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Command Output The following information is presented in response to the command:

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip dvmrp interface 3/3

Interface Mode................................. DisableInterface Metric .............................. 1Local Address ................................. 50.50.50.1

Interface Mode Indicates whether DVMRP is enabled or disabled on the specified interface.

Interface Metric Indicates the metric of this interface.

Local Address The IP Address of the interface.

Generation ID The Generation ID value for the interface. This is used by the neighboring routers to detect that the DVMRP table should be resent.

Received Bad Packets The number of invalid packets received.

Received Bad Routes The number of invalid routes received.

Sent Routes The number of routes that have been sent on this interface.

show ip dvmrp neighbor

IfIndex The value of the interface used to reach the neighbor.

Nbr IP Addr The IP Address of the DVMRP neighbor for which this entry contains information.

State The state of the neighboring router: ACTIVE or DOWN.

Up Time The time since this neighboring router was learned.

Expiry Time The time remaining for the neighbor to age out. This field is not applicable if the State is DOWN.


9-21

9.3Multicast

DisplayCommands

Summary Show outgoing next hop information.



None

Description This command displays the next hop information on outgoing interfaces for routing multicast datagrams.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The CLI provides the following information in response to the command:

Generation ID The Generation ID value for the neighbor.

Major Version The major version of DVMRP protocol of neighbor.

Minor Version The minor version of DVMRP protocol of neighbor.

Capabilities The capabilities of the neighbor.

Received Routes The number of routes received from the neighbor.

Rcvd Bad Pkts The number of invalid packets received from this neighbor.

Rcvd Bad Routes The number of correct packets received with invalid routes.

show ip dvmrp nexthop

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip dvmrp nexthop

Next Hop Source IP Source Mask Interface Type --------------- --------------- --------- -------10.10.5.50 255.255.255.0 3/1 BRANCH

Source IP The sources for which this entry specifies a next hop on an outgoing interface.

Source Mask The IP Mask for the sources for which this entry specifies a next hop on an outgoing interface.

Next Hop Interface The interface in Slot/Port format for the outgoing interface for this next hop.

Type Indicates whether the network is a LEAF or a BRANCH.


9-22


Summary Show upstream DVMRP pruning information.



None

Description This command displays the table listing the router’s upstream prune information.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Command Output The command presents the following information:

Summary Show DVMRP routing information.



None

Description This command displays the multicast routing information for DVMRP.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Command Output The command provides the following information:

show ip dvmrp prune

Group IP Identifies the multicast Address that is pruned.

Source IP Displays the IP Address of the source that has pruned.

Source Mask Displays the network Mask for the prune source. It should be all 1s or both the prune source and prune mask must match.

Expiry Time (secs) The expiry time in seconds. This is the time remaining for this prune to age out.

show ip dvmrp route

Source Address The multicast address of the source group.

Source Mask The IP Mask for the source group.

Upstream Neighbor The IP Address of the neighbor which is the source for the packets for a specified multicast address.

Interface The interface used to receive the packets sent by the sources.

Metric The distance in hops to the source subnet.

Expiry Time (secs) The expiry time in seconds. This is the time remaining for this route to age out.

Up Time (secs) The time when a specified route was learnt, in seconds.


9-23

9.3Multicast

DisplayCommands

Summary Show multicast groups on an interface.




[detail]Submitting this optional parameter instructs the CLI to provide additional multicast group information in the command output.

Description This command displays the registered multicast groups on the interface. If “detail” is specified this command displays the registered multicast groups on the specified <slot/port> interface in detail.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output If detail is not specified, the following fields are displayed:

The following fields are only displayed if the interface is enabled.

show ip igmp groups <slot/port> [detail]

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip igmp groups 3/1

IP Address..................................... 10.10.5.1Subnet Mask.................................... 255.255.255.0Interface Mode................................. EnableQuerier Status................................. QuerierMulticast Group IP............................. 224.224.224.224Multicast Group IP............................. 228.4.1.200

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip igmp groups 3/1 detail

REGISTERED MULTICAST GROUP DETAILSMulticast Version1IP Address Last Reporter Up Time Expiry Time Host Timer--------------- --------------- ------- ------------ ----------224.224.224.224 10.10.5.17 34 96 -----

IP Address The IP address of the interface participating in the multicast group.

Subnet Mask The subnet mask of the interface participating in the multicast group.

Interface Mode Indicates whether IGMP is enabled or disabled on this interface.

Querier Status Indicates whether the interface has IGMP in Querier mode or Non-Querier mode.

Multicast Group IP Displays the address of the multicast group registered on this interface.


9-24


If the detail parameter is specified, the following fields are displayed:

Summary Show IGMP information for the BAR.



None

Description This command displays system-wide IGMP information, including the status of IGMP on each physical or virtual interface.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The following information is displayed in response to the show ip igmp command:

Multicast IP Address The IP Address of the registered multicast group on this interface.

Last Reporter The IP Address of the source of the last membership report received for the specified multicast group address on this interface.

Up Time The time elapsed since the entry was created for the specified multicast group address on this interface.

Expiry Time The amount of time remaining to remove this entry before it is aged out.

Version1 Host Timer The time remaining until the local router will assume that there are no longer any IGMP version 1 multicast members on the IP subnet attached to this interface.

show ip igmp

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip igmpIGMP Admin Mode................................ Enable

IGMP INTERFACE STATUSSlot/Port Interface Mode Protocol State--------- --------------- ---------------0/5 Enable Operational3/1 Enable Operational

IGMP Admin Mode The administrative status of IGMP.

Slot/Port The slot and port of the interface.

Interface Mode Indicates whether IGMP is enabled or disabled on the interface.

Protocol State Indicates the current state of IGMP on this interface: Operational or Non-Operational.


9-25

9.3Multicast

DisplayCommands

Summary Show IGMP information and configuration.




Description This command displays IGMP information for a selected physical or virtual interface.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The command output provides the following configuration and statistical information:

show ip igmp interface <slot/port>

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip igmp interface 3/1Slot/Port...................................... 3/1IGMP Admin Mode................................ EnableInterface Mode................................. EnableIGMP Version................................... 2Query Interval (secs).......................... 125Query Max Response Time (1/10 of a second)..... 100Robustness..................................... 2Startup Query Interval (secs) ................. 31Startup Query Count............................ 2Last Member Query Interval (1/10 of a second).. 10Last Member Query Count........................


IGMP Admin Mode The administrative status of IGMP.

Interface Mode Indicates whether IGMP is enabled or disabled on the interface.

IGMP Version Indicates the version of IGMP running on the interface. This value can be configured to create a router capable of running either IGMP version 1 or 2.

Query Interval The frequency at which IGMP Host-Query packets are transmitted on this interface.

Query Max Response Time

The maximum query response time advertised in IGMPv2 queries on this interface.

Robustness The tuning for the expected packet loss on a subnet. If a subnet is expected to be have a lot of loss, the Robustness variable may be increased for that interface.

Startup Query Interval The interval between General Queries sent by a Querier on startup.

Startup Query Count The number of Queries sent out on startup, separated by the Startup Query Interval.

Last Member Query Interval

The Maximum Response Time inserted into Group-Specific Queries sent in response to Leave Group messages.

Last Member Query Count

The number of Group-Specific Queries sent before the router assumes that there are no local members.


9-26


Summary List interfaces that are members of a specified group.



<multiipaddr>The group address of the multicast group that membership information should be displayed for.

Description This command displays the list of interfaces that have registered in the multicast group specified by the group address.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The command provides the following information:

Summary Show IGMP statistics.



<slot/port>The combination of a BAR slot and a port, or a virtual slot and port combination, that identifies a unique interface.

Description This command displays the IGMP statistical information for the physical or virtual interface specified by <slot/port>. The statistics are only displayed when the interface is enabled for IGMP.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

show ip igmp interface membership <multiipaddr>

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip igmp interface membership 228.4.1.200

IGMP INTERFACE MEMBERSHIP INFOSlot/Port Interface IP State--------- --------------- --------------3/1 10.10.5.1 Querier

Slot/Port The slot and port which identify the interface participating in the multicast group.

Interface IP The IP address of the interface participating in the multicast group.

State Indicates whether the interface has IGMP in Querier mode or Non-Querier mode.

show ip igmp interface stats <slot/port>


9-27

9.3Multicast

DisplayCommands

Example

Command Output The following information is displayed in response to the command:

Summary Show multicast configuration and settings for the BAR.



None

Description This command displays system-wide multicast information for the BAR.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip igmp interface stats 3/1Querier Status................................. QuerierQuerier IP Address............................. 111.222.100.1Querier Up Time (secs) ........................ 100036Querier Expiry Time (secs) .................... 0Wrong Version Queries.......................... 0Number of Joins................................ 1508Number of Groups............................... 2

Querier Status Indicates whether the IGMP router is running in Querier mode or Non-Querier mode.

Querier IP Address The IP Address of the IGMP Querier on the IP subnet to which this interface is attached.

Querier Up Time The time since the interface Querier was last changed.

Querier Expiry Time The amount of time remaining before the Other Querier Present Timer expires. If the local system is the querier, the value of this object is zero.

Wrong Version Queries The number of queries received whose IGMP version does not match the IGMP version of the interface.

Number of Joins The number of times a group membership has been added on this interface.

Number of Groups The current number of membership entries for this interface.

show ip mcast

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip mcastAdmin Mode..................................... EnableProtocol State................................. OperationalTable Max Size ................................ 256Number Of Packets For Which Source Not Found .. 0Number Of Packets For Which Group Not Found ... 0Protocol....................................... PIMSMEntry Count ................................... 1Highest Entry Count ........................... 2


9-28


Command Output The show ip mcast command provides the following information as output:

Summary Display multicast boundaries.




allThis parameter instructs the CLI to return multicast boundary information for all interfaces.

Description This command displays the configured administrative scoped multicast boundaries for a given physical or logical interface, or for all interfaces.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Command Output The following information is presented in response to the command:

Summary Show multicast TTL value for an interface.


Admin Mode The administrative status of multicast on the system.

Protocol State The current state of the multicast protocol: Operational or Non-Operational.

Table Max Size The maximum number of entries allowed in the multicast table.

Number Of Packets For Which Source Not Found

The number of packets for which the source is not found.

Number Of Packets For Which Group Not Found

The number of packets for which the group is not found.

Protocol The multicast protocol running on the BAR. Possible values are PIMDM, PIMSM, or DVMRP.

Entry Count The number of entries in the multicast table.

Highest Entry Count The highest entry count in the multicast table.

show ip mcast boundary {<slot/port> | all}

Slot/Port The interface number

Group Ip The group IP address

Mask The group IP mask

show ip mcast interface <slot/port>


9-29

9.3Multicast

DisplayCommands



Description This command displays the multicast information for the physical or logical interface specified by <slot/port>.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The following information is presented in the multicast information table:

Related Commands “ip multicast ttl-threshold <ttlvalue>” on page 9-6

Summary Show multicast route table information.



detailThe detail parameter causes the CLI to present detailed information about the contents of the BAR multicast table, including some operational statistics.

summaryThis parameter instructs the CLI to present an abbreviated version of the multicast table information in response to the command.

Description This command displays information about the multicast table in summary mode or detail mode.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip mcast interface 3/1Slot/Port TTL--------- -----3/1 1


TTL The time-to-live value for this interface.

show ip mcast mroute {detail | summary}


9-30


Example

Command Output If the “detail” parameter is specified, the following fields are displayed:

If the “summary” parameter is specified, the following fields are displayed:

Summary Show mroute table settings for the BAR.



<groupipaddr>The group address of a multicast group in the mroute table to be examined.

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip mcast mroute summary

Multicast Route Table Summary Incoming Outgoing Source IP Group IP Protocol Interface Interface List --------------- --------------- -------- --------- ---------------10.10.5.17 224.0.1.1 PIMDM 3/1 10.10.5.17 238.1.1.2 PIMDM 3/1 10.10.5.17 238.1.1.3 PIMDM 3/1 10.10.5.17 238.1.1.6 PIMDM 3/1 3/3 10.10.5.17 228.4.1.207 PIMDM 3/1 10.10.5.17 228.4.1.205 PIMDM 3/1 10.10.5.17 228.4.1.206 PIMDM 3/1 10.10.5.17 228.4.1.204 PIMDM 3/1 10.10.5.105 224.1.1.104 PIMDM 3/1 10.10.5.105 224.1.1.105 PIMDM 3/1 10.10.5.105 224.1.1.103 PIMDM 3/1 10.10.5.105 224.1.1.108 PIMDM 3/1 3/3 10.10.5.105 224.1.1.106 PIMDM 3/1 10.10.5.105 224.1.1.109 PIMDM 3/1 10.10.5.105 224.1.1.110 PIMDM 3/1 10.10.5.105 224.1.1.111 PIMDM 3/1 10.10.5.105 224.0.17.107 PIMDM 3/1

Source IP The IP address of the multicast data source.

Group IP The IP address of the destination of the multicast packet.

Expiry Time The time of expiry of this entry in seconds.

Up Time The time elapsed since the entry was created in seconds.

RPF Neighbor The IP address of the RPF neighbor.

Flags The flags associated with this entry.



Protocol The multicast routing protocol by which this entry was created.

Incoming Interface The interface on which the packet for this source/group arrives.

Outgoing Interface List The list of outgoing interfaces on which this packet is forwarded.

show ip mcast mroute group <groupipaddr> {detail | summary}


9-31

9.3Multicast

DisplayCommands

detailThe detail parameter causes the CLI to present detailed information about the contents of the BAR mroute table, including some operational statistics.

summaryThis parameter instructs the CLI to present an abbreviated version of the mroute table information in response to the command.

Description This command displays the multicast configuration settings such as flags, timer settings, incoming and outgoing interfaces, RPF neighboring routers, and expiration times of all the entries in the multicast mroute table containing the given <groupipaddr>.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output If the summary parameter is selected, the following fields are displayed:

If the detail parameter is selected, the Source IP and Group IP appear (as described above) are displayed, as well as the following fields:

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip mcast mroute group 224.1.1.105 summary

Multicast Route Table Summary Incoming OutgoingSource IP Group IP Protocol Interface Interface List--------------- --------------- -------- --------- ----------------10.10.5.105 224.1.1.105 PIMDM 3/1

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip mcast mroute group 224.1.1.105 detail

Multicast Route Table Expiry Up TimeSource Ip Group Ip Time(secs) (secs) RPF Neighbor Flags--------------- --------------- ----------- ----------- --------------- -----10.10.5.105 224.1.1.105 201 733817 0.0.0.0 Null




Incoming Interface The interface on which the packet for this group arrives.


Expiry Time (secs) The time of expiry of this entry in seconds.

Up Time (secs) The time elapsed since the entry was created in seconds.




9-32


Summary Show multicast configuration settings.



<sourceipaddr>The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of a source station in the mroute table to display information for.

<groupipaddr>An optional parameter, specified with a <sourceipaddr> value, that identifies a multicast mroute table.

detailThe detail parameter causes the CLI to present detailed information about the multicast configuration of the BAR, including some operational statistics.

summaryThis parameter instructs the CLI to present an abbreviated version of the multicast configuration settings in response to the command.

Description This command displays the multicast configuration settings such as flags, timer settings, incoming and outgoing interfaces, RPF neighboring routers, and expiration times of all the entries in the multicast mroute table containing the given <sourceipaddr> or <sourceipaddr> [<groupipaddr>] pair.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

show ip mcast mroute source <sourceipaddr> [<groupipaddr>] {detail | summary}

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip mcast mroute source 10.10.5.105 summary

Multicast Route Table Summary Incoming OutgoingSource IP Group IP Protocol Interface Interface List--------------- --------------- -------- --------- ----------------10.10.5.105 224.1.1.104 PIMDM 3/110.10.5.105 224.1.1.105 PIMDM 3/110.10.5.105 224.1.1.103 PIMDM 3/110.10.5.105 224.1.1.108 PIMDM 3/110.10.5.105 224.1.1.106 PIMDM 3/110.10.5.105 224.1.1.109 PIMDM 3/110.10.5.105 224.1.1.110 PIMDM 3/110.10.5.105 224.1.1.111 PIMDM 3/110.10.5.105 224.0.17.107 PIMDM 3/1


9-33

9.3Multicast

DisplayCommands

Command Output If the summary parameter is selected, the following fields are displayed:

If the detail parameter is selected, the Source IP and Group IP appear (as described above) are displayed, as well as the following fields:

Summary Show the static routes configured in the mroute table.



<sourceipaddr>The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of a source station to show static route information for.

Description This command displays all the static routes configured in the static mcast table if no IP address is specified or displays the static route associated with the particular source station IP address.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Command Output The command output includes the following fields:




Incoming Interface The interface on which the packet for this group arrives.


Expiry Time (secs) The time of expiry of this entry in seconds.

Up Time (secs) The time elapsed since the entry was created in seconds.



show ip mcast mroute static [<sourceipaddr>]

Source IP The IP address of the multicast packet source.

Source Mask The mask applied to the IP address of the multicast packet source.

RPF Address The IP address to be used for Reverse Path Forwarding for the given source and mask.

Metric The metric value corresponding to the source address.

Slot/Port The incoming interface number whose IP address is used as RPF for the given source and mask.


9-34


Summary Show PIM-DM settings.



None

Description This command displays the BAR’s system-wide information for PIM-DM.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The show ip pimdm command presents the following information:

Summary Show PIM-DM configuration information.




Description This command displays the interface information for PIM-DM on the specified interface.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

show ip pimdm

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip pimdm

Admin Mode..................................... Enable

PIM-DM INTERFACE STATUSSlot/Port Interface Mode Protocol State--------- --------------- ---------------3/1 Enable Operational3/2 Disable Non-Operational3/3 Enable Operational

Admin Mode Indicates whether PIM-DM is enabled or disabled.

Slot/Port Indicates the slot and port of the interface on which PIM-DM operation is active.

Interface Mode Indicates whether PIM-DM is enabled or disabled on this interface.

State Indicates the current state of PIM-DM on this interface: Operational or Non-Operational.

show ip pimdm interface <slot/port>


9-35

9.3Multicast

DisplayCommands

Example

Command Output The following information is show in response to the command:

Summary Show PIM-DM statistics.




allThis parameter instructs the CLI to return statistics for all interfaces.

Description This command displays statistical information for PIM-DM on the physical or logical interface specified by <slot/port>.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The following fields are presented on the interface information table:

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip pimdm interface 3/1

Interface Mode................................. EnableHello Interval (secs).......................... 30

Interface Mode Indicates whether PIM-DM is enabled or disabled on the specified interface.

PIM-DM Interface Hello Interval Indicates the frequency at which PIM hello messages are transmitted on this interface.

show ip pimdm interface stats {<slot/port> | all}

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip pimdm interface stats all

Hello DesignatedInterface IP Address Nbr Count Interval Router---------- --------------- --------- ---------- ---------------3/1 10.10.5.1 0 30 10.10.5.13/3 50.50.50.1 0 30 50.50.50.1

Interface The Slot and Port of the interface.

IP Address The IP Address that represents the PIM-DM interface.

Nbr Count The neighbor count for the PIM-DM interface.

Hello Interval The time interval between two hello messages sent from the router on the given interface.

Designated Router The IP Address of the Designated Router for this interface.


9-36


Summary Show PIM-DM neighbor information.





Description This command displays the neighbor information for PIM-DM on the physical or logical interface specified by <slot/port>, or on all interfaces.

“no” Form None

Defaults Show information for all interfaces

Example


Summary Show PIM-SM configuration information.



None

Description This command displays the system-wide information for PIM-SM.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

show ip pimdm neighbor {<slot/port> | all}

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip pimdm neighbor

Up Time Expiry TimeNeighbor Addr Interface hh:mm:ss hh:mm:ss--------------- ---------- --------- -----------10.1.3.1 3/3 02:07:46 00:01:3040.40.40.2 3/2 02:07:56 00:01:30

Neighbor Addr The IP Address of the neighbor on an interface.

Interface The Slot and Port of the interface.

Up Time The time since this neighbor has become active on this interface.

Expiry Time The expiry time of the neighbor on this interface.

show ip pimsm


9-37

9.3Multicast

DisplayCommands

Example


Summary Show Candidate-RP table information.



None

Description This command displays the IP multicast groups for which the local router is to advertise itself as a Candidate-Rendezvous Point when the value of hold time is non-zero.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Command Output The command provides the following information from the Candidate-RP table:

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip pimsm

Admin Mode..................................... DisableJoin/Prune Interval (secs)..................... 60Data Threshold Rate (Kbps)..................... 50Register Threshold Rate (Kbps)................. 50

PIM-SM INTERFACE STATUSSlot/Port Interface Mode Protocol State--------- -------------- ----------------3/1 Disable Non-Operational3/2 Disable Non-Operational3/3 Disable Non-Operational

Admin Mode Indicates whether PIM-SM is enabled or disabled.

Join/Prune Interval (secs) Displays the interval at which periodic PIM-SM Join/Prune messages are to be sent.

Data Threshold Rate (Kbps) Displays the data threshold rate for the PIM-SM router.

Register Threshold Rate (Kbps) Displays the threshold rate for the RP router to switch to the shortest path.

Slot/Port Displays routing interfaces in Slot/Port format.

Interface Mode Indicates whether PIM-SM is enabled or disabled on the interface.

Protocol State Indicates the current state of the PIM-SM protocol on the interface: Operational or Non-Operational.

show ip pimsm candrptable

Group Address The IP multicast group address.

Group Mask The multicast group address subnet mask.

Address The unicast address of the interface that will be advertised as a Candidate-RP.


9-38


Summary Show the component table for the BAR’s PIM domains.



None

Description This command displays the table containing objects specific to a PIM domain. One row exists for each domain to which the router is connected.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Command Output The following information is presented for each entry in the table:

Summary Show PIM-SM settings for an interface.




Description This command displays the interface information for PIM-SM on the physical or logical interface specified by <slot/port>.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Command Output The command provides the following configuration information:

show ip pimsm componenttable

Component Index Displays a number which uniquely identifies the component.

Component BSR Address Displays the IP address of the bootstrap router (BSR) for the local PIM region.

Component BSR Expiry Time The minimum time remaining before the BSR in the local domain will be declared down.

Component CRP Hold Time The hold time of the component when it is a candidate.

show ip pimsm interface <slot/port>

IP Address The IP address of the specified interface.

Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask for the IP address of the PIM interface.

Interface Mode Indicates whether PIM-SM is enabled or disabled on the specified interface.

Hello Interval Indicates the frequency at which PIM-SM hello messages are transmitted on this interface.

CBSR Preference Shows the preference value for the local interface as a candidate bootstrap router.


9-39

9.3Multicast

DisplayCommands

Summary Show PIM-SM statistics.





Description This command displays the statistical information for PIM-SM on the physical or logical interface specified or for all interfaces.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Command Output The following fields are shown in response to the command:

Summary Show PIM-SM neighbor statistics.





Description This command displays the neighbor information for PIM-SM on the physical or logical interface specified by <slot/port>, or for all interfaces. If the optional parameters are not included in the command, information about all interfaces is displayed.

“no” Form None

Defaults Show information for all interfaces.

show ip pimsm interface stats {<slot/port> | all}

Slot/Port The Slot and Port of the interface.

IP Address The IP Address that represents the PIM-SM interface.

Subnet Mask The Subnet Mask of this PIM-SM interface.

Designated Router The IP Address of the Designated Router for this interface.

Neighbor Count The number of neighbors on the PIM-SM interface.

show ip pimsm neighbor {<slot/port> | all}


9-40



Summary Show candidate Rendezvous Point information for multicast groups.



<groupaddress>The address of the multicast group to show RP information for.

<groupmask>The mask that identifies the group portion of the <groupaddress> parameter.

candidateSupply this parameter to restrict the displayed information to RP candidate information.

allSupply this parameter to show data for all group RPs.

Description This command displays the PIM information for candidate Rendezvous Points (RPs) for all IP multicast groups or for the specific <groupaddress> <groupmask> provided in the command. The information in the table is displayed for each IP multicast group.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Command Output The following configuration information is displayed:

Slot/Port The interface where the neighbor was discovered.

IP Address The IP Address of the neighbor on an interface.

Up Time The time since this neighbor has become active on this interface.

Expiry Time The expiry time of the neighbor on this interface.

show ip pimsm rp {<groupaddress> <groupmask> | candidate | all}

Group Address The IP multicast group address.

Group Mask The multicast group address subnet mask.

Address The IP address of the Candidate-RP.

Hold Time The hold time of a Candidate-RP.

Expiry Time The minimum time remaining before the Candidate-RP will be declared down.

Component The number which uniquely identifies the component. Each protocol instance connected to a separate domain should have a different index value.


9-41

9.3Multicast

DisplayCommands

Summary Show the static Rendezvous Point information for one group.



<groupaddress>The address of the multicast group to show RP information for.

Description This command displays the static RP information for a specified group. The <groupaddress> parameter is the IP address of the group.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Command Output: The command output provides the IP address of the RP and the group mask for the RP’s group address.

Related Commands ip pimsm staticrp <ipaddress> <groupaddress> <groupmask> on page 9-7show ip pimsm staticrp on page 9-41

Summary Show static RP configuration for the BAR.



None

Description This command displays the static RP information for the PIM-SM router.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Command Output: The following information is presented in response to the command:

Related Commands ip pimsm staticrp <ipaddress> <groupaddress> <groupmask> on page 9-7show ip pimsm rphash <groupaddress> on page 9-41

show ip pimsm rphash <groupaddress>

show ip pimsm staticrp

RP IP Address The IP address of the RP.

Group Address The group address supported by the RP.

Group Mask The group mask for the group address.


9-42


Summary Displays the neighbor information of a multicast-capable router.



None

Description This command is used to display the neighbor information of a multicast-capable router from the results buffer pool of the router subsequent to the execution/completion of a mrinfo [ipaddr] command. The results subsequent to the completion of the latest mrinfo will be available in the buffer pool after a maximum duration of two minutes after the completion of the show mrinfo command. A subsequent issue mrinfo overwrites the contents of the buffer pool with fresh results.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example


Related Commands mrinfo <ipaddr> on page 9-16

Summary Displays the results of an mstat command, reflecting packet rate and loss information.



None

show mrinfo

(Pannaway BAR) #show mrinfo

Results for 'show mrinfo'

10.99.255.58 [version 3.255] [Flags: PGMS]

Router Interface Neighbor Metric TTL Flags---------------- --------------- ------ --- ----------------10.99.255.58 10.99.255.57 1 1

Router Interface The IP address of this neighbor.

Neighbor The neighbor associated with the router interface.

Metric The metric value associated with this neighbor.

TTL The TTL threshold associated with this neighbor.

Flags Status of the neighbor.

show mstat


9-43

9.3Multicast

DisplayCommands

Description This command is used to display the results of packet rate and loss information from the results buffer pool of the router, subsequent to the execution/completion of a mstat <source> [group] [receiver] command. Within two minutes of the completion of the mstat command, the results will be available in the buffer pool. The next issuing of mstat overwrites the buffer pool with fresh results.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands mrinfo <ipaddr> on page 9-16

Summary Displays the results of a multicast trace path.

Required Mode Privileged Exec or User Exec


None

Description This command is used to display results of multicast trace path from the results buffer pool of the router, subsequent to the execution/completion of a mtrace <source> [group] [receiver] command. The results subsequent to the completion of the mtrace will be available in the buffer pool within two minutes and thereafter. A subsequent mtrace command overwrites the results in the buffer pool.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

(Pannaway BAR) #show mstat

Results for 'show mstat 10.97.56.7 10.99.255.58 224.16.16.14'

Source Response Dest Packet Statistics For Only For Traffic10.97.56.7 10.97.56.7 All Multicast Traffic From 10.97.56.7 v __/ rtt 0 ms Lost/Sent = Pct Rate To 224.16.16.14 v / hop -184 s --------------------- --------------------10.97.56.110.99.255.57 | \__ ttl 0 v \ hop 184 s10.99.255.58 10.99.255.58 Receiver Query Source

show mtrace


9-44


Example


Related Commands mtrace <source_ipaddr> [<group/destination>] [<group/destination>] on page 9-17

(Pannaway BAR) #show mtrace

Results for 'show mtrace 10.97.51.7 10.99.255.58 224.11.11.42'

Hops Away From Intermediate Mcast Protocol TTL Time ElapsedDestination Router Address In Use Threshold Between Hops(msecs)-------------- --------------- -------------- --------- -------------------0 10.99.255.581 10.99.255.57 PIM 0 63765

Hops Away From Destination The ordering of intermediate routers between the source and the destination

Intermediate Router Address The address of the intermediate router at the specified hop distance.

Mcast Protocol In Use The multicast routing protocol used for the out interface of the specified intermediate router.

TTL Threshold The Time-To-Live threshold of the out interface on the specified intermediate router.

Time Elapsed Between Hops (msecs)

The time between arrival at one intermediate router to the arrival at the next.

Chapter 10DHCP Server Commands

This chapter describes the CLI commands that control Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server operation on the BAR.

10.1 Contents of this ChapterThis chapter describes the commands that configure and manage DHCP services and operation on the Pannaway BAR. The following sections are presented in this chapter:

10.2 DHCP Server Configuration CommandsThese commands configure the DHCP Server parameters.

Summary Activate DHCP server and relay functions.



None

Description This command enables the DHCP server features on the BAR.

“no” Form no service dhcpThe “no” form of this command disables the BAR DHCP server (the default state).


Example

Related Commands show ip dhcp global configuration on page 10-8

Topic on page

DHCP Server Configuration Commands 10-1

DHCP Pool Configuration 10-3

DHCP Server Display Commands 10-8

DHCP Server Clear Commands 10-12

service dhcp

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#service dhcp


10-2

10.2DHCP Server Configuration Commands

Summary Exclude a range of pool addresses from DHCP assignment.



<lowaddress>This parameter identifies the lowest point of the excluded IP address range. The value is expressed as an IP address in dotted decimal notation.

[highaddress]The optional [highaddress] parameter identifies the upper end of the excluded IP address range. This value is expressed in dotted decimal notation.

Description This command specifies the IP addresses that a DHCP server should not assign to DHCP clients.

“no” Form no ip dhcp excluded-address <lowaddress> [highaddress]The “no” form of this command deletes the specified excluded-address range.

Defaults None

Example


Summary Modify DHCP verification check setting.



<packet-count>The number of packets that a DHCP server sends in its PING verification that an address in the DHCP pool is not in use. This number may be any number from 2 to 10, or may be set to 0 (zero) to block server PINGs of pool address.

Description This command is used to specify the number of packets a DHCP server sends to a pool address to verify that the address is not already in use on the network.

“no” Form no ip dhcp ping packetsThe “no” form of this command prevents the server from pinging DHCP pool addresses.

Defaults Packet-count: 2

ip dhcp excluded-address <lowaddress> [highaddress]

NOTE: If the <lowaddress> parameter is supplied alone, the BAR will exclude the addresses numerically below that IP address. If the <lowaddress> parameter is supplied with the optional [highaddress] parameter, the BAR will exclude IP addresses between those two addresses.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#ip dhcp excluded-address 172.16.1.1 172.16.1.16

ip dhcp ping packets <packet-count>


10-3

10.3DHCP Pool

Configuration

Example


10.3 DHCP Pool ConfigurationThe commands in this section provide for the configuration and management of DHCP address pools and DHCP pool management on the BAR.

Summary Create a DHCP pool.



<name>The alphanumeric name of the DHCP pool to be created on the DHCP server.

Description This command configures a DHCP address pool, identified by <name>, on a DHCP server and enters DHCP pool configuration mode.

“no” Form no ip dhcp pool <name>The “no” form of this command deletes a previously configured DHCP address pool, identified by <name>.

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands show ip dhcp pool configuration {<name> | *} on page 10-9

Summary Set client unique identifier.

Required Mode DHCP Pool Config


<uniqueidentifier>The unique-identifier is a valid notation in hexadecimal format, and must be a minimum of two bytes long.

Description This command specifies the unique identifier for a DHCP client. Although a client generally uses its MAC address as its identifier when issuing DHCP requests, some DHCP clients can have a manually configured client identifier.

“no” Form no client-identifier <uniqueidentifier>The “no” form of this command deletes the specified unique identifier.

Defaults None

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#ip dhcp ping packets 2

ip dhcp pool <name>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#ip dhcp pool ELMIRA_PBG

client-identifier <uniqueidentifier>


10-4

10.3DHCP Pool Configuration

Example


Summary Name a DHCP client.



<name> The name is a brief string consisting of standard ASCII characters used to identify the client for reference purposes.

Description This command specifies the name for a DHCP client.

“no” Form no client-name <name>The “no” form of this command removes the client name.

Defaults None

Example


Summary Set up to eight default routers.



<address(N)>The <address> parameter is the IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of a default router. Up to eight addresses can be supplied to the command, which will be used as default routers in the preference order supplied.

Description This command specifies the default router list for a DHCP client.

“no” Form no default-routerThe “no” form of this command deletes the entire default-router list.

Defaults None

Example


(Pannaway BAR) (Config-dhcp-pool)#client-identifier ab:cd:1d:ab:cd:ef

client-name <name>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-dhcp-pool)#client-name SECTION9

default-router <address1> [<address2>....<address8>]

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-dhcp-pool)#default-router 172.16.1.1 172.16.4.1


10-5

10.3DHCP Pool

Configuration

Summary Set up to eight DNS servers.



<address(N)>The <address> parameter is the IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the DNS server that clients will rely on for name resolution. Up to eight addresses can be supplied to the command, which will be used as DNS servers in the preference order supplied.

Description This command specifies the Domain Name System (DNS) server for a DHCP client. At least one DNS server must be set.

“no” Form no dns-serverThe “no” form of this command deletes the entire DNS server list.

Defaults None

Example


Summary Specify DHCP client address.



<hardwareaddress>The MAC address of the hardware platform of the client consisting of 6 bytes in hexadecimal format, each separated by colons.

[type]The optional type parameter indicates the protocol of the hardware platform. Select 1 to specify traditional Ethernet framing (Ethernet II) or 6 for IEEE 802.n framing (for Token Ring/Token Bus, for example).

Description This command specifies the hardware address of a DHCP client.

“no” Form no hardware-address <hardwareaddress>The “no” form of this command removes the specified hardware address of the DHCP client.

Defaults Type: 1

Example


dns-server <address1> [<address2>....<address8>]

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-dhcp-pool)#dns-server 172.16.1.5 172.16.4.3 192.168.4.7

hardware-address <hardwareaddress> [type]

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-dhcp-pool)#hardware-address 00:00:1d:ab:cd:ef


10-6

10.3DHCP Pool Configuration

Summary Set IP address and mask for client binding.



<ipaddress>The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of a DHCP host.

[<mask>]The network mask, in dotted decimal notation, identifying the network portion of the supplied IP address.

[<prefix-length>]The network mask, specified as a whole number representing the number of bits that make up the prefix (for example, 24), where prefix-length is an integer from 0 to 32.

Description This command specifies the IP address and an optional network mask for a manual binding to a DHCP client.

“no” Form no host <ipaddress>The “no” form of this command removes the host information.

Defaults None

Example


Summary Set length of DHCP address leases.



<days>The number of 24-hour days that a leased IP address may be held by a DHCP client. This parameter may be from 0 to 59.

[hours]The number of hours, in addition to the number of <days> specified, that an assigned IP address may be retained. The value of this optional parameter may be from 0 to 1,339.

[minutes]The duration, in minutes, that DHCP leases may be held. This value may be from 0 to 86399.

host <ipaddress> [<mask> | <prefix-length>]

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-dhcp-pool)#host 172.16.25.29 24

lease [<days> [hours] [minutes] | [infinite]]

NOTE: Configuring a lease duration beyond the maximum allowable lease (86,400 minutes) will result in an error message.


10-7

10.3DHCP Pool

Configuration

[infinite]Supplying this parameter in place of values for <days>, [hours], and [minutes] will set the lease duration for DHCP assigned IP addresses to be infinite until released by the client.

Description This command configures the duration of the lease for an IP address that is assigned from a DHCP server to a DHCP client.

“no” Form no leaseThe “no” form of this command resets the lease time to its default value of one day.

Defaults Days: 1

Example


Summary Set DCHP pool address and mask.



<networknumber>A valid IP address, in dotted decimal notation, identifying a member of the subnet to be configured.

[<mask>]The network mask, in dotted decimal notation, identifying the network portion of the supplied IP address.

[<prefix-length>]The network mask, specified as a whole number representing the number of bits that make up the prefix (for example, 24), where prefix-length is an integer from 0 to 32.

Description This command configures a subnet number and mask for a DHCP address pool on the server.

“no” Form no networkThe “no” form of this command removes the subnet number and mask information.

Defaults None

Example


(Pannaway BAR) (Config-dhcp-pool)#lease 7 12

network <networknumber> [<mask> | <prefix-length>]

(Pannaway BAR) (Config-dhcp-pool)#network 172.16.3.0 24


10-8

10.4DHCP Server Display Commands

10.4 DHCP Server Display CommandsThe following commands display the DHCP Server address bindings and statistics.

Summary Show existing DHCP bindings.



<address>This optional parameter restricts the information presented to one IP address entry in the DHCP bindings table.

Description This command displays MAC address to IP bindings for a specified IP <address> on the DHCP server. If no IP address is specified, the bindings corresponding to all the addresses are displayed.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The following information is displayed in response to the command:

Related Commands client-identifier <uniqueidentifier> on page 10-3hardware-address <hardwareaddress> [type] on page 10-5host <ipaddress> [<mask> | <prefix-length>] on page 10-6lease [<days> [hours] [minutes] | [infinite]] on page 10-6network <networknumber> [<mask> | <prefix-length>] on page 10-7

Summary Show DHCP settings on the BAR.



None

show ip dhcp binding [<address>]

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip dhcp bindingIP address Hardware Address Lease Expiration Type----------- ----------------- ----------------- -----111.222.100.17 00:0a:9f:00:03:1c 00:19:23 Automatic111.222.100.19 00:0a:9f:00:03:1c 00:19:23 Automatic

IP address The IP address leased by the DHCP client.

Hardware Address The MAC address or client identifier of the leasing client.

Lease Expiration The time remaining on the address lease, in HH:MM:SS format.

Type The manner in which the IP address was assigned to the client (automatic or static).

show ip dhcp global configuration


10-9

10.4DHCP Server

DisplayCommands

Description This command displays system-wide configuration for the DHCP server running on the BAR.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example


Related Commands ip dhcp excluded-address <lowaddress> [highaddress] on page 10-2ip dhcp ping packets <packet-count> on page 10-2service dhcp on page 10-1

Summary Show pool configuration information.



{<name>}If a DHCP pool name is supplied, the CLI presents the configuration information for that pool.

{*}The use of the wildcard (asterisk) character in the show dhcp pool configuration command causes the CLI to provide information on all DHCP pools.

Description This command displays configuration information for a DHCP address pool or for all address pools configured on the system if * is specified.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip dhcp global configurationService DHCP................................... EnableNumber of Ping Packets......................... 2Excluded Address............................... 111.222.100.1 to 111.222.100.16

Service DHCP Displays the administrative status of the DHCP server service on the BAR: Enable or Disable.

Number of Ping Packets The maximum number of PINGs that will be sent to verify that an IP address is not already assigned.

Excluded Address The ranges of IP addresses that the DHCP server service should not assign to DHCP clients.

show ip dhcp pool configuration {<name> | *}


10-10

10.4DHCP Server Display Commands

Example

Command Output The following information is shown for every type of DHCP pool:

The following additional field is displayed for a Dynamic DHCP address pool:

The following additional fields are displayed for a Manual DHCP address pool:

Related Commands client-identifier <uniqueidentifier> on page 10-3client-name <name> on page 10-4default-router <address1> [<address2>....<address8>] on page 10-4dns-server <address1> [<address2>....<address8>] on page 10-5hardware-address <hardwareaddress> [type] on page 10-5host <ipaddress> [<mask> | <prefix-length>] on page 10-6ip dhcp pool <name> on page 10-3lease [<days> [hours] [minutes] | [infinite]] on page 10-6network <networknumber> [<mask> | <prefix-length>] on page 10-7

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip dhcp pool configuration *Pool: offnettopPool Type...................................... DynamicNetwork........................................ 111.222.100.0 255.255.255.128Lease Time..................................... 1 days 0 hrs 0 minsDNS Servers.................................... 172.16.1.5

Pool: testPool Type...................................... ManualHardware Address............................... 00:00:1d:ab:cd:efHardware Address Type.......................... ethernetHost........................................... 172.16.99.99 255.255.255.0Lease Time..................................... 1 days 0 hrs 0 mins

Pool The name of the configured pool.

Pool Type The address pool type: Dynamically leased (Dynamic) or statically configured (Manual).

Lease Time The lease expiration time of the IP Address assigned to the client.

DNS Servers The list of DNS servers available to the DHCP client.

Network The network number and the mask for the DHCP address pool.

Hardware Address The hardware address of a DHCP client.

Hardware Address Type The protocol of the hardware platform.

Host The IP address and the mask for a manual binding to a DHCP client.


10-11

10.4DHCP Server

DisplayCommands

Summary Show running statistics for DHCP operation.



None

Description This command displays DHCP server statistics.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The CLI command provides a display of the following statistics:

show ip dhcp server statistics

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip dhcp server statisticsAutomatic Bindings............................. 2Expired Bindings............................... 0Malformed Bindings............................. 0

Messages Received---------- ----------DHCP DISCOVER.................................. 13DHCP REQUEST................................... 13DHCP DECLINE................................... 0DHCP RELEASE................................... 0DHCP INFORM.................................... 2

Messages Sent---------- ------DHCP OFFER..................................... 0DHCP ACK....................................... 0DHCP NACK...................................... 0

Automatic Bindings The number of IP addresses that have been automatically mapped to the MAC addresses of hosts that are found in the DHCP database.

Expired Bindings The number of expired leases.

Malformed Bindings The number of truncated or corrupted messages that were received by the DHCP server.


10-12

10.5DHCP Server Clear Commands

The following statistics are provided for Received Messages:

The following statistics are provided for Sent Messages:

10.5 DHCP Server Clear CommandsThese commands clear the DHCP Server address bindings, and statistics.

Summary Delete DHCP bindings.



<address>This parameter specifies a single IP address, in dotted decimal notation, that the command will delete the bindings for.

<*>If the wildcard (asterisk) parameter is specified, the bindings for all IP addresses on the DHCP server are cleared.

Description This command deletes an automatic address binding from the DHCP server database.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands show ip dhcp binding [<address>] on page 10-8

DHCP DISCOVER The number of DHCP DISCOVER messages that were received by the server.

DHCP REQUEST The number of DHCP REQUEST messages that were received by the server.

DHCP DECLINE The number of DHCP DECLINE messages that were received by the server.

DHCP RELEASE The number of DHCP RELEASE messages that were received by the server.

DHCP INFORM The number of DHCP INFORM messages that were received by the server.

DHCP OFFER The number of DHCP OFFER messages that were sent by the server.

DHCP ACK The number of DHCP ACK (acknowledged) messages that were sent by the server.

DHCP NACK The number of DHCP NACK (not acknowledged) messages that were sent by the server.

clear ip dhcp binding <address | *>

(Pannaway BAR) #clear ip dhcp binding 172.16.1.80


10-13

10.5DHCP Server

ClearCommands

Summary Clear stored DHCP statistics.



None

Description This command clears DHCP server statistics counters.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands show ip dhcp server statistics on page 10-11

clear ip dhcp server statistics

(Pannaway BAR) #clear ip dhcp binding 172.16.1.80


10-14

10.5DHCP Server Clear Commands

Chapter 11Session Control

This chapter describes the commands that control the function of the BAR serial interface (console port) and the operation of Telnet and terminal sessions to and from the BAR.

11.1 Contents of this ChapterThe following topics are discussed in this chapter:

11.2 Session Control CommandsThe commands in this section configure the settings of the BAR’s console interface and inbound and outbound Telnet sessions, as well as providing administrative control over current sessions.

Summary Set the maximum number of remote sessions on the BAR.



<sessions>A number, from 0 to 5, of the maximum number of remote sessions that can be simultaneously active on the BAR.

Description This command specifies the maximum number of remote connection sessions that can be established.

“no” Form no remotecon maxsessionsThe “no” form of this command restores the maximum number of sessions to the default 5.

Defaults Sessions: 5

Topic on page

Session Control Commands 11-1

Session Monitoring and Display Commands 11-9

remotecon maxsessions <sessions>

CAUTION: If the maximum number of sessions is set to 0 (zero), CLI management of the BAR can only be performed through a local console connection.


11-2

11.2Session Control Commands

Example

Related Commands remotecon timeout <timeout> on page 11-2show remotecon on page 11-9transport {output | input} telnet on page 11-5show loginsession on page 11-10

Summary Set idle timeout for remote sessions.



<timeout>The maximum time (in minutes) that an inactive remote Telnet session can remain connected. The range for this parameter is 0 to 160, with a value of 0 indicating an infinite maximum time.

Description This command sets the remote connection session timeout value, in minutes. Once a remote Telnet session passes the timeout value, it is deactivated and disconnected.

“no” Form no remotecon timeoutThe “no” form of this command restores the remote connection session timeout value to the default value of 5 minutes.

Defaults Timeout: 5

Example

Related Commands remotecon maxsessions <sessions> on page 11-1transport {output | input} telnet on page 11-5show loginsession on page 11-10show remotecon on page 11-9

Summary Specify the baud setting of the BAR console port.

Required Mode Line Config


{baud}This value identifies the baud rate of the serial connection. The following bit per second (bps) values may be set for the serial interface’s operation: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200.

Description This command sets the serial baud rate for the BAR management interface.

“no” Form no serial baudrateThe “no” form of this command restores the default communication rate of 9600.

(Pannaway BAR) #remotecon maxsessions 4

remotecon timeout <timeout>

(Pannaway BAR) #remotecon timeout 60

serial baudrate {baud}


11-3

11.2Session Control

Commands

Defaults Baud: 9600

Example

Related Commands show serial on page 11-10

Summary Set idle timeout for BAR local console port.



<timeout>The maximum time (in minutes) that an inactive console session can remain connected. The range for this parameter is 0 to 160, with a value of 0 indicating an infinite maximum time.

Description This command specifies the maximum duration that a local console connection can remain idle (not sending commands or keystrokes) before it is automatically disconnected.

“no” Form no serial timeoutThe “no” form of this command restores the default serial timeout of 5 minutes.

Defaults Timeout: 5

Example

Related Commands show serial on page 11-10show loginsession on page 11-10

Summary Specify the maximum number of outbound telnet sessions.



<0-5>The maximum number of outbound telnet sessions, from 0-5.

Description This command sets the maximum number of outbound telnet sessions. A value of 0 indicates that no outbound telnet sessions are allowed.

“no” Form no session-limitThe “no” form of this command restores the default number of outbound sessions (5).

Defaults Maximum sessions: 5

(Pannaway BAR) (Line) #serial baudrate 57600

serial timeout <timeout>

(Pannaway BAR) (Line) #serial timeout 60

session-limit <0-5>


11-4


Example

Related Commands session-timeout <0-160> on page 11-4transport {output | input} telnet on page 11-5telnet <ip_address> on page 11-6

Summary Specify the timeout value for outbound telnet sessions.



<0-160>The number of minutes an outbound telnet session can be inactive before timing out.

Description This command sets the duration (in minutes) for which an outbound telnet session can be inactive before timing out and exiting the session. A value of 0 indicates the session can be indefinite (not timed out).

“no” Form no session-timeoutThe “no” form of this command restores the default value of 0 (indefinite).

Defaults Timeout duration: 0

Example

Related Commands session-limit <0-5> on page 11-3transport {output | input} telnet on page 11-5telnet <ip_address> on page 11-6

Summary Customize the management screen prompt.



<prompt string>The alphanumeric string that the Pannaway BAR will display as its identifying prompt. The string may be up to 64 characters in length. If the prompt string will contain spaces, the entire string must be enclosed in quotation marks.

Description This command changes the text string that is presented as the command line prompt.

“no” Form None

Defaults Prompt-string: “Pannaway BAR”

(Pannaway BAR) (Line) #session-limit 3

session-timeout <0-160>

(Pannaway BAR) (Line) #session-timeout 30

set prompt <prompt string>


11-5

11.2Session Control

Commands

Example

Summary Enable or disable pagination of output.



None

Description This command activates pagination of output (via the “More” prompt).

“no” Form no pagination displaymodeThe “no” form of this command disables pagination of output.

Defaults Pagination enabled

Example

Summary Activate Telnet session support in the inbound and outbound directions.



{output | input}The direction in which Telnet support is activated (input for inbound; output for outbound).

Description This command enables or disables the establishment of Telnet sessions to or from the BAR. If inbound sessions are enabled, new Telnet sessions can be established until there are no more sessions available.

“no” Form no transport {output | input} telnetThe “no” form of the command disables inbound or outbound Telnet sessions. In this case, no new Telnet sessions may be established. An established session remains active until the session is ended or a network error ends it.


Example

(Pannaway BAR) #set prompt ACME ISP BAR ^% Invalid input detected at ’^’ marker(Pannaway BAR) #set prompt “ACME ISP BAR”(ACME ISP BAR) #

pagination displaymode

(Pannaway BAR) (Config) #pagination displaymode

transport {output | input} telnet

(Pannaway BAR) (Line) #transport input telnet


11-6


Related Commands remotecon maxsessions <sessions> on page 11-1remotecon timeout <timeout> on page 11-2session-limit <0-5> on page 11-3session-timeout <0-160> on page 11-4telnet <ip_address> on page 11-6

Summary Opens a telnet session to a remote host from within the current terminal or remote login session.


User EnteredParameters

<ip_address> The IP address of the host with which you want to open a Telnet session.

Description This command opens a Telnet session between a BAR and a remote host. Telnet is considered insecure communication, because all information is passed across the wire in plain text (including authentication information).

Example

Summary Disconnect an active session.



<sessionID>The session ID number of an active Telnet session on the BAR.

allSupply this parameter to close all active Telnet sessions.

Description This command closes a specified Telnet session, or all active Telnet sessions.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands show loginsession on page 11-10

i

telnet <ip_address>

(Pannaway BAR) # telnet 192.168.199.199Trying 192.168.199.199...

Connected to 192.168.199.199.

(BAS-BX)Username: AdminPassword:

disconnect {<sessionID> | all}

(Pannaway BAR) #disconnect 01


11-7

11.2Session Control

Commands

Summary Create a new user account.



<username>The name of a new user account to be created on the BAR. The account name can be up to eight characters long, and can be comprised of alphanumeric characters as well as the dash (‘-’) and underscore (‘_’). The <username> is not case-sensitive.

Description This command adds a new user account name, if space permits. Up to six user names can be defined.

“no” Form no users name <username>The “no” form of this command deletes the specified account name.

Defaults Two user names are provided by default: admin and guest.

Example

Related Commands users snmpv3 accessmode <username> {readonly | readwrite} on page 13-10users snmpv3 authentication <username> {none | md5 | sha} on page 13-11users snmpv3 encryption <username> {none | des [key]} on page 13-11

Summary Set a password for an existing user account.



<username>The name of an existing user account on the BAR.

Description This command changes the password of the existing user account.

After the <username> parameter is entered, a prompt appears that asks for the user’s existing password. If no password was previously set, press ENTER.

The system then prompts you to enter a new password, and then provides a confirmation prompt. If the new password and confirmation entries match, a message is displayed that indicates the operation was successful.

A user password should not be more than eight characters in length. If a user is authorized for authentication or encryption is enabled, the password must be the full eight characters. The username and password are not case-sensitive.

“no” Form no users passwd <username>The “no” form of this command resets (blanks-out) a user’s existing password. The “no” form of the command also requires confirmation of the change.

users name <username>

NOTE: The default “admin” user account cannot be deleted.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#users name FIELD

users passwd <username>


11-8


Defaults None

Example

Related Commands users name <username> on page 11-7show users on page 11-11

Summary Allow access to BAR Java management applet functions.



None

Description This command specifies that the BAR should allow access to the Java applet in the header frame of the Web interface. When access is enabled, the Java applet can be viewed from the Web interface.

“no” Form no network javamodeThe “no” form of this command disallows access to the Java applet in the header frame of the Web interface. When access is disabled, the user cannot use the Java management applet.


Example

Related Commands show network on page 3-10

Summary Clear all passwords.




Description This command resets all user passwords to the factory defaults without powering off the switch. You are prompted to confirm that the password reset should proceed.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#users passwd FIELD

Enter old password:

Enter new password:******

Confirm new password:******Password Changed!

network javamode

(Pannaway BAR) #network javamode

clear pass [yes]


11-9

11.3Session

Monitoring andDisplay

Commands

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands users passwd <username> on page 11-7

11.3 Session Monitoring and Display CommandsThe commands in this section provide statistics and configuration information related to Telnet and serial console connections to the BAR.

Summary Show the BAR remote session support configuration.



None

Description This command displays remote connection (Telnet) settings.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output: The following commands are shown in response to the show remotecon command:

Related Commands remotecon maxsessions <sessions> on page 11-1remotecon timeout <timeout> on page 11-2transport {output | input} telnet on page 11-5

(Pannaway BAR) #clear pass

Are you sure you want to reset all passwords? (y/n)y

Passwords Reset!

show remotecon

(Pannaway BAR) #show remotecon

Remote Connection Login Timeout (minutes)................. 60Maximum Number of Remote Connection Sessions.............. 5Allow New Telnet Sessions................................. Yes

Remote Connection Login Timeout (minutes)

Indicates the number of minutes (0-160) a remote connection session is allowed to remain inactive before being logged off. A zero means there will be no timeout.

Maximum Number of Remote Connection Sessions

The number of simultaneous remote connection sessions allowed (0-5; the factory default is 5).

Allow New Telnet Sessions Indicates whether remote connection sessions are allowed (Yes) or disallowed (No) when an existing session is in progress.


11-10

11.3Session Monitoring and Display Commands

Summary Show the BAR console port settings.



None

Description This command displays serial communication settings for the switch.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example


Related Commands serial baudrate {baud} on page 11-2serial timeout <timeout> on page 11-3

Summary Show a summary of active Telnet and console port sessions.



None

Description This command displays current Telnet and serial port connections to the switch.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

show serial

(Pannaway BAR) #show serialSerial Port Login Timeout (minutes)............ 5Baud Rate (bps)................................ 9600Character Size (bits).......................... 8Flow Control................................... DisableStop Bits...................................... 1Parity......................................... none

Serial Port Login Timeout (minutes)

Indicates the time, in minutes, of inactivity on a Serial port connection before the connection is closed.

Baud Rate (bps) The default baud rate at which the serial port will try to connect.

Character Size (bits) The number of bits in a character. The number of bits is always 8.

Flow Control Indicates that Hardware Flow-Control is disabled (factory set).

Stop Bits The number of Stop bits per character; this is always set to 1.

Parity The Parity Method used on the Serial Port (always set to None).

show loginsession


11-11

11.3Session

Monitoring andDisplay

Commands

Example

Command Output: The following information is shown in the log session table:

Summary Show the list of configured user accounts.



None

Description This command displays the configured user names and their settings. This command is only available for users with read/write privileges. The SNMPv3 fields will only be displayed if SNMP is available on the system.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

(Pannaway BAR) #show loginsession

ID User Name Connection From Idle Time Session Time-- --------------- --------------- ------------ ------------01 Admin 172.16.1.187 00:00:00 01:06:5902 FIELD EIA-232 00:02:15 00:45:12

ID Login Session ID.

User Name The name the user used to login using the serial port or Telnet.

Connection From IP address of the Telnet client machine or EIA-232 for the serial port connection.

Idle Time Time this session has been idle.

Session Time Total time this session has been connected.

show users

(Pannaway BAR) #show users

SNMPv3 SNMPv3 SNMPv3User Name User Access Mode Access Mode Authentication Encryption---------- ---------------- ----------- -------------- ----------admin Read/Write Read/Write None Noneguest Read Only Read Only None None


11-12

11.3Session Monitoring and Display Commands

Command Output: The following information is shown for each user account:

Related Commands users name <username> on page 11-7users snmpv3 accessmode <username> {readonly | readwrite} on page 13-10users snmpv3 authentication <username> {none | md5 | sha} on page 13-11users snmpv3 encryption <username> {none | des [key]} on page 13-11

User Name The name used to login via the serial port, Telnet or Web.

User Access Mode Indicates the operator’s access level: Read/Write (able to change parameters on the switch) or Read Only (only able to view switch parameters).

SNMPv3 Access Mode Displays the SNMPv3 Access Mode. If the value is Read/Write, the SNMPv3 user can set and retrieve parameters on the system. If the value is set to Read Only, the SNMPv3 user can only retrieve parameter information. The SNMPv3 access mode may be different than the CLI and Web access mode.

SNMPv3 Authentication Displays the authentication protocol assigned to the specified login user.

SNMPv3 Encryption Displays the encryption protocol assigned to the specified login user.

Chapter 12HTTP and SSH Configuration

This chapter provides configuration information for Secure Shell and Secure Hyper Text Transfer Protocol operation on the BAR.

12.1 Contents of this ChapterThe following information and command groups are described in this chapter:

12.2 Secure HTTP CommandsThe commands in this section configure and administer the Secure Hyper Text Transfer Protocol (Secure HTTP) on the BAR.

Summary Set Secure Socket Layer Transport (SSLT) port.



<portid>The port ID number that will be used as the Secure HTTP port. Valid values for this parameter are from 1 to 65,535.

Description This command is used to set the Secure HTTP port.

“no” Form no ip http secure-port <portid>The “no” form of the command is used to set the sslt port value back to the default of 443.

Defaults Portid: 443

Example

Topic on page

Secure HTTP Commands 12-1

Secure Shell (SSH) Commands 12-4

ip http secure-port <portid>

(Pannaway BAR) #ip http secure-port 571


12-2

12.2Secure HTTP Commands

Related Commands ip http secure-protocol [SSL 3] [TLS1] on page 12-2ip http secure-server on page 12-2ip http server on page 12-3

Summary Set the version(s) of Secure HTTP supported on the BAR.



[SSL3]Enter this parameter to configure the BAR for Secure Socket Layer 3 (SSL3) protocol support.

[TLS1]Enter this parameter to set up the BAR to support the Transport Layer Security protocol.

Description This command is used to set protocol levels (versions). The protocol level can be set to TLS1, SSL3 or to both TLS1 and SSL3.

“no” Form no ip http secure-protocolThe “no” form of the command is used to remove protocol levels (versions) for secure HTTP.

Defaults Supports both SSL3 and TLS1

Example

Related Commands ip http secure-server on page 12-2ip http server on page 12-3

Summary Enable Secure HTTP operation on the BAR.



None

Description This command is used to enable the secure socket layer for secure HTTP.

“no” Form no ip http secure-serverThe “no” form of the command is used to disable the secure socket layer for secure HTTP.


Example

ip http secure-protocol [SSL 3] [TLS1]

(Pannaway BAR) #ip http secure-protocol tls1

ip http secure-server

(Pannaway BAR) #ip http secure-server


12-3

12.2Secure HTTP

Commands

Related Commands ip http secure-port <portid> on page 12-1ip http secure-protocol [SSL 3] [TLS1] on page 12-2show ip http on page 12-3

Summary Enable browser access to the BAR.



None

Description This command enables access to the switch through the Web interface. When access is enabled, the user can log in to the switch from the Web interface.

“no” Form no ip http serverThe “no” form of the command is used to disable access to the switch through the Web interface. When access is disabled, the user cannot log in to the switch’s Web server.


Example

Related Commands ip http secure-port <portid> on page 12-1ip http secure-protocol [SSL 3] [TLS1] on page 12-2ip http secure-server on page 12-2show ip http on page 12-3

Summary Show the HTTP settings for the BAR.



None

Description This command displays the HTTP settings for the switch.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

ip http server

CAUTION: Disabling the Web interface takes effect immediately. All interfaces are affected.

(Pannaway BAR) #ip http server

show ip http


12-4

12.3Secure Shell (SSH) Commands

Example

Command Output: The following information is presented in response to the show ip http command:

Related Commands ip http secure-port <portid> on page 12-1ip http secure-protocol [SSL 3] [TLS1] on page 12-2ip http secure-server on page 12-2ip http server on page 12-3

12.3 Secure Shell (SSH) CommandsThe BAR supports the use of the Secure Shell protocol. The following commands provide control over the SSH settings of the BAR, and show the SSH configuration of the BAR.

Summary Enable SSH protocol support.



None

Description This command is used to enable SSH (Secure Shell protocol for remote communications).

“no” Form no ip sshThe “no” form of the command is used to disable SSH.


Example

Related Commands ip ssh protocol [1] [2] on page 12-5show ip ssh on page 12-5

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip http

HTTP Mode (Unsecure): Disabled

HTTP Mode (Secure): EnabledSecure Port: 443Secure Protocol Level(s): TLS1 SSL3

HTTP Mode (Unsecure) Indicates whether the HTTP mode is enabled or disabled.

HTTP Mode (Secure) Indicates whether the administrative mode of secure HTTP is enabled or disabled.

Secure Port Indicates the port configured for SSLT.

Secure Protocol Level Indicates the secure HTTP protocol level: SSL3, TLS1, or both SSL3 and TLS1.

ip ssh

(Pannaway BAR) #ip ssh


12-5

12.3Secure Shell

(SSH)Commands

Summary Set the supported protocol level for SSH.



[1]Enter this parameter to configure the BAR for SSH1 protocol support.

[2]Enter this parameter to configure the BAR for SSH2 protocol support.

Description This command is used to set or remove protocol levels (or versions) for SSH. Either SSH1, SSH2, or both SSH1 and SSH2 can be set.

“no” Form None

Defaults Both SSH1 and SSH2 supported

Example

Related Commands ip ssh on page 12-4show ip ssh on page 12-5

Summary Show SSH settings of the BAR.



None

Description This command displays the current SSH settings.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

ip ssh protocol [1] [2]

(Pannaway BAR) #ip ssh protocol 1 2

show ip ssh

(Pannaway BAR) #show ip ssh

Administrative Mode Protocol Level(s) SSH Connections-------------------- ----------------- ---------------Enabled Versions 1 and 2 0


12-6

12.3Secure Shell (SSH) Commands


Related Commands ip ssh on page 12-4ip ssh protocol [1] [2] on page 12-5

Administrative Mode Indicates whether the administrative mode of SSH is enabled or disabled.

Protocol Level Indicates the SSH protocol level: version 1, version 2 or both versions 1 and version 2.

Connections Displays the current SSH connections.

Chapter 13SNMP Commands

This chapter describes the configuration and monitoring of Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) settings on the BAR.

13.1 Contents of this ChapterThe following topics are presented in this chapter:

13.2 SNMP Configuration CommandsThe commands in this section control the operation of the Simple Network Management Protocol on the BAR. This includes the configuration of SNMP communities, the activation or deactivation of certain traps, and the configuration of trap destinations.

Summary Add an SNMP community.



<name>The community name of the new SNMP community. This value may be up to 16 case-sensitive alphanumeric characters.

Description This command adds (and names) up to six new SNMP communities. A community name is a name associated with the switch and with a set of SNMP managers that manage it with a specified privileged level. The case-sensitive name can be up to 16 characters long.

Topic on page

SNMP Configuration Commands 13-1

SNMP Display Commands 13-12

snmp-server community <name>

NOTE: Community names in the SNMP community table must be unique. If you make multiple entries using the same community name, the first entry is kept and processed and all duplicate entries are ignored.


13-2

13.2SNMP Configuration Commands

“no” Form no snmp-server community <name>The “no” form of this command deletes the specified SNMP community name from the table.

Defaults Two community names are configured by default: public and private.

Example

Related Commands snmp-server community ipaddr <ipaddr> <name> on page 13-2snmp-server community ipmask <ipmask> <name> on page 13-3snmp-server community mode <name> on page 13-3snmp-server community ro <name> on page 13-4snmp-server community rw <name> on page 13-5show snmpcommunity on page 13-12

Summary Specify allowable IP addresses for a community.



<ipaddr>The client IP address for the SNMP community.

<name>The name of an existing SNMP community.

Description This command sets a client IP address for an SNMP community. The address is the associated community SNMP packet sending address and is used along with the client IP mask value to denote a range of IP addresses from which SNMP clients may use that community to access the device. A value of 0.0.0.0 allows access from any IP address. Otherwise, this value is ANDed with the snmp-server community mask to determine the range of allowed client IP addresses. The name is the applicable community name.

“no” Form no snmp-server community ipaddr <ipaddr> <name>The “no” form of this command deletes the specified SNMP community client IP address.

Defaults IP address: 0.0.0.0

Example

Related Commands snmp-server community <name> on page 13-1snmp-server community ipmask <ipmask> <name> on page 13-3snmp-server community mode <name> on page 13-3snmp-server community ro <name> on page 13-4snmp-server community rw <name> on page 13-5show snmpcommunity on page 13-12

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server community TECH

snmp-server community ipaddr <ipaddr> <name>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server community ipaddr 172.16.1.187 TECH


13-3

13.2SNMP


Summary Set the client mask for an SNMP community.



<ipmask>The network mask that defines the network portion of the SNMP community’s IP address.


Description This command sets a client IP mask for an SNMP community. The address is the associated community SNMP packet sending address and is used along with the client IP address value to denote a range of IP addresses from which SNMP clients may use that community to access the device. A value of 255.255.255.255 will restrict access to only the station specified in the snmp-server community ipaddr command. A value of 0.0.0.0 will allow access from any IP address. Masks between these extremes provide access to stations in various subnets of the specified IP address. The name is the applicable community name.

“no” Form no snmp-server community ipmask <ipmask> <name>The “no” form of this command deletes the specified SNMP community client IP mask.

Defaults Mask: 0.0.0.0

Example

Related Commands snmp-server community <name> on page 13-1snmp-server community ipaddr <ipaddr> <name> on page 13-2snmp-server community mode <name> on page 13-3snmp-server community ro <name> on page 13-4snmp-server community rw <name> on page 13-5show snmpcommunity on page 13-12

Summary Activate an SNMP community.



<name>The name of an existing, but inactive SNMP community.

Description This command activates an SNMP community. If a community is enabled, an SNMP manager associated with this community manages the switch according to its access right.

snmp-server community ipmask <ipmask> <name>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server community ipmask 255.255.255.0 TECH

snmp-server community mode <name>


13-4


“no” Form no snmp-server community mode <name>The “no” form of this command disables the specified SNMP community. If the community is disabled, no SNMP requests using this community are accepted. In this case the SNMP manager associated with this community cannot manage the switch until the Status is changed back to Enable.

Defaults The default private and public communities are enabled by default. The four undefined communities are disabled by default.

Example

Related Commands snmp-server community <name> on page 13-1snmp-server community ipaddr <ipaddr> <name> on page 13-2snmp-server community ipmask <ipmask> <name> on page 13-3snmp-server community ro <name> on page 13-4snmp-server community rw <name> on page 13-5show snmpcommunity on page 13-12

Summary Set community access to Read Only mode.



<name>

The name of an existing SNMP community.

Description This command restricts SNMP sessions from the named community to viewing configuration settings only. The access mode is read-only (also called public).

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands snmp-server community <name> on page 13-1snmp-server community ipaddr <ipaddr> <name> on page 13-2snmp-server community ipmask <ipmask> <name> on page 13-3snmp-server community mode <name> on page 13-3snmp-server community rw <name> on page 13-5show snmpcommunity on page 13-12

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server community mode TECH

snmp-server community ro <name>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server community ro TECH


13-5

13.2SNMP


Summary Set community access to Read-Write.




Description This command assigns both monitoring (configuration display) and management (configuration change) permissions to the named group. This access mode is read/write (also called private).

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands snmp-server community <name> on page 13-1snmp-server community ipaddr <ipaddr> <name> on page 13-2snmp-server community ipmask <ipmask> <name> on page 13-3snmp-server community mode <name> on page 13-3snmp-server community ro <name> on page 13-4show snmpcommunity on page 13-12

Summary Enable SNMP traps.



None

Description This command enables the Authentication failure trap.

“no” Form no snmp-server enable trapsThe “no” form of this command disables the Authentication Flag.

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands show trapflags on page 13-14

snmp-server community rw <name>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server community rw TECH

snmp-server enable traps

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server enable traps


13-6


Summary Enable the generation of broadcast storm traps.



None

Description This command enables the broadcast storm trap. When enabled, broadcast storm traps are sent only if the broadcast storm recovery mode setting associated with the port is enabled.

“no” Form no snmp-server enable traps bcaststormThe “no” form of this command disables the broadcast storm trap.


Example


Summary Enable link mode traps.



None

Description This command enables Link Up/Down traps for the entire switch. When enabled, link traps are sent only if the Link Trap flag setting associated with the port is enabled (see ‘snmp trap link-status’ command).

“no” Form no snmp-server enable traps linkmodeThe “no” form of this command disables Link Up/Down traps for the entire switch.


Example

Related Commands show trapflags on page 13-14snmp trap link-status on page 13-9

snmp-server enable traps bcaststorm

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server enable traps bcaststorm

snmp-server enable traps linkmode

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server enable traps linkmode


13-7

13.2SNMP


Summary Enable multi-user traps.



None

Description This command enables Multiple User traps. When the Multiple User Trap is enabled, a trap is sent when a user logs in to the terminal interface (EIA 232 or Telnet) and there is an existing terminal interface session.

“no” Form no snmp-server enable traps multiusersThe “no” form of this command disables the Multiple User Trap.


Example


Summary Enable spanning tree protocol traps.



None

Description This command enables the sending of new root traps and topology change notification traps.

“no” Form no snmp-server enable traps stpmodeThe “no” form of the command disables the sending of new root traps and topology change notification traps.


Example


snmp-server enable traps multiusers

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server enable traps multiusers

snmp-server enable traps stpmode

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server enable traps stpmode


13-8


Summary Define an SNMP trap receiving station.




<ipaddr>An IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the SNMP trap receiving station.

Description This command adds an SNMP trap destination community, identified by the combination of a community name and IP address.

“no” Form no snmptrap <name> <ipaddr>The “no” form of the command deletes the specified SNMP trap community.

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands show snmptrap on page 13-13snmptrap ipaddr <name> <ipaddrold> <ipaddrnew> on page 13-8snmptrap mode <name> <ipaddr> on page 13-9

Summary Set a new IP address for a trap receiving station.




<ipaddrold>The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the previous SNMP trap station.

<ipaddrnew>The new IP address, in dotted decimal notation, for the SNMP trap station.

Description This command assigns a new IP address to a specified trap receipt station with a previously associated IP address.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

snmptrap <name> <ipaddr>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmptrap MONITOR 172.16.1.187

snmptrap ipaddr <name> <ipaddrold> <ipaddrnew>

NOTE: IP addresses in the SNMP trap receiver table must be unique. If you make multiple entries using the same IP address, the first entry is retained and processed. All duplicate entries are ignored.


13-9

13.2SNMP


Example

Related Commands show snmptrap on page 13-13snmptrap ipaddr <name> <ipaddrold> <ipaddrnew> on page 13-8snmptrap mode <name> <ipaddr> on page 13-9

Summary Activate the sending of traps to the community.




<ipaddr>An IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of the SNMP trap destination.

Description This command enables the sending of SNMP trap to a designated community of receivers. Enabled trap receivers are active (able to receive traps).

“no” Form no snmptrap mode <name> <ipaddr> The “no” form of this command disables the sending of SNMP traps to a designated community of receivers. Disabled trap receivers are inactive (not able to receive traps).

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands show snmptrap on page 13-13snmptrap <name> <ipaddr> on page 13-8snmptrap ipaddr <name> <ipaddrold> <ipaddrnew> on page 13-8

Summary Enable link status traps.



None

Description This command enables Link Up/Down traps for the selected interface.

“no” Form no snmp trap link-statusThe “no” form of this command disables Link Up/Down traps for the interface.


(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmptrap ipaddr MONITOR 172.16.1.187 172.16.1.189

snmptrap mode <name> <ipaddr>

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmptrap mode MONITOR 172.16.1.187

snmp trap link-status


13-10


Example

Related Commands snmp-server enable traps linkmode on page 13-6show port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-36

Summary Enable the generation of link status traps.



None

Description This command enables Link Up/Down traps for all interfaces on the BAR.

“no” Form no snmp trap link-status allThe “no” form of this command disables Link Up/Down traps for the interface.


Example

Related Commands snmp-server enable traps linkmode on page 13-6show port {<slot/port> | all} on page 4-36

Summary Configure the SNMPv3 access level provided to a user.



<username>A login name on the BAR.

{readonly | readwrite}The control setting for the SNMPv3 user: Read Only (can view information) or Read-Write (can view information and change settings).

Description This command specifies the snmpv3 access privileges for the specified login user.

“no” Form no users snmpv3 accessmode <username>The “no” form of this command sets the snmpv3 access privileges for the specified login <username> as readwrite for admin user; readonly for all other users.

Defaults Control setting: readwrite for admin user; readonly for all other users

(Pannaway BAR) (Interface 0/1)#snmp trap link-status

snmp trap link-status all

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp trap link-status all

users snmpv3 accessmode <username> {readonly | readwrite}


13-11

13.2SNMP


Example


Summary Set authentication for SNMPv3 users.




{none | md5 | sha}The authentication protocol the user will be required to use to log in.

Description This command specifies the authentication protocol to be used for the specified login user. The valid authentication protocols are none, md5 or sha. If md5 or sha are specified, the user login password will be used as the snmpv3 authentication password.

“no” Form no users snmpv3 authentication <username>The “no” form of this command sets the authentication protocol for the specified user to none (the default setting).

Defaults No authentication

Example


Summary Set the encryption method for an SNMPv3 user.




(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#users snmpv3 accessmode FIELD readwrite

users snmpv3 authentication <username> {none | md5 | sha}

NOTE: If the user password is shorter than eight characters, you receive an error message when attempting to change the authentication protocol to md5 or sha, as shown in the second example below. The password must be exactly eight characters for these methods.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#users snmpv3 authentication FIELD md5

Error! Cannot enable authentication when password is less than 8 characters in length.

users snmpv3 encryption <username> {none | des [key]}


13-12

13.3SNMP Display Commands

{none | des [key]}The encryption type the user will be required to use to log in. If “des” is supplied, an encryption password of up to 16 characters must also be provided. If the des protocol is specified but a key is not provided, the user will be prompted for the key.

Description This command specifies the encryption protocol and key to be used for the specified login user. The valid encryption protocols are none or des.

“no” Form no users snmpv3 encryption <username>The “no” form of this command sets the encryption protocol to none (the default setting).

Defaults No encryption

Example

Related Commands

13.3 SNMP Display CommandsThe commands shown and described in this section provide information about SNMP configuration and settings on the BAR.

Summary Show SNMP communities.



None

Description This command displays SNMP community information. Up to six SNMP communities are supported. The SNMP agent of the BAR complies with SNMP Version 1. The SNMP agent sends traps through TCP/IP to an external SNMP manager based on the SNMP configuration (the trap receiver and other SNMP community parameters).

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#users snmpv3 encryption FIELD des

Enter encryption key: ********

show snmpcommunity

(Pannaway BAR) #show snmpcommunitySNMP Community Name Client IP Address Client IP Mask Access Mode Status------------------- ----------------- ----------------- ----------- --------public 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Read Only Enableprivate 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Read/Write EnableTECH 172.16.1.187 255.255.255.0 Read/Write Enable


13-13

13.3SNMP Display

Commands

Command Output: The following information is shown for each configured SNMP community:

Related Commands snmp-server community <name> on page 13-1snmp-server community ipaddr <ipaddr> <name> on page 13-2snmp-server community ipmask <ipmask> <name> on page 13-3snmp-server community mode <name> on page 13-3snmp-server community ro <name> on page 13-4snmp-server community rw <name> on page 13-5

Summary Show configured SNMP trap receivers.



None

Description This command displays SNMP trap receivers. Trap messages are sent across a network to these trap receivers. These messages alert the manager to events occurring within the switch or on the network. The BAR simultaneously supports up to six trap receivers.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

SNMP Community Name The community string to which this entry grants access. Each row of this table contains a unique community name.

Client IP Address An IP address (or portion thereof) from which this device will accept SNMP packets with the associated community. The requesting entity’s IP address is ANDed with the Subnet Mask before being compared to the IP Address. Note that if the Subnet Mask is set to 0.0.0.0, an IP Address of 0.0.0.0 matches all IP addresses.

Client IP Mask A mask to be ANDed with the requesting entity’s IP address before comparison with IP Address. If the result matches with IP Address then the address is an authenticated IP address. For example, if the IP Address = 9.47.128.0 and the corresponding Subnet Mask = 255.255.255.0 a range of incoming IP addresses would match, i.e. the incoming IP Address could equal 9.47.128.0 - 9.47.128.255.

Access Mode The access level for this community string (“Read Only” or ”Read/Write”).

Status The status (Enabled/Disabled) of this community access entry.

show snmptrap

(Pannaway BAR) #show snmptrap

SNMP Trap Name IP Address Status------------------- ----------------- --------MONITOR 172.16.1.187 Enable


13-14



Related Commands snmptrap <name> <ipaddr> on page 13-8snmptrap ipaddr <name> <ipaddrold> <ipaddrnew> on page 13-8snmptrap mode <name> <ipaddr> on page 13-9

Summary Show the status of trap flags.



None

Description This command displays which traps are configured to be enabled (sent) or disabled (not sent). If a trap condition is enabled and the condition is detected, the switch’s SNMP agent sends the trap to all enabled trap receivers. The switch does not have to be reset to implement the changes. Cold and warm start traps are always generated and cannot be disabled.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output: The following information is shown in response to the show trapflags command:

SNMP Trap Name The community string of the SNMP trap packet sent to the trap manager.

IP Address The IP address of the trap manager device (SNMP network management station).

Status Indicates whether trap forwarding to the indicated trap manager is active (enable) or inactive (disable).

show trapflags

(Pannaway BAR) #show trapflags

Authentication Flag............................ EnableLink Up/Down Flag.............................. EnableMultiple Users Flag............................ EnableSpanning Tree Flag............................. EnableBroadcast Storm Flag........................... EnableDVMRP Traps.................................... DisableOSPF Traps..................................... DisablePIM Traps...................................... Disable

Authentication Flag Indicates whether authentication failure traps will be sent; the default is enabled.

Link Up/Down Flag Indicates whether link status traps will be sent; the default is enabled.

Multiple Users Flag Indicates whether a trap will be sent when the same user ID is logged into the switch more than once at the same time (either via Telnet or serial port). The default is enabled.


13-15

13.3SNMP Display

Commands

Related Commands snmp-server enable traps on page 13-5snmp-server enable traps bcaststorm on page 13-6snmp-server enable traps linkmode on page 13-6snmp-server enable traps multiusers on page 13-7snmp-server enable traps stpmode on page 13-7

Spanning Tree Flag Indicates whether spanning tree traps will be sent; the default is enabled.

Broadcast Storm Flag Indicates whether broadcast storm traps will be sent; the default is enabled.

DVMRP Traps Indicates whether DVMRP traps will be sent; the default is disabled.

OSPF Traps Indicates whether OSPF traps will be sent; the default is disabled.

PIM Traps Indicates whether PIM traps will be sent; the default is disabled.


13-16


Chapter 14Access Control Lists

This chapter describes the commands used to configure Access Control Lists, or Access Lists, on the BAR. Access Control Lists allow or deny passage of packets through the Broadband Aggregation Router based on criteria specified during list creation. The criteria for an Access Control List can be based on the protocols, source locations, destinations, groups, or subscriber identifications of the packet or message being filtered.

14.1 ACL Control CommandsThe following commands are used to create a normal or extended ACL list entry, assign ACL entries to a particular port or all ports on the BAR, and view existing ACL configurations.

Summary Create a new normal access control list.



<accesslistnumber>The number of the Access Control List being created. The acceptable range for normal Access Control Lists is from 1 - 99.

{deny | permit}This parameter identifies the type of list being created. If deny is specified, the list will block access to packets meeting the specified criteria, while allowing all others. If permit is provided for this parameter, the list will permit access only to packets meeting the additional criteria, and deny all others.

{every | <srcip> <srcmask>}The ending parameter provides the criteria for the Access Control List. The parameter indicates if the Access Control List should filter for every packet, or only those originating from the network identified by the combination of a Source IP Address <srcip> and Source Subnet Mask <srcmask> supplied.

Description This command creates a new normal Access Control List on the BAR. This control list provides a rule for allowing or denying access to the BAR for received traffic.

NOTE: Access Control Lists are implemented in the inbound direction only. The BAR does not support Access Control Lists for outbound traffic.

access-list <accesslistnumber> {deny | permit} {every | <srcip> <srcmask>}


14-2

14.1ACL Control Commands

“no” Form no accesslist <accesslistnumber>The “no” form of this command deletes the specified Access Control List from the BAR.

Defaults None

Example

Summary Create an extended Access Control List entry.



<accesslistnumber>

The number of the Access Control List being created. The acceptable range for extended Access Control Lists is from 100 - 199.

{deny | permit}This parameter identifies the type of list being created. If deny is specified, the list will block access to packets meeting the specified criteria, while allowing all others. If permit is provided for this parameter, the list will permit access only to packets meeting the additional criteria, and deny all others.

{every | icmp | igmp | ip | tcp | udp | <protocolnumber>}The selection provided in this parameter indicates the type of protocol that the filter is examining packets from. If “every” is selected, the ACL will permit or deny every packet, regardless of origin. If one of the named protocols (ICMP, IGMP, IP, TCP, or UDP) or the IANA-assigned well-known protocol number (from 0-255) is specified, the ACL will permit or deny packets from the specified protocol.

<srcip>The IP address, in Dotted Decimal Notation (DDN), of a source station on the network the extended ACL applies to.

<srcmask>The mask, in DDN, that identifies the network portion of the source IP address the ACL applies to.

{<srcL4portnumber> | <srcportkey>}The Layer 4 port number (an integer from 0 to 65,535 representing a well-known port number), or the source port keyword (options are domain, echo, ftp, ftpdata, smtp, snmp, Telnet, tftp, and www) that will be filtered by the ACL.

<dstip>The IP address, in DDN, of the destination station that the extended ACL will control traffic to.

<dstmask>The subnet mask, in DDN format, that identifies the network portion of the destination IP address specified for the ACL.

<Pannaway BAR (config)# access-list 1 deny 192.161.10.1 255.255.255.0

access-list <accesslistnumber> {deny | permit} {every | icmp | igmp | ip | tcp | udp | <protocolnumber>} <srcip> <srcmask> [eq {<srcl4portnumber> | <srcportkey>}] <dstip> <dstmask> [eq {<dstl4portnumber> | <dstportkey>}] [precedence <precedence> | tos <tos> <tosmask> | dscp <dscp>]


14-3

14.1ACL ControlCommands

{<dstL4portnumber> | <dstportkey>}The Layer 4 port number (an integer from 0 to 65535 representing a well-known port number), or the destination port keyword (options are domain, echo, ftp, ftpdata, smtp, snmp, telnet, tftp, and www) that will be filtered by the ACL.

[precedence <precedence> | tos <tos> <tosmask> | dscp <dscp>]The Service Type that the ACL will filter traffic for. The <precedence> parameter is an IP preference value from 1 to 7. The <tos> is a Type of Service in hexadecimal format (from 00 to FF), accompanied by the TOS’ mask value (also in hexadecimal format). A Differentiated Service Control Point can be selected as an option, in which case the DSCP number, an integer from 0 to 63, must be supplied.

Description This command creates an extended Access Control List on the BAR. The Access Control List provides a number of criteria for filtering traffic received by the BAR, which are used to determine if the traffic should be permitted or denied.

“no” Form no access list <accesslistnumber>The “no” form of this command deletes the specified extended Access Control List.

Defaults None

Example

Summary Attach an Access Control List to the current interface.



<accesslistnumber>The number of the normal or extended Access Control List being assigned to the interface. The acceptable range for this parameter is from 1 - 199, and the number provided must match an existing Access Control List on the BAR.

{in | out}The selection of what type of traffic the Access Control List applies to; inbound or outbound.

Description This command attaches the specified Access Control List to the currently selected interface of the BAR.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

(Pannaway BAR (config)#access-list 125 deny ip 172.16.99.55 255.255.0.0 eq telnet 172.16.99.1 255.255.0.0 eq telnet

ip access-group <accesslistnumber> {in | out}

NOTE: The same Access Control List can be assigned to more than one interface, but each interface may only have one active ACL at a time. If an ACL is assigned to a port with an existing ACL, the new assignment is discarded and an error message is returned.

(Pannaway BAR (Interface 0/3)#ip access-group 101 in


14-4


Summary Assign a single Access Control List to all BAR interfaces.



<accesslistnumber>The number of the normal or extended Access Control List being assigned to the interface. The acceptable range for this parameter is from 1 - 199, and the number provided must match an existing Access Control List on the BAR.

Description This command assigns a single Access Control List to all BAR interfaces.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Summary Show the configuration of an existing ACL.



<accesslistnumber>

The number of an existing normal or extended Access Control List on the BAR. The acceptable range for this parameter is from 1 - 199.

Description Submitting this command causes the BAR to display a table of the Access Control List’s configuration and settings.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

ip access-group all <accesslistnumber> in

NOTE: Each interface may only have one active ACL at a time. If an ACL is assigned to a port with an existing ACL, the new assignment is discarded and an error message is returned.

<Pannaway BAR (config) #ip access-group all 101 in

show ip access-lists <accesslistnumber>


14-5

14.1ACL ControlCommands

Example


(Pannaway BAR) #show ip access-lists 100ACL ID: 100Direction: inboundInterface: 0/1

Match Precedence 1Action......................................... denyMatch All...................................... FALSEIP DSCP........................................ 0x1

Match Precedence 2Action......................................... denyMatch All...................................... FALSEIP Precedence.................................. 1

Match Precedence 3Action......................................... denyMatch All...................................... FALSEIP TOS......................................... TOS Bits: 0xff TOS Mask: 0xff

Match Precedence 4Action......................................... deny

Match All...................................... FALSEDestination L4 Port Keyword.................... 80(www/http)

Match Precedence 5Action......................................... denyMatch All...................................... FALSEDestination L4 Port Keyword.................... 100IP DSCP........................................ 0x14

ACL ID The index assigned to the ACL list entry.

Match Precedence The order in which the rule is applied.

Action The action associated with the rule: deny (discard packet) or permit (allow packet).

Protocol The protocol to filter for the rule.

Source IP Address The source IP address specified in the rule.

Source IP Mask The associated subnet mask for the source IP.

Source L4 Port Keyword The keyword identifying the source filtering port (if used).

Source L4 Port The layer-4 port number identifying the filtered source port (if used).

Destination IP Address The destination IP address specified in the rule.

Destination IP Mask The associated subnet mask for the destination IP.

Destination L4 Port Keyword The keyword identifying the destination filtering port (if used).

Destination L4 Port The layer-4 port number identifying the filtered destination port (if used).


14-6


IP Precedence If used, the IP precedence setting (1– 7).

IP TOS If used, the settings for TOS Bits and TOS Mask (displayed and set in hexadecimal).

IP DSCP If used, the setting of the IP DSCP bits (displayed in hexadecimal, although set in decimal).

Chapter 15Device Utilities

This chapter provides information and descriptions of various commands that control the general configuration and characteristics of the BAR.

The BAR provides commands that offer control over BAR operation and configuration, but which are not concerned with a particular network protocol or operational aspect. These commands are presented and described in this chapter.

15.1 Utility CommandsThe commands in this section provide control over the configuration, memory, and operation of the BAR, show general configuration information, and clear or display logged data.

System Identification Commands

Use the following commands to set and display the SNMP System Group information for the BAR. The SNMP MIB-II System Group settings provide information that is used by a network or element management system (such as Pannaway’s Broadband Access Manager) to identify an IP network device within its community.

Summary Assign custom name, location, and contact information to the BAR.



<name>An alphanumeric name, up to 31 characters in length (including any spaces), that will be used to identify the BAR to management sessions and logs.

<location>A description of the location (address, office, rack, or other location) that the BAR resides in. This field may be up to 31 characters in length, and is subject to the same restrictions as the <name> parameter, described above.

<contact>A name, email address, or telephone number of the primary service contact for the BAR or the facility. This field may be up to 31 characters in length, and is subject to the same restrictions as the <name> parameter, described above.

snmp-server {sysname <name> | location <loc> | contact <con>}

NOTE: You must surround any descriptive string in quotation marks (“ ”) to use spaces in entry. If you enter a space in the text string without using surrounding quotes, you get an invalid input error.


15-2

15.1Utility Commands

Description This command sets the name and the physical location of the switch, and the organization responsible for the network.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands show sysinfo on page 15-10

General System Commands

Use the commands in this section to control the configuration and start-up settings of the BAR, clear various counters and logs, control log-in sessions, transfer files to and from the BAR, and execute system utilities such as PING and traceroute.

Summary Reset BAR to factory defaults.




Description This command resets all configuration to the factory defaults without powering off the switch. The switch is automatically reset when this command is processed. You are prompted to confirm that the reset should proceed.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Summary Clear the counters on an interface or all interfaces.


(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server sysname “BAR_Rk2_Sh1”

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server contact 603 766 1234 ^% Invalid input detected at '^' marker.

(Pannaway BAR) (Config)#snmp-server contact "603 766 1234"

clear config [yes]

(Pannaway BAR) #clear config

Are you sure you want to clear the configuration? (y/n)

clear counters {<slot/port> | all} [yes]


15-3

15.1Utility

Commands


[<slot/port> | all]The selection of either an identified unique interface on the BAR (identified by the combination of slot number and port number), or “all”, specifying all interfaces on the BAR.


Description This command clears the statistics for a specified <slot/port> or for all the ports or for the entire switch based upon the argument. You are prompted to confirm the reset of statistics.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Summary Clear BAR trap log.




Description This command clears the trap log.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Related Commands show logging on page 15-8

Summary Copy files to or from the BAR.


(Pannaway BAR) #clear counters all

Are you sure you want to clear ALL port stats? (y/n)y

ALL Port Stats Cleared.

clear traplog [yes]

(Pannaway BAR) #clear traplog yes

copy <source-location> <destination-location> [yes]


15-4



<source-location>The <source-location> value is a local TFTP or Xmodem Uniform Resource Locator (URL) or a memory location in the BAR. The values of the <source-location> parameter vary depending on the type of copy operation.

If you will be uploading a file to the BAR:

i If uploading a file to the BAR from a TFTP server, the <source-location> parameter must be a valid URL containing the IP address of the TFTP server, the directory path to the file to be uploaded, and the full name of the file to be uploaded.

i If uploading a file to the BAR with an Xmodem transfer through the BAR serial port, the <source-location> parameter “xmodem” should be provided. The BAR will respond to the command by waiting for an Xmodem SEND operation from the management terminal.

If you will be downloading a file from the BAR:

If downloading a file from the BAR to a URL, the following can be specified as the source location for downloading data from the BAR:

<destination-location>The <destination-location> value is a local TFTP or Xmodem URL or a memory location in the BAR. The values of the <destination-location> parameter vary depending on the type of copy operation.

If you will be uploading a file to the BAR:

i If uploading a previously saved configuration file or a firmware image to the BAR, the destination-location value is one of the following locations:

i If uploading SSH key files to the BAR, the following locations may also be specified:

nvram:startup-config Copies the current startup configuration file of the BAR.

nvram:error-log Copies the error log stored on the BAR.

nvram:msglog Copies the contents of the BAR message log.

nvram:traplog Copies the current BAR trap log contents.

nvram:startup-config Upload the file at the URL to replace the BAR startup configuration file.

system:image Copy the file to the BAR’s system code image.

nvram:sshkey-rsa Copy the file to the BAR’s RSA key.

nvram:sshkey-rsa2 Copy the file to the BAR’s RSA 2 key.

nvram:sshkey-dsa Upload the file to the BAR as a DSA key.

nvram:sslpem-root Copy the file to the BAR as the root HTTP secure-server root certificate.

nvram:sslpem-server Copy the file to the BAR as the root HTTP secure-server certificate.

nvram:sslpem-dhweak Copy the file to the BAR as the root HTTP secure-server DH-weak certificate.

nvram:sslpem-strong Copy the file to the BAR as the root HTTP secure-server DH-strong certificate.


15-5

15.1Utility

Commands

If you will be downloading a file from the BAR:

i If downloading a file from the BAR, the <destination-location> value is a TFTP URL on the network that the BAR file will be copied to.


Description The copy commands upload and download various log and configuration files to/from the BAR. Local URLs can be specified using TFTP or Xmodem. The command can also be used to download the startup config or code image by specifying the source as a URL and destination as a memory location in the BAR.

The system will notify you of the success or failure of the copy operation following the transfer.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Summary End management session.



None

(Pannaway BAR) #copy nvram:startup-config tftp://172.16.1.187/BAR_Config

Mode........................................... TFTPSet TFTP Server IP............................. 172.16.1.187TFTP Path...................................... ./TFTP Filename.................................. BAR_ConfigData Type...................................... Config File

Are you sure you want to start? (y/n) y

TFTP config transfer starting

File transfer operation completed successfully.

(Pannaway BAR) #copy xmodem system:image

Mode........................................... XMODEMData Type...................................... Code

Are you sure you want to start? (y/n) yReady to RECEIVE File tempcode.bin in binary modeSend several Control-X characters to cancel before transfer starts.CKCKCK

File transfer operation completed successfully.

logout


15-6


Description This command closes the current Telnet connection or resets the current serial connection.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Summary Send a traceroute command to a station from the BAR.



<ipaddr>The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of a host or interface on the network for which you want to determine route hops.

[port]The optional port parameter is the UDP port used as the destination of packets sent as part of the traceroute. This port should be an unused port on the destination system, in the range of 0 (zero) to 65,534, with a default of 33,434.

Description This command is used to discover the routes that packets actually take when traveling to their destination through the network on a hop-by-hop basis.

“no” Form None

Defaults port = 33434

Example

NOTE: Save any configuration changes before exiting the session. The system will provide a prompt if any unsaved changes have been made during the session being ended.

(Pannaway BAR) #logout

The system has unsaved changes.Would you like to save them now? (y/n) y

Connection to host lost.

traceroute <ipaddr> [port�

(Pannaway BAR) #traceroute 172.16.1.4

Tracing route over a maximum of 20 hops

1 10.1.6.1 0 ms 0 ms 10 ms 2 172.17.3.1 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms 3 172.16.1.4 0 ms 10 ms 0 ms


15-7

15.1Utility

Commands

Summary Perform a hard (power cycle) reset of the BAR.




Description This command resets the switch. The switch uses the stored configuration to initialize the switch. You are prompted to confirm that the reset should proceed. A successful reset is indicated by the LEDs on the switch.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Summary Send a PING to a station from the BAR.



<ipaddr>The IP address, in dotted decimal notation, of a host or interface on the network.

Description This command checks if another host is on the network and listens for responses. To use this command, configure the BAR for a network (in-band) connection. The source and target devices must have the ping utility enabled and running on top of TCP/IP. The switch can be pinged from any IP workstation with which the switch is connected through the default VLAN (VLAN 1), as long as there is a physical path between the switch and the workstation. The terminal interface sends three pings to the target station.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

reload [yes]

CAUTION: A reset of the BAR will interrupt all active sessions AND all active connections to the BAR’s network interfaces.Only saved configurations are loaded after a reset. The system will prompt you to save if there are unsaved changes in the BAR’s memory.

(Pannaway BAR) #reload

The system has unsaved changes.Would you like to save them now? (y/n) y

Configuration Saved!System will now restart!

ping <ipaddr>


15-8


Example

Summary Show the contents of the BAR trap log.



None

Description This command displays the trap log maintained by the switch.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output The following information is shown in the trap log:

Related Commands clear traplog [yes] on page 15-3

Summary Show memory usage on the BAR.


(Pannaway BAR) #ping 172.16.1.187

Send count=3, Receive count=3 from 172.16.1.187

show logging

(Pannaway BAR) #show loggingNumber of Traps Since Last Reset............... 5Number of Traps Since Log Last Viewed.......... 5

Log System Up Time Trap--- ------------------------ ------------------------------------------------- 0 0 days 00:00:28 Cold Start: Unit: 0 1 0 days 00:00:23 Link Up: Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 11 2 0 days 00:00:22 Link Up: Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 12 3 0 days 00:00:21 Link Down: Unit: 1 Slot: 0 Port: 12

Number of Traps Since Last Reset

The number of traps that have occurred since the last reset of this device.

Number of Traps Since Log Last Viewed

The number of traps that have occurred since the traps were last displayed. Getting the traps by any method (terminal interface display, Web display, upload file from switch etc.) will result in this counter being cleared to 0.

Log The sequence number of this trap.

System Up Time The relative time since the last reboot of the switch at which this trap occurred.

Trap A summary of the trap type and location.

show memory utilization


15-9

15.1Utility

Commands


None

Description This command displays used and available system memory on the BAR.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Output The following output is displayed for free memory and allocated memory:

Summary Show CPU utilization of the BAR.



None

Description This command displays the percentage of CPU processing used during the past 5 second, 1 minute, and five minute intervals.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

(BAR) #show memory utilization

status bytes blocks avg block max block------ ---------- --------- ----------- -----------currentfree 63886112 25 2555444 63854696alloc 36882312 12995 2838 -

Bytes The number of free or allocated bytes.

Blocks The number of free or allocated memory blocks.

Avg Block The average free or allocated memory block size

Max Block The maximum free or allocated memory block size

show processes cpu

(BAR) #show processes cpuTotal CPU Utilization:

Switch CPU 5 sec 1 min 5 min-------------------------------------------------1 1 0% 2% 2%


15-10


Summary Display the settings of the BAR.



None

Description This command is used to display the current setting of different protocol packages supported on switch. This command displays only those parameters with values that differ from their default. The output is displayed in the script format, which can be used to configure another switch with same configuration.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output Varies with configuration settings of switch.

Related Commands copy <source-location> <destination-location> [yes] on page 15-3

Summary Display BAR information.



None

Description This command displays switch information.

“no” Form None

show running-config

(Pannaway BAR) #show running-config

!Current Configuration:!

remotecon timeout 60network protocol dhcpvlan databaseexit

configure!System Description "Pannaway BAR"!System version 1.0.3!

exit...ip http secure-port 443no ip ssh

show sysinfo


15-11

15.1Utility

Commands

Defaults None

Example


Related Commands snmp-server {sysname <name> | location <loc> | contact <con>} on page 15-1

(Pannaway BAR) #show sysinfo

System Description............................. Pannaway BARSystem Name....................................System Location................................System Contact.................................System Object ID............................... pannawaybarSystem Up Time................................. 46 days 22 hrs 2 mins 28 secs

MIBs Supported:

RFC 2819 - RMON-MIB Remote Network Monitoring Management Information BaseIEEE8021-PAE-MIB Port Access Entity module for managing IEEE 802.1X.FASTPATH-RADIUS-AUTH-CLIENT-MIB LVL7 FastPath Radius MIBRADIUS-ACC-CLIENT-MIB RADIUS Accounting Client MIBRADIUS-AUTH-CLIENT-MIB RADIUS Authentication Client MIBRFC 1724 - RIPv2-MIB RIP Version 2 MIB ExtensionRFC 1850 - OSPF-MIB OSPF Version 2 Management Information BaseRFC 2787 - VRRP-MIB Definitions of Managed Objects for the Virtual Router Redundancy ProtocolFASTPATH-ROUTING-MIB FASTPATH Routing - Layer 3FASTPATH-QOS-MIB FASTPATH Flex QOS SupportFASTPATH-QOS-ACL-MIB FASTPATH Flex QOS ACLRFC 3289 - DIFFSERV-MIB Management Information Base for the Differentiated Services ArchitectureFASTPATH-QOS-DIFFSERV-EXTENSIONS- FASTPATH Flex QOS DiffServ Private MIBs’MIB definitionsFASTPATH-QOS-DIFFSERV-PRIVATE-MIB FASTPATH Flex QOS DiffServ Private MIBs’ definitionsRFC 2932 - IPMROUTE-MIB IPv4 Multicast Routing MIBRFC 2933 - IGMP-MIB Internet Group Management Protocol MIBRFC 2934 - PIM-MIB Protocol Independent Multicast MIB for IPv4DVMRP-MIB Distance-Vector Multicast Routing Protocol MIBIANA-RTPROTO-MIB IANA IP Route Protocol and IP MRoute Protocol Textual ConventionsFASTPATH-MULTICAST-MIB FASTPATH Flex Multicast Routing Private MIB

System Description Factory-set descriptor of the Pannaway switch model.

System Name Custom name used to identify the switch. The factory default is blank.

System Location Text used to identify the location of the switch. May be up to 31 alpha-numeric characters. The factory default is blank.

System Contact Text used to identify a contact person for this switch. May be up to 31 alpha-numeric characters. The factory default is blank.

System ObjectID The base object ID for the switch’s enterprise MIB.

System Up Time The time in days, hours and minutes since the last switch reboot.

MIBs Supported A list of MIBs supported by this agent.


15-12


Summary Display the contents of the event log.



None

Description This command displays the event log, which contains error messages from the system. The event log is not cleared on a system reset.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example



Summary Display the contents of the system message log.



None

Description This command displays the message log maintained by the switch. The message log contains system trace information. The message log contains a maximum of 256 entries that wrap.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

show eventlog

(Pannaway BAR) #show eventlog File Line TaskID Code d h m sEVENT> bootos.c 333 03FFFE00 AAAAAAAA 0 0 0 1EVENT> bootos.c 333 03FFFE00 AAAAAAAA 0 0 0 1EVENT> bootos.c 333 03FFFE00 AAAAAAAA 0 0 0 1EVENT> bootos.c 333 03FFFE00 AAAAAAAA 0 0 0 1

File The file in which the event originated.

Line The line number of the event.

Task Id The task ID of the event.

Code The event code.

Time The time this event occurred.

show msglog


15-13

15.1Utility

Commands

Example

Command Output: The information presented in the event log is an unformatted series of stored messages.


Summary Show the interfaces and inventory of the BAR.



None

Description This command displays inventory information for the BAR.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Example

Command Output: The following information is shown on the show hardware screen:

(Pannaway BAR) #show msglog2 days 22:31:48 File: dhcp_support.c : Line: 309 : dhcp_bind(): networkPort dhcpstate failed2 days 22:28:54 File: dhcp_support.c : Line: 309 : dhcp_bind(): networkPort dhcpstate failed

show hardware

(Pannaway BAR) #show hardware

Vendor..........................................Pannaway TechnologiesSystem Description............................. Pannaway BARProduct Type....................................BARSerial Number.................................. 4024310077a20CLEI code...................................... Part Number.....................................BAR-GE12HW Version......................................rev 0A Manufacturer....................................0xbcBurned In MAC Address...........................00:0A:9F:50:00:78 Firmware Version............................... 1.1.0Boot code Version...............................1.2.31

Vendor Pannaway Technologies.

System Description Factory-set descriptor of the Pannaway switch model.

Product Type Specifies the product family.

Serial Number The unique serial number for this switch.

CLEI code Common Language Equipment Identifier code for the BAR.

Part Number Manufacturing part number.

HW Version Hardware version level of the device.

Manufacturer Manufacturer descriptor field.


15-14

15.2System Clock Commands 15.2 System Clock Commands

The following commands allow you to set and view the system clock at the BAR, including the Daylight Savings setting. The time can be set manually, or can be set automatically via the Network Time Protocol (NTP).

Manual System Clock Setting

Use the following command to set the BAR’s system clock manually.

Summary Set the system date and time.



<Year>The four-digit date indicating the current year.

<Month>The two-digit number (01 to 12) of the current calendar month.

<Day>The two-digit number (01 to 31) of the day of the specified month.

<Hour>The two-digit hour, in 24-hour format (00 to 24) indicating the present hour.

<Minute>A two-digit number (from 00 to 59) representing the current minute.

<Second>A two-digit number (from 00 to 59) representing the current second.

Description This command changes the BAR clock setting to the specified value.

“no” Form None

Defaults None

Burned in MAC Address Universally assigned network address.

Firmware Version The release.version.revision number of the code currently running on the switch.

Boot code Version The version number of the boot code currently running on the switch.

NOTE: When the BAR is manually set, it displays its system clock in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)/Universal Coordinated Time (CUT) unless a time zone is set.

clock set <Year>:<Month>:<Day>:<Hour>:<Minute>:<Second>

NOTE: All parameters supplied for the system clock setting must be separated from one another with colons (:) in order to be accepted by the BAR.


15-15

15.2System Clock

Commands

Example

Related Commands clock timezone <atlantic | eastern | central | mountain | pacific | alaska | hawaii | samoan> on page 15-19clock daylight-savings enable on page 15-20show clock on page 15-20

Automatic System Clock Setting

Use the following command to set the BAR’s system time automatically via a Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Server. The following commands allow you to configure SNTP servers, as well as the client operation of the BAR with respect to the server.

Summary Enables SNTP client on the BAR in unicast or broadcast mode.



<broadcast | unicast>The operating mode of the SNTP client:

• If set to unicast, the BAR must be configured with an SNTP server address to which it will send poll messages to retrieve its system time settings.

• If set to broadcast, the BAR listens for broadcast SNTP messages at a given interval, and then resets its clock accordingly.

Description Sets the operational mode of the system’s SNTP client with respect to an SNTP server. NTP is a protocol built on top of TCP/IP that assures accurate local timekeeping with reference to radio, atomic or other clocks located on the Internet. Once the clock is set, the BAR – acting as the SNTP Client – will re-synchronize its clock with the server in either unicast mode (active polling) or broadcast mode (passive update).

i If the client mode is set to unicast, you must also specify the SNTP servers that the BAR will poll to retrieve its system clock settings. You can optionally set the poll interval, number of retries, and poll timeout for the unicast SNTP client on the BAR.

i If the client mode is set to broadcast and there is an SNTP broadcast server on the network, no other configuration is required for the BAR to retrieve system clock settings. You can optionally change the interval at which the BAR listens for broadcast updates.

“no” Form no sntp client modeStops the NTP client function of the BAR. The BAR’s built-in system clock will remain set to the last known NTP time setting until it is either manually reset, or SNTP is re-enabled.

Defaults SNTP client disabled.

(Pannaway BAR) #clock set 2004:07:04:18:38:00

NOTE: When the BAR is set to NTP, it displays its system clock in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)/Universal Coordinated Time (CUT) unless a time zone is set.

sntp client mode <broadcast | unicast>


15-16

15.2System Clock Commands

Example .

Related Commands sntp broadcast client poll-interval <6-10> on page 15-16sntp unicast client poll-interval <6-10> on page 15-17sntp unicast client poll-retry <0-10> on page 15-17sntp unicast client poll-timeout <1-30> on page 15-18sntp server <ip_address> {priority_value} on page 15-18show sntp [client | server ] on page 15-21

Summary Sets the TCP/UDP port on which the SNTP client will listen for SNTP broadcasts, and transmit SNTP unicast requests.



<port_value>The Transmit and Receive TCP/UDP port value, in the range of 1-65,535.

Description Sets the operational mode of the system’s SNTP client with respect to an SNTP server. NTP is a protocol built on top of TCP/IP that assures accurate local timekeeping with reference to radio, atomic or other clocks located on the Internet. Once the clock is set, the BAR – acting as the SNTP Client – will re-synchronize its clock with the server in either unicast mode (active polling) or broadcast mode (passive update).

“no” Form no sntp client portRestores the default SNTP TCP/UDP port value of 123.

Defaults 123 (the well-known port for NTP)

Example .

Related Commands sntp client mode <broadcast | unicast> on page 15-15

Summary When the SNTP client is in broadcast mode, sets the interval at which the client wakes to listen for broadcast packets.



<6-10>

The interval value setting expressed as a power of 2 in the range of 26 to 210 (an actual interval of 64, 128, 256, 512, or 1024 seconds).

Description Sets the interval at which the SNTP client (in broadcast mode) listens for broadcast packets and updates its system clock accordingly.

(BAR) (Config)#sntp client mode unicast

sntp client port <port_value>

(BAR) (Config)#sntp client port 10500

sntp broadcast client poll-interval <6-10>


15-17

15.2System Clock

Commands

“no” Form no sntp broadcast client poll-intervalRestores the default broadcast poll-interval setting of 6.

Defaults 6 (64 seconds)

Example .

Related Commands sntp client mode <broadcast | unicast> on page 15-15show sntp [client | server ] on page 15-21

Summary When the SNTP client is in unicast mode, sets the interval at which the client transmits a unicast poll to the SNTP server.



<6-10>


Description Sets the interval at which the SNTP client (in broadcast mode) transmits a unicast poll to the specified SNTP server(s) and updates its system clock accordingly.

“no” Form no sntp unicast client poll-intervalRestores the default unicast poll-interval setting of 6.

Defaults 6 (64 seconds)

Example .

Related Commands sntp client mode <broadcast | unicast> on page 15-15sntp unicast client poll-retry <0-10> on page 15-17sntp unicast client poll-timeout <1-30> on page 15-18sntp server <ip_address> {priority_value} on page 15-18show sntp [client | server ] on page 15-21

Summary When the SNTP client is in unicast mode, sets the number of poll retries which the client will use before switching to another server (or waiting until the next poll interval).



<6-10>


(BAR) (Config)#sntp broadcast client poll-interval 8

sntp unicast client poll-interval <6-10>

(BAR) (Config)#sntp unicast client poll-interval 10

sntp unicast client poll-retry <0-10>


15-18


Description Sets the number of server retries that the SNTP client uses after the first failed poll. If all retries expire, the SNTP client attempts the second or third server in order. If there is no response after all servers and retry attempts have been exhausted, the BAR maintains its current clock setting until the next successful SNTP client poll attempt.

“no” Form no sntp unicast client poll-retryRestores the default unicast poll-retry setting of 1.

Defaults 1 retry

Example .

Related Commands sntp client mode <broadcast | unicast> on page 15-15sntp unicast client poll-retry <0-10> on page 15-17sntp unicast client poll-timeout <1-30> on page 15-18show sntp [client | server ] on page 15-21

Summary When the SNTP client is in unicast mode, sets the response timeout value at which a poll is considered unsuccessful and a retry poll is sent (or polling expires).



<1-30>The timeout value, ranging from 1-30 seconds.

Description Sets the duration of the response timeout after which the SNTP client sends another poll (if more retries are configured) or halts polling the current SNTP server until the next interval.

“no” Form no sntp unicast client poll-timeoutRestores the default unicast poll-timeout setting of 5 seconds.

Defaults 5 seconds

Example .

Related Commands sntp client mode <broadcast | unicast> on page 15-15sntp unicast client poll-retry <0-10> on page 15-17sntp unicast client poll-timeout <1-30> on page 15-18show sntp [client | server ] on page 15-21

Summary Configures the SNTP server to which the SNTP client sends an SNTP request (when in Unicast mode).



sntp unicast client poll-timeout <1-30>


sntp server <ip_address> {priority_value}


15-19

15.2System Clock

Commands


<ip_address>The IP address of a known time server.

{priority value}The optional server priority in a range of 1-3 (up to the total number of SNTP servers). Description

Identifies an SNTP time server to which the BAR can send SNTP requests to update its system clock settings. Up to three time servers can be configured for the BAR. If a poll cycle to the primary server fails (all poll retries have been exhausted), the optional second and third servers are polled.

If no priority server is defined, all servers are considered equal in priority and after a failed poll cycle, the next server is polled in the order that it was added to the configuration. If an optional priority order is defined, servers are polled in the given priority order.

“no” Form no sntp server <ip_address>Deletes the specified SNTP server.

Defaults None

Example .

Related Commands sntp client mode <broadcast | unicast> on page 15-15sntp unicast client poll-interval <6-10> on page 15-17sntp unicast client poll-retry <0-10> on page 15-17sntp unicast client poll-timeout <1-30> on page 15-18show sntp [client | server ] on page 15-21

Timezone and Daylight Savings

The following commands apply to the system clock setting, whether it is manually set or retrieved via NTP:

Summary Sets the system’s time zone, based upon official United States time.



<atlantic | eastern | central | mountain | pacific | alaska | hawaii | samoan>The US time zone to be set at the BAR.

Description Set the system’s time zone setting. Any clock setting of UCT (coordinated universal time or GMT) retrieved via an NTP server is converted to the local time zone setting. Note also that the clock time zone must be set before enabling daylight savings via the “clock daylight-savings enable” command described below.

Defaults No time zone set.

Example .

(BAR) (Config)#sntp server 192.43.244.18 2

clock timezone <atlantic | eastern | central | mountain | pacific | alaska | hawaii | samoan>

(BAR) (Config)# clock timezone eastern


15-20


Related Commands clock set <Year>:<Month>:<Day>:<Hour>:<Minute>:<Second> on page 15-14sntp client mode <broadcast | unicast> on page 15-15clock daylight-savings enable on page 15-20show clock on page 15-20

Summary Activates daylight savings time for the system clock.



None

Description Set the system clock to automatically adjust itself for daylight savings, based on the current system clock setting. Note also that the clock time zone must be set before enabling daylight savings via the “clock timezone” command described above.

Defaults Daylight savings time disabled.

“no” Form no clock daylight-savings enableRestores the default setting of daylight savings mode disabled.

Example .

Related Commands clock set <Year>:<Month>:<Day>:<Hour>:<Minute>:<Second> on page 15-14sntp client mode <broadcast | unicast> on page 15-15clock timezone <atlantic | eastern | central | mountain | pacific | alaska | hawaii | samoan> on page 15-19show clock on page 15-20

Clock and SNTP Display Commands

The following commands display system clock information and SNTP server information.

Summary Display the current time settings information.



None

Description Displays the system’s real time clock setting. It also displays the clock time zone setting and configured daylight savings setting, as well as the time of the last administrative or NTP server update.

clock daylight-savings enable

(BAR) (Config)# clock daylight-savings enable

show clock

NOTE: When the BAR is set to NTP, it displays its system clock in Greenwich Mean Time (GMT)/Universal Coordinated Time (CUT) unless a time zone is set.


15-21

15.2System Clock

Commands

Example .

Command Output The system clock setting in Day, Month, Date, MM:HH:SS Year format, along with Timezone information, Daylight Savings Time usage, and the last time that the system clock was last started.

Related Commands clock set <Year>:<Month>:<Day>:<Hour>:<Minute>:<Second> on page 15-14sntp client mode <broadcast | unicast> on page 15-15sntp server <ip_address> {priority_value} on page 15-18clock timezone <atlantic | eastern | central | mountain | pacific | alaska | hawaii | samoan> on page 15-19clock daylight-savings enable on page 15-20

Summary Displays SNTP information, including detailed SNTP server and client information.



None

Description Displays information about the latest SNTP server updates, as well as optional SNTP server and client information.

Example .

(BAR) #show clock

Local Time: MON NOV 21 22:00:45 2005 Timezone: Eastern Standard Time DST rule: United States daylight-savings time DST will start Apr 2, 2006

Time set at last startup on MON NOV 21 21:58:58 2005

show sntp [client | server ]

(BAR) #show sntp

Last Update Time: OCT 27 12:57:27 2005Last Unicast Attempt Time: OCT 27 12:57:27 2005Last Attempt Status: Success

Broadcast Count: 0

(BAR) #show sntp client

Client Supported Modes: unicast broadcastSNTP Version: 4Port: 123Client Mode: unicastUnicast Poll Interval: 6Poll Timeout (seconds): 15Poll Retry: 2


15-22


Command Output If the command is executed without the optional client or server commands, the following output is displayed:

(BAR) #show sntp server

Server IP Address: 129.6.15.28Server Type: ipv4Server Stratum: 1Server Reference Id: NTP Ref: ACTSServer Mode: ServerServer Maximum Entries: 3Server Current Entries: 2

SNTP Servers------------

IP Address: 129.6.15.28Address Type: IPV4Priority: 1Version: 4Port: 123Last Update Time: OCT 27 12:58:32 2005Last Attempt Time: OCT 27 12:58:32 2005Last Update Status: SuccessTotal Unicast Requests: 58Failed Unicast Requests: 0

IP Address: 192.43.244.18Address Type: IPV4Priority: 1Version: 4Port: 123Last Attempt Time: JAN 01 00:00:00 1970Last Update Status: OtherTotal Unicast Requests: 0Failed Unicast Requests: 0

Last Update Time Time of last clock update.

Last Attempt Time Time of last transmit query (in unicast mode).

Last Attempt Status Status of the last SNTP request (in unicast mode) or unsolicited message (in broadcast mode).

Broadcast Count Current number of unsolicited broadcast messages that have been received and processed by the SNTP client since last reboot..


15-23

15.2System Clock

Commands

If the optional Client parameter is specified, the following information is displayed.

If the optional Server parameter is specified, the following information is displayed.

Related Commands sntp client mode <broadcast | unicast> on page 15-15sntp unicast client poll-interval <6-10> on page 15-17sntp unicast client poll-retry <0-10> on page 15-17sntp unicast client poll-timeout <1-30> on page 15-18sntp server <ip_address> {priority_value} on page 15-18

Client Supported Modes Supported client modes: unicast or broadcast.

SNTP Version The highest SNTP version the client supports.

Port SNTP Client Port (TCP/UDP port).

Client Mode Currently configured SNTP client mode.

Unicast Poll Interval Poll interval value for SNTP clients in seconds as a power of two. For an example, 6 indicates 62 or 36 seconds.

Poll Timeout (seconds) Poll timeout value in seconds for SNTP clients.

Poll Retry Poll retry value (attempts) for SNTP clients.

Server IP Address IP address of the currently active SNTP server.

Server Type Address type of the server.

Server Stratum Claimed stratum of the server for the last received valid packet.

Server Reference ID Reference clock identifier of the server for the last received valid packet.

Server Mode SNTP Server mode.

Server Max Entries Total number of SNTP Servers allowed.

Server Current Entries Total number of SNTP configured.

For each configured server

IP Address IP Address of configured SNTP Server.

Address Type Address Type of configured SNTP server.

Priority IP priority type of the configured server.

Version SNTP Version number of the server. The protocol version used to query the server in Unicast mode.

Port Server port number (TCP/UDP port).

Last Update Time Last server attempt time for the specified server.

Last Update Status Last server attempt status for the server.

Total Unicast Requests Number of requests to the server.

Failed Unicast Requests Number of failed requests from server.


15-24


Appendix AList of CLI Commands

This Appendix provides an alphabetical list of all the CLI commands provided in this document. It may be used as a quick reference for locating commands, or as a very brief reminder of the format and parameters of the several commands available on the BAR CLI.

telnet <ip_address>: 11-61583compatibility: 7-1access-list <accesslistnumber> {deny | permit} {every | <srcip> <srcmask>}: 14-1access-list <accesslistnumber> {deny | permit} {every | icmp | igmp | ip | tcp | udp | <protocolnumber>} <srcip> <src-mask> [eq {<srcl4portnumber> | <srcportkey>}] <dstip> <dstmask> [eq {<dstl4portnumber> | <dstportkey>}] [prece-dence <precedence> | tos <tos> <tosmask> | dscp <dscp>]: 14-2addport <logical slot/port>: 4-5area <areaid> authentication {none | simple | encrypt}: 7-2area <areaid> default-cost <cost>: 7-2area <areaid> nssa default-info-originate [<metric>] {comparable | non-comparable}: 7-3area <areaid> nssa no-redistribute: 7-4area <areaid> nssa no-summary: 7-4area <areaid> nssa translator-role {always | candidate}: 7-5area <areaid> nssa translator-stab-intv <stabilityinterval>: 7-6area <areaid> nssa: 7-3area <areaid> range <ipaddr> <subnetmask> {summarylink | nssaexternallink} [advertise | not-advertise]: 7-6area <areaid> stub summarylsa: 7-7area <areaid> stub: 7-7area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> authentication {none | simple <key> | encrypt <key> <keyid>}: 7-8area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> dead-interval <d-interval>: 7-9area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> hello-interval <h-interval>: 7-10area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> retransmit-interval <r-interval>: 7-10area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor> transmit-delay <delay>: 7-11area <areaid> virtual-link <neighbor>: 7-8arp <ipaddress> <macaddr>: 5-9arp cachesize <entries>: 5-10arp dynamicrenew: 5-10arp purge <ipaddr>: 5-11arp resptime <resp-timeout>: 5-11arp retries <retries>: 5-12arp timeout <seconds>: 5-12auto-negotiate all: 3-2auto-negotiate: 3-1auto-summary: 6-1bootpdhcprelay cidoptmode: 5-16bootpdhcprelay disable: 5-16bootpdhcprelay maxhopcount <hops>: 5-17


A-2

bootpdhcprelay minwaittime <min-wait>: 5-17bootpdhcprelay serverip <server number> <ipaddress>: 5-18bridge aging-time <age-time> [<fdbid> | all]: 3-5classofservice dot1pmapping <userpriority> <trafficclass>: 4-28clear arp-cache [gateway]: 5-13clear config [yes]: 15-2clear counters {<slot/port> | all} [yes]: 15-2clear igmpsnooping [yes]: 4-27clear ip dhcp binding <address | *>: 10-12clear ip dhcp server statistics: 10-13clear pass [yes]: 11-8clear port-channel [yes]: 4-7clear traplog [yes]: 15-3clear vlan [yes]: 4-15client-identifier <uniqueidentifier>: 10-3client-name <name>: 10-4clock daylight-savings enable: 15-20clock set <Year>:<Month>:<Day>:<Hour>:<Minute>:<Second>: 15-14clock timezone <atlantic | eastern | central | mountain | pacific | alaska | hawaii | samoan>: 15-19copy <source-location> <destination-location> [yes]: 15-3default-information originate [always] [metric <value>] [metric-type {1 | 2}]: 7-12default-information originate: 6-2default-metric <metric>: 6-2default-metric <value>: 7-12default-router <address1> [<address2>....<address8>]: 10-4delete interface {<logical slot/port> | all}: 4-6deleteport <logical slot/port>: 4-5deleteport all: 4-6disable ip multicast mdebug mtrace: 9-16disconnect {<sessionID> | all}: 11-6distance ospf {intra | inter | type1 | type2} <preference-value>: 7-13distance rip <distance>: 6-3distribute-list <listnumber> out {ospf | bgp | static | connected}: 6-3distribute-list <list-number> out {rip | bgp | static | connected}: 7-15dns-server <address1> [<address2>....<address8>]: 10-5enable: 6-4enable: 7-13encapsulation [ethernet | snap]: 5-2exit-overflow-interval <o-interval>: 7-14external-lsdb-limit <l-limit>: 7-14hardware-address <hardwareaddress> [type]: 10-5host <ipaddress> [<mask> | <prefix-length>]: 10-6hostroutesaccept: 6-4ip access-group <accesslistnumber> {in | out}: 14-3ip access-group all <accesslistnumber> in: 14-4ip address <ipaddress> <subnetmask>: 5-1ip dhcp excluded-address <lowaddress> [highaddress]: 10-2ip dhcp ping packets <packet-count>: 10-2ip dhcp pool <name>: 10-3ip dvmrp metric <metric>: 9-7ip dvmrp trapflags: 9-3ip dvmrp: 9-2ip dvmrp: 9-8ip http secure-port <portid>: 12-1ip http secure-protocol [SSL 3] [TLS1]: 12-2


A-3

ip http secure-server: 12-2ip http server: 12-3ip igmp last-member-query-count <count>: 9-8ip igmp last-member-query-interval <lmqinterval>: 9-9ip igmp query-interval <query-interval>: 9-9ip igmp query-max-response-time <max-time>: 9-10ip igmp robustness <robustness>: 9-10ip igmp startup-query-count <count>: 9-11ip igmp startup-query-interval <interval>: 9-11ip igmp version <version>: 9-12ip igmp: 9-1ip irdp address <ipaddress>: 5-3ip irdp holdtime <time>: 5-5ip irdp maxadvertinterval <maxadvertinterval>: 5-4ip irdp minadvertinterval <minadvertinterval>: 5-4ip irdp preference <irdp-preference>: 5-5ip irdp: 5-3ip mcast boundary <groupipaddr> <mask>: 9-12ip multicast staticroute <sourceipaddr> <mask> <rpfipaddr> <metric> <slot/port>: 9-3ip multicast ttl-threshold <ttlvalue>: 9-13ip multicast: 9-2ip netdirbcast: 5-6ip ospf areaid <areaid>: 7-17ip ospf authentication {none | {simple <key>} | {encrypt <key> <keyid>}}: 7-18ip ospf cost <cost>: 7-18ip ospf dead-interval <d-interval>: 7-19ip ospf hello interval <h-interval>: 7-19ip ospf priority <priority>: 7-20ip ospf retransmit-interval <r-interval>: 7-21ip ospf transmit-delay <delay>: 7-21ip ospf: 7-17ip pimdm mode <slot/port>: 9-13ip pimdm query-interval <dmq-interval>: 9-14ip pimdm: 9-4ip pimsm cbsrpreference <preference>: 9-14ip pimsm datathreshrate <d-threshold>: 9-5ip pimsm message-interval <msg-interval>: 9-5ip pimsm mode: 9-15ip pimsm query-interval <smq-interval>: 9-15ip pimsm spt-threshold <spath-threshold>: 9-6ip pimsm staticrp <ipaddress> <groupaddress> <groupmask>: 9-7ip pimsm: 9-4ip pim-trapflags: 9-6ip rip authentication {none | {simple <key>} | {encrypt <key> <keyid>}}: 6-7ip rip receive version {rip1 | rip2 | both | none}: 6-8ip rip send version {rip1 | rip1c | rip2 | none}: 6-8ip rip: 6-6ip ssh protocol [1] [2]: 12-5ip ssh: 12-4ip vrrp <vrID> authentication {none | simple <key>}: 8-3ip vrrp <vrID> ip <ipaddr>: 8-2ip vrrp <vrID> mode: 8-5ip vrrp <vrID> preempt: 8-3ip vrrp <vrID> priority <priority-value>: 8-4ip vrrp <vrID> timers advertise <adv-interval>: 8-4


A-4

ip vrrp <vrID>: 8-2ip vrrp: 8-1lease [<days> [hours] [minutes] | [infinite]]: 10-6logout: 15-5macfilter <macaddr> <vlanid>: 4-16macfilter adddest <macaddr> <vlanid>: 4-16macfilter adddest all <macaddr> <vlanid>: 4-17macfilter addsrc <macaddr> <vlanid>: 4-18macfilter addsrc all <macaddr> <vlanid>: 4-18monitor session mode: 4-31monitor session source <slot/port> destination <slot/port>: 4-30mrinfo <ipaddr>: 9-16mstat <source_ipaddr> [<group/destination>] [<group/destination>]: 9-17mtrace <source_ipaddr> [<group/destination>] [<group/destination>]: 9-17mtu <mtu-size>: 3-6network <networknumber> [<mask> | <prefix-length>]: 10-7network javamode: 11-8network mac-address <macaddr>: 3-7network mac-type {local | burnedin}: 3-6network mgmt_vlan <vlanid>: 4-7network parms <ipaddr> <netmask> [<gateway>]: 3-8network protocol {none | bootp | dhcp} [yes]: 3-7pagination displaymode: 11-5ping <ipaddr>: 15-7port lacpmode all: 4-20port lacpmode: 4-19port-channel <name>: 4-2port-channel adminmode {<logical slot/port> | all}: 4-3port-channel linktrap {<logical slot/port> | all}: 4-4port-channel name {<logical slot/port> | all} <name>: 4-3port-channel staticcapability: 4-1protocol group <groupid> <vlanid>: 4-22protocol vlan group <groupid> : 4-23protocol vlan group all <groupid>: 4-23redistribute {bgp | static | connected} [metric <metricvalue>]: 6-5redistribute {rip | bgp | static | connected} [metric <metrictype>] [metric-type {1 | 2}] [tag <tagvalue>] [subnets]: 7-15redistribute ospf [metric <metricvalue>] [match [internal] [external 1] [external 2] [nssa-external 1] [nssa-external-2]]: 6-5reload [yes]: 15-7remotecon maxsessions <sessions>: 11-1remotecon timeout <timeout>: 11-2router-id <router_id>: 7-16routing: 5-2serial baudrate {baud}: 11-2serial timeout <timeout>: 11-3service dhcp: 10-1session-limit <0-5>: 11-3session-timeout <0-160>: 11-4set igmp groupmembershipinterval <membership-interval>: 4-26set igmp interfacemode all: 4-25set igmp maxresponse <response-interval>: 4-25set igmp mcrtexpiretime <expire-time>: 4-26set igmp: 4-24set prompt <prompt string>: 11-4


A-5

show arp : 5-13show arp brief: 5-15show arp switch: 3-30show bootpdhcprelay: 5-18show classofservice dot1pmapping <slot/port>: 4-29show clock: 15-20show eventlog: 15-12show forwardingdb agetime [fdbid | all] : 3-40show hardware: 15-13show igmpsnooping: 4-31show interface {<slot/port> | switchport}: 3-31show interface ethernet {<slot/port> | switchport}: 3-32show ip access-lists <accesslistnumber>: 14-4show ip dhcp binding [<address>]: 10-8show ip dhcp global configuration: 10-8show ip dhcp pool configuration {<name> | *}: 10-9show ip dhcp server statistics: 10-11show ip dvmrp interface <slot/port>: 9-19show ip dvmrp neighbor: 9-20show ip dvmrp nexthop: 9-21show ip dvmrp prune: 9-22show ip dvmrp route: 9-22show ip dvmrp: 9-18show ip http: 12-3show ip igmp groups <slot/port> [detail]: 9-23show ip igmp interface <slot/port>: 9-25show ip igmp interface membership <multiipaddr>: 9-26show ip igmp interface stats <slot/port>: 9-26show ip igmp: 9-24show ip interface <slot/port>: 5-6show ip interface brief: 5-8show ip irdp [<slot/port> | all]: 5-8show ip mcast boundary {<slot/port> | all}: 9-28show ip mcast interface <slot/port>: 9-28show ip mcast mroute {detail | summary}: 9-29show ip mcast mroute group <groupipaddr> {detail | summary}: 9-30show ip mcast mroute source <sourceipaddr> [<groupipaddr>] {detail | summary}: 9-32show ip mcast mroute static [<sourceipaddr>]: 9-33show ip mcast: 9-27show ip ospf area <areaid>: 7-24show ip ospf database: 7-26show ip ospf interface <slot/port>: 7-31show ip ospf interface brief: 7-33show ip ospf interface stats <slot/port>: 7-34show ip ospf neighbor [<ipaddr>] <slot/port>: 7-35show ip ospf neighbor brief {<slot/port> | all}: 7-37show ip ospf range <areaid>: 7-27show ip ospf stub table: 7-28show ip ospf virtual-link <areaid> <neighbor>: 7-28show ip ospf virtual-link brief: 7-30show ip ospf: 7-22show ip pimdm interface <slot/port>: 9-34show ip pimdm interface stats {<slot/port> | all}: 9-35show ip pimdm neighbor {<slot/port> | all}: 9-36show ip pimdm: 9-34


A-6

show ip pimsm candrptable: 9-37show ip pimsm componenttable: 9-38show ip pimsm interface <slot/port>: 9-38show ip pimsm interface stats {<slot/port> | all}: 9-39show ip pimsm neighbor {<slot/port> | all}: 9-39show ip pimsm rp {<groupaddress> <groupmask> | candidate | all}: 9-40show ip pimsm rphash <groupaddress>: 9-41show ip pimsm staticrp: 9-41show ip pimsm: 9-36show ip rip interface <slot/port>: 6-11show ip rip interface brief: 6-10show ip rip: 6-9show ip ssh: 12-5show ip vrrp interface <slot/port> <vrID>: 8-6show ip vrrp interface brief: 8-7show ip vrrp interface stats <slot/port> <vrID>: 8-8show ip vrrp: 8-5show logging: 15-8show loginsession: 11-10show mac-address-table igmpsnooping: 4-32show mac-address-table multicast [<macaddr> | all]: 4-33show mac-address-table static {<macaddr> <vlanid> | all}: 4-34show mac-address-table staticfiltering: 4-34show mac-address-table stats: 4-35show mac-addr-table [<macaddr> | all]: 3-39show memory utilization: 15-8show monitor: 4-36show mrinfo: 9-42show msglog: 15-12show mstat: 9-42show mtrace: 9-43show network: 3-10show port {<slot/port> | all}: 4-36show port protocol {<groupid> | all}: 4-38show port-channel {<logical slot/port> | all}: 4-39show port-channel brief: 4-40show processes cpu: 15-9show remotecon: 11-9show running-config: 15-10show serial: 11-10show snmpcommunity: 13-12show snmptrap: 13-13show sntp [client | server ]: 15-21show spanning-tree [brief]: 3-21show spanning-tree interface <slot/port>: 3-23show spanning-tree mst detailed <mstid>: 3-24show spanning-tree mst port detailed <mstid> <slot/port>: 3-25show spanning-tree mst port summary <mstid> {<slot/port> | all}: 3-27show spanning-tree mst summary: 3-28show spanning-tree summary: 3-29show spanning-tree vlan <vlanid>: 3-30show storm-control: 3-11show sysinfo: 15-10show trapflags: 13-14show users: 11-11


A-7

show vlan <vlanid>: 4-41show vlan brief: 4-42show vlan port {<slot/port> | all}: 4-43shutdown all: 3-4shutdown: 3-4snmp trap link-status all: 13-10snmp trap link-status: 13-9snmp-server {sysname <name> | location <loc> | contact <con>}: 15-1snmp-server community <name>: 13-1snmp-server community ipaddr <ipaddr> <name>: 13-2snmp-server community ipmask <ipmask> <name>: 13-3snmp-server community mode <name>: 13-3snmp-server community ro <name>: 13-4snmp-server community rw <name>: 13-5snmp-server enable traps bcaststorm: 13-6snmp-server enable traps linkmode: 13-6snmp-server enable traps multiusers: 13-7snmp-server enable traps stpmode: 13-7snmp-server enable traps: 13-5snmptrap <name> <ipaddr>: 13-8snmptrap ipaddr <name> <ipaddrold> <ipaddrnew>: 13-8snmptrap mode <name> <ipaddr>: 13-9sntp broadcast client poll-interval <6-10>: 15-16sntp client mode <broadcast | unicast>: 15-15sntp client port <port_value>: 15-16sntp server <ip_address> {priority_value}: 15-18sntp unicast client poll-interval <6-10>: 15-17sntp unicast client poll-retry <0-10>: 15-17sntp unicast client poll-timeout <1-30>: 15-18spanning-tree {<logical slot/port> | all} {off | 802.1d | fast}: 3-12spanning-tree bpdumigrationcheck {<slot/port> | all}: 3-13spanning-tree configuration name <name>: 3-13spanning-tree configuration revision <revision-level>: 3-14spanning-tree edgeport: 3-14spanning-tree forceversion <802.1d | 802.1w | 802.1s>: 3-15spanning-tree forward-time <f-time>: 3-15spanning-tree hello-time <h-time>: 3-16spanning-tree max-age <bridge-max-age>: 3-16spanning-tree mst <mstid> {cost <cost-value> | auto} : 3-17spanning-tree mst <mstid> port-priority <priority-value>: 3-18spanning-tree mst instance <mstid>: 3-18spanning-tree mst priority <mstid> <bridge-priority>: 3-19spanning-tree mst vlan <mstid> <vlanid>: 3-19spanning-tree port mode all: 3-20spanning-tree port mode: 3-20spanning-tree: 3-12speed <portspeed> {full-duplex | half-duplex} : 3-2speed all <portspeed>: 3-3split-horizon {none | simple | poison}: 6-6storm-control broadcast: 3-9storm-control flowcontrol: 3-9traceroute <ipaddr> [port’: 15-6transport {output | input} telnet: 11-5trapflags: 7-16users name <username>: 11-7


A-8

users passwd <username>: 11-7users snmpv3 accessmode <username> {readonly | readwrite}: 13-10users snmpv3 authentication <username> {none | md5 | sha}: 13-11users snmpv3 encryption <username> {none | des [key]}: 13-11vlan <vlanid>: 4-8vlan acceptframe {vlanonly | all}: 4-8vlan ingressfilter: 4-9vlan name <vlanid> <name>: 4-9vlan participation <participation-mode> <vlanid>: 4-10vlan participation all <participation-mode> <vlanid>: 4-11vlan port acceptframe all {vlanonly | all}: 4-11vlan port ingressfilter all: 4-12vlan port priority all <priority>: 4-28vlan port pvid all <vlanid>: 4-13vlan port tagging all <vlanid>: 4-13vlan priority <priority>: 4-29vlan protocol group <groupname>: 4-20vlan protocol group add protocol <groupid> <protocol>: 4-21vlan protocol group remove <groupid>: 4-21vlan pvid <vlanid>: 4-14vlan tagging <vlanid>: 4-14

Index

Page numbers in this index that are presented in boldface type indicate references to CLI commands in the text.

AAddress pools

DHCP 3Addressing

auto-configuration 7MAC address 6

Argumentssee CLI, parameters

ARPin protocol-based VLANs 21

Auto-completion 8

BBaud rate 2, 3, 4BGP, CLI configuration mode 5BootP 7Braces, meaning in command descriptions 10Brackets, meaning in command descriptions 10Bridge - see SwitchingBroadcast storms 9BWprovisioning

see CLI modes

CCautions 4CBSR - see Multicast, PIM-SMClass map - see CLI modesClearing configuration 2CLI

auto-completion of commands 8command format 10commands 3

"no" variants 3

heading format 10disconnecting sessions 6error messages 7local connection 2modes 4–7

mode structure 4privileged exec, enabling 6prompt suffixes 6starting mode 2

modes, changing 6modes, exiting 7parameters 3, 10passwords, setting 7prompt, customizing 4user accounts, creating 7values 3

Clock 14Color-coding, use of to identify CLI commands 10Commands - see CLICommunity - see SNMPConfiguration, reloading 7Configuration, reset to default 2Console

session timeout 2settings 2

Console port 1baud rate 2, 3, 4timeout 3

Contact information, assigning to BAR 1

DDate 14daylight savings time 20Default routers, in DHCP service 4Default, restoring BAR to default configuration 2


Index-2

Index

DHCP 7address pools

creating 3excluding 2

address pools, assigning addresses 7bindings, clearing 12client identifiers, specifying 3client names, setting 4default routers, configuring 4DNS servers, specifying 5host address binding 6lease duration 6service, enabling 1verification PING settings 2

DHCP Pool Configuration Mode 5DNS, specifying for DHCP service 5Downloading 3DVMRP - see Multicast

EEnable password 6Error messages 7Ethernet, auto-negotiation 1

FFile transfer, copying 3Full-duplex (Ethernet port setting) 2

GGigabit Ethernet

auto-negotiation 1see also ports, Ethernet

Global Configsee CLI modes

HHalf-duplex (Ethernet port setting) 2Help

showing key bindings 8system help capabilities 8Technical Support 5

IIdle timeout 3IGMP - see MulticastImage file, copying 3In-band management 2Interface config - see CLI modesInterfaces, identifying 9Interfaces, slot and port identification of 9IP (in protocol-based VLANs) 21IPX (in protocol-based VLANs) 21

KKeys, terminal key bindings 8

LLACP - see VLANLAGs - see VLAN, port-channelsLine config - see CLI modesLink trap notification

port-channels 4Local management 2Location, custom, assigning to BAR 1Logging out 7, 5Logs

clearing 3displaying 8

MMAC address

filtering, see VLANmodifying 6

Manuals, related documents 3MTU, setting length 6Multicast

boundaries, specifying 12DVMRP

activating 8metric, setting 7mode, activating 2

forwarding mode, activating 2IGMP

activating 1host query interval 9last member query count 8last member query interval 9response time (maximum) 10robustness metric, setting for an interface 10


Index-3

Index

startup queries, specifying for an interface 11

version, specifying 12join 5PIM-DM

activating 4enabling 13query interval 14

PIM-SMactivating 4CBSR preference, setting 14data threshold rate, setting 5enabling 15join/prune interval, setting 5query interval, setting 15rendezvous point, defining 7shortest path threshold, setting 6

prune 5reverse path forwarding routes, creating 3TTL threshold, setting for an interface 13

NName, assigning to BAR 1No form commands 3Notes 4NSSA - see Routing, OSPF

OOSPF

CLI configuration mode 5see also Routing, OSPF

PParameters - see CLI, parametersPasswords, clearing 8Physical ports 9PIM-DM - see MulticastPIM-SM - see MulticastPING

DHCP, use of for verification 2utility 6, 7

Pipe ( | ) symbol, meaning in command descriptions 10

Policy class - see CLI modesPolicy map - see CLI modesPort-channels, see VLANPorts

console, settings and control 1Ethernet

auto-negotiate 1port speed 2

MAC address, modifying 6shutting down 4

Ports, identifying in CLI commands 9PPPoE (in protocol-based VLANs) 21Private (SNMP access mode) - see Read-writePrivileged Exec - see CLI modesPrompt

identifying modes 6see also CLI

Protocol-based VLAN - see VLANProtocols, adding to protocol groups 21Public (SNMP access mode) - see Read only

RRead-only (SNMP community setting) 4Read-write (SNMP community setting) 5Remote management 2Reset

system 7terminal session 7

RIP (CLI configuration mode) 5Router Config - see CLI modesRouter Config BGP Mode 5Routing

OSPF1583, configuring compatibility 1activating 13areas, assigning interfaces to 17authentication 18authentication types 2authentication, for virtual links 8compatibility 1cost, assigning to interfaces 18dead interval timer configuration of 9dead interval, configuring 19default cost 2default metric, configuring 12distribute lists, creating 15enabling 17encrypted authentication 2exit overflow interval 14hello interval, configuration of 10hello interval, configuring 19intervals 9, 10, 14, 19, 21monetary cost - see Routing, OSPF, default cost

NSSAarea range, creating in NSSA 6configuring 3default route metrics 3


Index-4

Index

redistribution of learned routes 4stability interval, of border router 6

summary advertisement 4translator role, specifying 5

overflow state limit 14preference value for routes, setting 13priority value, specifying for an interface 20

redistribute lists, creating 15retransmit interval, configuration of 10retransmit interval, configuring 21route advertisement, configuring behavior 12

router ID, configuring 16stub area

creating 7LSA summary mode 7

transmit delay 21transmit delay, for virtual links 11virtual links, creating 8

RIPaccess list distribution 3authentication, configuring 7auto-summarization, enabling 1control packets, setting version 8default advertising, enabling 2distance value, setting 3enabling 4, 6horizon, selecting 6metric, configuring default 2preference value, setting 3redistribution 5

VRRPaddress, assigning to virtual router 2advertised value (of timers), setting 4authentication 3enabling 1preemption mode, enabling 3priority values, assigning 4virtual router, activating on an interface 5

virtual router, creating 2Routing interfaces, identifying virtual ports in

commands 9RPF - see Multicast

SSecure HTTP

browser access, enabling 3enabling operation 2version, setting 2

Secure shellenabling 4protocol level, setting 5

Serial portbaud rate 2, 3, 4see also Console port

Service and Supportcontacting 5obtaining documents 4

Service Convergence Network 5Session reset 7Slot/Port combinations 9SNMP

activation of trap messaging 9community mode, activating 3community, adding 1IP addresses, allowing for communities 2read-write access, by communities 5traps

broadcast storm 6enabling 5link mode 6multi-user 7receiving station, changing address 8receiving stations, defining 8spanning tree protocol 7

V3access levels 10authentication method 11encryption method 11

SNMP System Group 1Special characters, use in command descriptions 10SSLT port, setting 1Startup file, copying 3Stub areas - see Routing, OSPFSwitching

aging timeout 5interface MAC address configuration 6setting MTU size 6

system clockdaylight savings 20setting via SNTP 15, 16time zone setting 19


Index-5

IndexTTelnet 1

enabling 6Telnet, enabling support 5Terminal

key bindings 8see also Console

Terminal Emulator, settings 2Time 14time

daylight savings 20time zone setting 19

Tips 4Tokens - see CLI, parameters

UUploading 3User Exec - see CLI modesUsers

creating 7passwords 7

VVirtual ports 9VLAN

(CLI mode) -see CLI modesadding ports (to port-channel) 5clearing configurations 15creating 8frame acceptance, configuring 11IDs, changing 13, 14ingress filtering, activating 9ingress filtering, enabling 12LACP 19–20LAGs - see VLAN, port-channels 1MAC address filtering 16–19names, assigning 9network management VLAN, setting 7participation mode, setting 10, 11port-channel

activating 3adding ports to 5clearing 7creating 2deleting interfaces from 6deleting ports from 6enabling support 1naming 3

removing ports from 5protocol groups, creating 20protocol-based VLAN 20–24protocol-based VLAN, assigning interfaces 23protocol-based VLAN, assigning VLANs to 22removing ports (from port-channel) 5selecting frame acceptance mode 8tagging, enabling 13, 14

VRRP - see Routing, VRRP


Index-6

Index